diff options
Diffstat (limited to '37728.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 37728.txt | 11769 |
1 files changed, 11769 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/37728.txt b/37728.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba3011d --- /dev/null +++ b/37728.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11769 @@ +Project Gutenberg's South and South Central Africa, by H. Frances Davidson + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: South and South Central Africa + A record of fifteen years' missionary labors among primitive peoples + +Author: H. Frances Davidson + +Release Date: October 11, 2011 [EBook #37728] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA *** + + + + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + + + + +[Illustration: H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle.] + + + + + SOUTH AND SOUTH + CENTRAL AFRICA + + A RECORD OF FIFTEEN YEARS' + MISSIONARY LABORS AMONG + PRIMITIVE PEOPLES + + + BY + H. FRANCES DAVIDSON + + + (WITH PHOTOGRAPHS BY THE MISSIONARIES) + + + PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR BY + BRETHREN PUBLISHING HOUSE + ELGIN, ILL. + 1915 + + + Copyrighted by + H. FRANCES DAVIDSON + 1915 + + * * * * * + + Books may be obtained through + + H. R. DAVIDSON + AUBURN, IND. + Route 3 + + or + + M. L. HOFFMAN + ABILENE, KANS. + + + DEDICATED + TO + MY FATHER'S LIFELONG FRIEND + DR. W. O. BAKER + And to All Others, Who, Like Him, Are Deeply + Interested in the Evangelization of the + Dark Continent + + + + +INTRODUCTION + + +With utmost confidence and pleasure, I give an introductory expression +for this intelligible, authentic, and most valuable little volume, the +product of great sacrifice and long experience, by one who was favored +and honored with lucrative educational positions, being a classic. + +I have been acquainted with the authoress for many years, and am a +member of the Foreign Missionary Board under whose auspices she has most +effectually labored during an unbroken period of one and one-half +decades; therefore I speak with great assurance of the merits and hope +of her book, destined to be prolific and incentive to active missionary +operations in foreign lands. + +The photo-engravings have special interest, having been taken from real +life and nature as she found them in dark Africa--places, people, +environments, customs, habits, and religion, which she saw with her own +eyes and mind. Having thoroughly mastered various dialects of tribes +among whom she has labored so many years, having gathered many +historical facts relative to uncivilized races, and also having special +tact, instinct and God-given ability through the gift of the Spirit, +making her very efficient in her call to these dusky tribes, she is +qualified in a very proficient sense to compile the story of this +strange people. + +On meeting Sister H. Frances Davidson, one is quickly impressed with her +modest and unassuming disposition, the rare gift that characterizes all +the truly noble and great. + +Her heroism and unfaltering faith in Jehovah is most remarkably +demonstrated in her adventure--accompanied by Sister Adda Engle (Taylor) +and a native boy--into the wilds of Central Africa, unfrequented by the +tread or touch of any Gospel missioner, among a class of raw natives +that were very shy, rather hostile, and of another tongue, and a country +infested with wild, vicious animals. + +When the planning of this adventurous trip was heard by the Foreign +Missionary Board, steps were taken to discourage it, on the ground that +no white man was available to accompany them to the new prospective +mission field; but before the Board's protest could be made effective, +the dangerous journey was heroically and successfully executed and a new +mission station planted north of the great Zambezi, which is the +northern boundary of South Africa. + +Such an adventure would almost challenge the courage of the bravest man. +It must have been the leadings of the Lord--the inspiration of the Holy +Spirit. + +We all love to read the truthful words that drop from the pen of such +fearless, devoted, and consecrated souls. + +The book is written in a clear, graphic, and condensed manner, just the +thing for this busy, rushing generation. + +We bespeak for it a precious harvest of lasting fruitage. + +Yours in the hope of the Gospel, + + J. R. ZOOK, + + Chairman of the Missionary Board + of the Brethren in Christ's Church. + + + + +PREFACE + + +Africa holds a unique place in the world today. In no other continent is +there such a world-wide interest and such a variety of interests +centered; the religious, the political, and the commercial world are +alike concerned in its development and progress. It has been a sealed +book for so many centuries that the majority of people have excused +themselves on that score for their ignorance of its conditions and their +indifference as to its welfare; but the day of pardonable ignorance is +past. + +While kings and emperors have been eagerly seeking to obtain as large a +slice of its territory as possible, and moneyed men have been unearthing +some of its vast wealth, missionaries, too, have been having a share in +it. In the development of Africa they may, without boasting, claim to be +making the most permanent contribution to its welfare, but even their +work is only begun. The various interests, which for a long time were +concerned with only the countries along the coast, have now penetrated +and opened up that vast interior to civilization and missionary +enterprise; and it remains for the Christians to say whether it shall be +left to the influences of a corrupt civilization or whether they will +shoulder their responsibilities and rise to their privileges in taking +the country for God. + +Many missionary bodies are already at work, and much is being +accomplished; but the continent is so gigantic, the distances to be +traversed so immense that it will require the united efforts of all +God's children to pay the debt humanity owes to this long-neglected +continent and those downtrodden pagans. + +It has been my aim in these pages to give, without embellishment, some +idea of the nature of the Africans, their character, customs, religion, +and surroundings, as well as some of the difficulties, methods, +encouragements, and discouragements of missionary work among them. +Missionaries are often censured for being too optimistic, for giving +only the bright side of their work, therefore I have studiously sought +to avoid this attitude and to give an unvarnished account of missionary +enterprise. Judging from my own convictions and beliefs in reference to +the work, it seems to me that if I have erred in this respect, it has +been by understating rather than overstating the value and encouraging +results arising from such labors. + +This book does not claim to be a complete history of the Brethren in +Christ's Missions in Africa, but rather some of the experiences of one +member of that mission body. Since, however, it has been my privilege to +be with the work from its inception, the enclosed narrative will have +the added value of giving at least something of the beginning and early +history of the mission. My only apology for recounting so much of my +personal experience and impressions in the work is that I am unable to +give, properly, the experience and viewpoint of anyone else. + +We desire to express our thanks to Mrs. Myron Taylor, formerly Miss Adda +Engle, for the majority of the photographs with which this work is +illustrated; also to Elder Steigerwald and the other missionaries who +have furnished a number of them. We had hoped to have some later ones +from Matopo and Mtshabezi Missions, but have failed in securing good +ones. + +If this little volume in some small degree arouses a greater interest +among Christians in the evangelization of the Dark Continent, and is a +means in God's hands of getting the light to a few more of the vast +millions of pagan Africans, I shall feel more than repaid for sending it +on its mission. + + H. FRANCES DAVIDSON. + + Auburn, Ind. + + + + +CONTENTS + + + PART I + + Matopo Mission + + CHAPTER I. + + Early Missionary Labors--Origin of Foreign Missionary + Work, 1894--After Two Years--An Appeal--My + Call--First Missionaries--Preparing to Sail, + 1897, 19 + + CHAPTER II. + + On the Deep--England--Bound for Cape Town--Matabeleland + Chosen--Landing at Cape Town, 29 + + CHAPTER III. + + Cape Town--Elder Engle's Interview with Mr. Rhodes--Zulu + Language--Mrs. Lewis' Kindness--Journey + to Bulawayo, 38 + + CHAPTER IV. + + Matabeleland--Wars with the Natives--Hide in the + Matopo Hills--Bulawayo--Selection of a Mission + Site, 45 + + CHAPTER V. + + Trekking to the Hills, 1898--Chief and His People--First + View of the Mission Site--Building Huts--Misunderstandings + with the Natives--Missionaries + Working, 53 + + CHAPTER VI. + + Opening of School--Its Equipments and Work--Sunday + Services--Learning the + Language--Kraal-visiting--Matshuba--Sunday-school, 66 + + CHAPTER VII. + + Reinforcements and Supplies--Mr. and Mrs. Cress, Mr. + I. O. Lehman, 1899--Clothing for the People--Building-- + Old Queen--First Baptisms--Boer War, 83 + + CHAPTER VIII. + + The Cresses Open Mission Station--Sickness and Death + of Sister Cress and Elder Engle, 1900--Sickness + and Seventh Day Adventist Doctor--Wedding--Brother + Cress and Sister Engle Return to America, + 1900, 96 + + CHAPTER IX. + + Resuming the Work--Boys' Confession--Hluganisa and + School--Kraal-visiting--Locusts--Ndhlalambi--Sickness + of the Lehmans--Trouble in Reference to + Mission Farm, 107 + + CHAPTER X. + + Mr. L. Doner and Miss Emma Long Arrive, 1901--The + Lehmans Go to Cape Town--Industrial Work--Elder + and Mrs. Steigerwald Arrive, 1901--Building + House on a Mission Station--Training Natives--School + Work, 126 + + CHAPTER XI. + + Death of Mr. Rhodes, 1903--Of Fusi--Furlough and + South Africa--The Compound's Missions--Native + Bee--Appearance of Congregation, 140 + + CHAPTER XII. + + First View of Mapani Land--Medical Work--Reminded + of Call to Interior--Return to America, 1904--Miss + Sallie Kreider, 1904--Opening of Mapani Mission + and Sister Doner's Death, 1904--Return to + Africa with Mr. and Mrs. Frey and Misses Adda + Engle and Abbie Bert, 1905--Mtshabezi Mission, + 1906, 155 + + CHAPTER XIII. + + Religion of Matabele--Ideas of God--Umlimo Oracle-- + Rainmaker--Witchcraft--Transmigration + of Souls--Spiritualism, 173 + + CHAPTER XIV. + + Customs--Putting Children to Death--Betrothal and + Marriage--Native Kraal--Polygamy--Food and + Beer--King Khama--Visits--Generosity and Politeness-- + Death and Burial--Grave of King Mzilikazi, 191 + + CHAPTER XV. + + Visit to Matopo, 1910--Improvements--Brother and + Sister Doner--Mapani--Mtshabezi--Visit in 1913-- + Bulawayo and Vicinity--Changes at Matopo--Aiding + the People--Love Feast at Mtshabezi--What Hath God + Wrought? 212 + + + PART II + + Macha Mission + + CHAPTER I. + + Early Missionary Labors--Railroad Building--Starting + for the Zambezi, 1906--Victoria Falls--David + Livingstone--Barotseland and Other Missions, 237 + + CHAPTER II. + + Preparing to Advance--Broken Wagon--Journey to + Kalomo--Interviewing Officials--Difficulties in the + Way--Permission to Proceed--Macha, 252 + + CHAPTER III. + + Why Selected--Living on the Veldt--First Huts--Spiritual + Duties--Learning an Unwritten Language--First + Christmas, 263 + + CHAPTER IV. + + Trying to Begin School--Chief Brings His Son--Industrial + Work--School Books--Wild Animals--Threatened + Uprising--Mr. M. Taylor Arrives, 1907--White + Ants--Visit to Nanzela, 277 + + CHAPTER V. + + Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger Arrive, 1908--Need of + Good Houses--Making Brick--Tsetse Fly--Brother + Taylor's Encounter with Lions, 295 + + CHAPTER VI. + + School Work--English--Evangelistic Work--Brother + Taylor Among the Baila--Building a House--Elder + Steigerwald and Brother Doner Go North--Visit + of Elders J. N. Engle and J. Sheets--Marriage--First + Baptism, 306 + + CHAPTER VII. + + Furlough--Encounter with Elephant--Misses E. Engle + and Mary Heisey Visit Macha--Preparing the New + Testament--Out-schools--Murder of Chief--Taylors + or Furlough--Death of Semani, 323 + + CHAPTER VIII. + + Baby Ruth--Building Church--Training Natives--The + Year's Work--Brother Taylor Itinerating--Elder + Steigerwald's Visit, 343 + + CHAPTER IX. + + New Books--Native Problems--Studying the Native + Character--Child Life--Natives Resourceful--Dark + Side of Native Character, 355 + + CHAPTER X. + + Are They Lazy?--Three Natives--Home Training--Charlie-- + Are They Provident?--Naturalists--Attitude Toward + Whites--Generosity of Some--Kraal-visiting, 372 + + CHAPTER XI. + + Ideas of God--Native Prophetesses--Rainmakers--Death + and Burial--Digging a Grave--Sacrifice of + Animals--Beer-wailings--Evil Spirits, 387 + + CHAPTER XII. + + Tribal Mark--Decorating the Body--Kinship--Betrothal + and Marriage--The Bride--Hindrances to Mission + Work--Compared to the Matabele--Salutations, 402 + + CHAPTER XIII. + + Ruth's Sickness--Medical Work--A Visit Among the + People--Remember the Aged--David Goes to School--Taylors + Go to America, 1913--Wenger's Return--Outpouring + of the Spirit--Miss E. Engle and Mr. + L. B. Steckley Come to Macha--First Women Baptized, 418 + + CHAPTER XIV. + + Two Objects Paramount--Need of Native Evangelists--Visit + to Out-schools--Mianda--Impongo--Kabanzi--Kabwe--Myeki-- + Chilumbwe, 440 + + CHAPTER XV. + + Lehmans' Work--Eysters' Work--Doners Open New + Station--Present Status--Are the People Eager to + Hear?--What It Means to Be a Missionary--Qualifications-- + Difficulties--God Is Able, 466 + + + + +LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS + + + H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle, Frontispiece + + Hut Built by H. Frances Davidson and Alice Heise at + Matopo, 58 + + Matopo Mission, March, 1899, 63 + + Matopo Mission Church in 1899. Built by Elder Jesse + Engle, 87 + + Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness, 91 + + Elder Engle and Donkey Team at Matopo Mission, 99 + + Matopo Cemetery, 103 + + Matopo Mission House. Front View, 131 + + "Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes," 149 + + Matopo Mission Church. Built by Elder Steigerwald in + 1905, 159 + + Back View of Matopo Mission House, Showing Granite Hill + Beyond, 161 + + In the Matopo Hills, 163 + + Mapani Mission, 1907, 168 + + Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church. Matopo M. Hospital, 170 + + Christian Wedding Reception Near Matopo, 171 + + Matabele Kraal, Near Matopo Mission, 196 + + Matabele Women Stamping Grain, 201 + + Matabele Women Digging, 207 + + Building the Boys' House at Matopo, M. S., 215 + + Boys' Brick House at Matopo Mission, 215 + + A Native Christian's Home. Matshuba's, 217 + + Mtshabezi Church and School, 221 + + Mtshabezi Mission in 1910, 221 + + Mtshabezi. Baptismal Scene, 224 + + Girls at Mtshabezi Mission, 230 + + Victoria Falls Bridge, 241 + + Main View of Victoria Falls, 1-1/4 Miles Wide, 246 + + Macha Mission Huts, 1907, 281 + + Macha Boys and Schoolhouse, 287 + + The Last Invitation, 291 + + Making Brick at Macha, 302 + + Brick Kiln. Mr. Jesse Wenger and Helpers, 302 + + Macha Mission Dwelling House, 307 + + Elder Steigerwald and Mr. Doner on Their Trip North + of Macha, 313 + + Crossing the Kafue River in a Native Dugout, 315 + + Batonga Chiefs and Headmen, 317 + + First Baptismal Scene at Macha. Native Congregation + Not Visible, 319 + + Wedding Dinner at Macha, 320 + + The Elephant That Derailed the Train, 325 + + Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910, 327 + + Macha Wagon and Oxen Near an Ant Hill, 330 + + Simeoba's Village, Viewing the Strangers, 334 + + Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River in the + Matopo Hills, 337 + + The Battle Palm, 340 + + Macha Mission Church and Boys' House, 347 + + Ruth Taylor and Her Mother. A White Child in the + Midst, 351 + + Little Nurses. Mianda Village, 359 + + Batonga Fisher Women, 364 + + Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens in the Foreground, 404 + + Cattle Pen of the Batonga, 406 + + A Batonga Family Traveling, 408 + + Native Women--Widows, 410 + + Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife, 412 + + Giving the Gospel in Macha Village, 414 + + Macha Mission, 1913, 419 + + Ruth Taylor, 423 + + First Christian Marriages at Macha, 426 + + David Moyo and His Wife and Child, 429 + + Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers on a Visit + to Macha, 431 + + Batonga Chiefs, Near Macha Mission, 435 + + School at Kabanzi Village, 446 + + Sikaluwa, 456 + + Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg, 469 + + Mr. and Mrs. Isaac O. Lehman and Family, 474 + + Boxburg Mission Station. Built by Mr. Jesse Eyster, 479 + + + + PART ONE + + MATOPO MISSION + + "Go ye therefore and teach all nations" + + --Matt. 28: 19 + + + + +SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA + + + + +CHAPTER ONE + +The Beginning of Missionary Effort + + +It was at the General Conference held in May, 1894, that the Foreign +Missionary Work of the Church of the Brethren in Christ originated. + +Previous to that time the old fathers of the church had made many +missionary journeys through the United States and Canada for the +advancement of Christ's Kingdom and in the interests of the faith they +so dearly loved. These journeys were made without remuneration and often +with great discomfort and sacrifice of time and money. The precept that +the Gospel was free, "without money and without price," seemed so +instilled into their hearts that some of them, no doubt, would have felt +pained for people to think that they expected money for their services. +So while the laity were busy with their own temporal duties, these +heralds of the Cross would often leave their little farms in care of +their wives and of help, hired at their own expense, and devote weeks +and months to evangelistic work, expecting what? Nothing but their food +and sometimes sufficient to pay their car fare, if they went by train. +But it often happened in those early days that the entire expense of +whatever sort was borne by themselves. They looked for no reward on +earth save the consciousness that they were about their Master's +business and seeking to extend His Kingdom on earth. + +Much honor is due those old soldiers for their self-sacrificing labors. +In that Great Day when the books are opened, perhaps the record of their +labors may astonish some of us who sometimes criticise them for their +slowness in launching the foreign missionary work of the Church. + +Among them were some who were greatly burdened for the heathen. Some +felt this lack of Church activity so keenly that they almost severed +their connections with it on this account. Others saw the need, but, +realizing the smallness of membership and the limited resources, thought +the Church was too weak to launch out into foreign missionary +enterprise. + +In the meantime individual members were agitating the question, and some +were planning to go independently to India and to Central America, while +others were contemplating going under other Mission Boards. + +While this agitation was going on, the question of foreign mission work +was brought forward at the General Conference in May, 1894, held in the +Bethel Church, Kansas. On Friday, the last day of the Conference, a +paper on the subject was read by Mrs. Rhoda Lee, but no active steps +were taken and the question was tabled indefinitely, to the great +disappointment of some present. Later, on the same day, Elder J. E. +Stauffer arose, and, placing a five-dollar bill on the table, stated +that it was for foreign mission work, then sat down. This action +brought matters to a crisis. Here was missionary money and something +must be done with it. + +After consultation it was decided that the donor be appointed Foreign +Missionary Treasurer, and any desiring to donate should give their +offerings to him; and that, as soon as sufficient money was in the +treasury to justify the measure, active steps would be taken toward +sending out missionaries. By the close of the day thirty-five dollars +had been placed in the hands of the Treasurer. The funds increased +slowly but steadily. + +At the Conference of 1895 held in Ontario, "A Foreign Mission Board, +consisting of Brethren Peter Steckly, B. T. Hoover, and J. E. Stauffer, +was appointed to hold office for five years, subject, however, to the +advice and control of General Council." At the next meeting of +Conference in 1896 in Pennsylvania, "The Treasurer of the Foreign +Mission Fund, J. E. Stauffer, submitted his report, and he was +congratulated for his successful effort. The amount in the treasury is +$419.60." This amount had been donated in two years. These data have +been given that it may be seen how the work has grown. + +At this meeting it was decided that the funds had increased sufficiently +to take an advanced step. The Board was increased to twelve members with +an operating board of three. Of this Elder Samuel Zook was appointed +treasurer, Elder Henry Davidson, chairman, and Elder Jesse Engle, +secretary. The Board was empowered to secure volunteers for starting a +work among the heathen in some foreign country, no particular country +being designated. + +Of the General Board of twelve members, Brethren Peter Steckley, J. R. +Zook, and Peter Climenhage are still on the Board after a lapse of +eighteen years. + +Just what was done in the interim I cannot say, but on January 15, 1897, +there appeared in the _Evangelical Visitor_ the following: + + AN APPEAL + + We would call attention to the fact that the committee appointed at + last Conference is ready to act on the foreign mission work, but up + to this time they have received no applications. Why is it? Does + the Lord not speak to some hearts? Or is it because the Church is + not praying the Lord of the harvest to send laborers into His + harvest? + + The field is white. The harvest is ready. Who will go forth in the + name of the Master, filled with the Holy Ghost, ready to lay his or + her life down for the cause of Christ's salvation to the heathen? + It means something to be a foreign missionary. It means a full + sacrifice of home, friends and self--a perfect cutting loose. But, + praise the Lord! when it is done for Christ's sake and the + Gospel's, we shall receive an hundredfold in this life and eternal + life in the world to come. + + The Lord has provided money--somebody was willing to give it, but + who will give himself? I believe the Lord has spoken to your heart. + Just say, "Lord, speak, thy servant heareth." And if the Lord tells + you to go, don't do as Jonah--try to get away from the Lord---for + as Jonah did not fare well, neither will you. But if you obey God, + He will go with you into the ship. We are ready and waiting to + receive applications, but somebody must be willing to obey God or + the work will be delayed while souls are perishing. + + If the Lord lays it upon your heart to give because you can not go + yourself, please send your donations to Elder + Jesse Engle, Donegal, Kansas, as he is the committee's secretary + and will keep a correct account of all money received and hand it + over to the treasurer. The committee has not decided yet where the + field shall be, but will decide when such workers present + themselves as are believed to be called of God. South Africa has + been spoken of; also South or Central America. No doubt God will + direct when the time comes that somebody is willing to go. Who + shall it be? + + SAMUEL ZOOK. + +At that time I was teaching in McPherson College, Kansas, and was +greatly enjoying the work. It was my seventh year at that place, and +just the day before the article had appeared I had entered into a verbal +agreement with the other members of the faculty to remain for some +years, the Lord willing. No thought of the foreign field had entered my +mind previous to this, except a readiness for whatever the Lord had for +me to do. Up to that time I verily thought I was doing His will by being +in the classroom. + +The day that "The Appeal" appeared in the _Visitor_, it was read like +the other matter and nothing further was thought of it; but the day +following the Lord came to me, as it were, in the midst of the class +work, in the midst of other plans for the future, and swept away my +books, reserving only the Bible. In reality He showed me Christ lifted +up for a lost world. He filled me with an unutterable love for every +soul who had not heard of Him, and with a passionate longing to go to +worst parts of the earth, away from civilization, away from other +mission bodies, and spend the rest of my life in telling the story of +the Cross. + +We prefer not to dwell too minutely on the feelings of that sacred hour. +Sufficient to say that there and then He anointed me for service among +the heathen. Not that I have measured up to all that He placed before me +on that day. On the contrary I have fallen far short; but the +consciousness of that call has ever been with me, and has strengthened +and kept me, in the thickest of the fight in heathen lands. Even when +the battle was sore and defeat stared me in the face, the conviction +that it was His appointment and His work for me kept me fast. + +My first step was to go to my colleagues and ask to be released from the +agreement into which I had entered with them. They were as much +surprised at the turn affairs had taken as I had been, but readily +agreed not to stand in the way of the Lord's call. A letter was then +sent to the Mission Board, informing them of the call to service and my +readiness to go and at once if they deemed it advisable to send me. + +Much had been said about missionary work and many had seemed eager to +go, so that I somewhat tremblingly awaited the result, feeling that they +might not consider me fitted. At the same time a private letter was +dispatched to my father, who was Chairman of the Board, telling him of +my convictions and call. A letter came first from dear father. He had +been quite unprepared for the news contained in my letter, and his +answer can best be summed up in two of his sentences: "How can I say +yes? and how dare I say no?" He closed the letter by advising me to wait +a year or two until others were ready to go. The official letter from +the Board through the Secretary, Elder Jesse Engle, stated that I was +the only applicant so far and had been accepted, but that there would be +time to finish the year's teaching. It was quite a surprise and +disappointment to me to learn that there were still no other applicants, +but not long afterwards word came that Elder Jesse Engle and wife were +likewise seriously considering the question. + +He, as many of my readers know, had realized a call to give the Gospel +to the heathen while he was still a young man, but probably from lack of +encouragement and from other seemingly insurmountable obstacles had not +obeyed. Now, at the advanced age of fifty-nine years, he still felt that +his work was not done; and he was ready to enter the field, if his way +opened, even though it might appear to be at the eleventh hour. And she, +who had nobly stood by his side for so many years, could still say, "My +place is beside my husband. Where he goes I too will follow." + +In the meantime the question as to the location of this first missionary +venture was beginning to agitate the minds of some of us. The Board felt +that the missionaries should be consulted in the matter. The conditions +then existing in South America were attracting the attention of the +Christian world. Some countries, notably Equador, were for the first +time being opened to missionaries. The sore need there appealed to me +and led to correspondence with others in reference to that field; but no +one was ready to go there. Later I learned from Brother Engle that he +was led to Africa, the country of his early call. The location was +immaterial to me, for my call was to the neediest field, and I soon +realized that Africa, with its unexplored depths, its superstition and +degradation, its midnight darkness, was surely in need of the Light of +Life. + +The cheering news soon came that Miss Alice Heise also had applied and +been accepted as a foreign missionary. That increased the number to +four. + +At the General Conference in May, 1897, at Valley Chapel, Ohio, the +following report was given and adopted: + + Report of the amount of money in the hands of the Treasurer of + Foreign Mission to date, $693.46. + + Four candidates presented themselves for the foreign mission field + and have been accepted as follows: Elder Jesse Engle and Sister + Elizabeth Engle, his wife, of Donegal, Kansas; Sister H. Frances + Davidson, Abilene, Kansas; and Sister Alice Heise, Hamlin, Kansas, + and if approved by Conference, it is recommended that they should + be ready to start for their field of labor as early as September or + October, provided that sufficient means are at hand to pay their + passage to their place of destination, which means are to be raised + by voluntary contributions as the Lord may direct, and to be sent + directly to the address of each of the missionaries. + + The Board recommends that to complete the number of workers there + should be one more added to the number in the person of a brother + as an assistant to Brother Jesse Engle. + + The Board further recommends that the Conference now in session + select some well qualified brother to fill the vacancy occasioned + by Brother Jesse Engle on the Foreign Mission Board. Brother W. O. + Baker was appointed + to fill the vacancy (provided Brother Engle should go); all of + which is respectfully submitted. + + HENRY DAVIDSON, Chairman. + SAMUEL ZOOK, Treasurer. + +The summer of 1897 passed slowly for some of us who were eager to be on +the way; but even the days of waiting and visiting were a part of our +preparation. They were solemn and momentous days also to others besides +those who were going. Some of the friends felt that we should not go; +others with tears bade us Godspeed, feeling that we might probably never +look one another in the face on earth again. In October a little +farewell meeting was held at Dayton, Ohio, where God's blessing was +invoked on the work, and here I said good-bye to dear old father, +realizing that it would likely be for the last time. At Harrisburg, +Pennsylvania, we were pleased to receive into our number Miss Barbara +Hershey, of Kansas, who also was called to the work. + +The actual moving out of the missionaries was also a great impetus to +the financial part of the undertaking. During the few months previous to +sailing $1,500 was given by voluntary contributions into the hands of +the missionaries themselves, more than half of which was handed to +Brother and Sister Engle in their extended tour of the Brotherhood. In +addition to this, $639.70 was during the same time handed to the +Treasurer, making $1,211.64 in his hands. + +On November 21 a general farewell and ordination meeting for all was +held in the Messiah Home Chapel, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, where the +five prospective missionaries were set apart for the work of the Lord. +No brother had volunteered to go along as a helper to Elder Engle. This +was a solemn time to those going, for a new and untried field was before +them and a voyage and country of which they as yet knew nothing. And yet +there was no fear, no anxiety. On the contrary, to some of us the joy of +having the privilege of being His messengers to those sitting in +darkness transcended all other emotions, and our journal of that time is +full of expressions of longing to be in darkest Africa. At that meeting +Elder Engle delivered a farewell address with power and unction from on +High, and the rest told of their call. After the ordination of all had +taken place, we commemorated the death and sufferings of our Savior. + +If we may judge from expressions made at the time and since, there were +others in that large audience that evening to whom the occasion was an +important and impressive one. The Church was rising to a sense of her +opportunity and privilege--yes, and duty of carrying out the Great +Commission. As we went forth, we felt that the prayers of the entire +Church were bearing us up, and that gave renewed strength and courage +all along the way. Those prayers buoyed us up as we went forth even into +the blackness of heathendom; they opened doors that otherwise would have +been closed; yes, and best of all, they opened dark hearts that the +light of the glorious Gospel of Christ might penetrate. Those prayers +yet today are rising as sweet incense in behalf of the Dark Continent. + + + + +CHAPTER TWO + +The Voyage and Landing + +Now the Lord had said unto Abraham, Get thee out of thy country and from +thy kindred and from thy father's house, unto a land that I will shew +thee.--Gen. 12: 1. + + +Seventeen years ago a voyage to Africa was not the common occurrence to +us plain country folk that it is today. The majority of us had never +seen the sea, we knew no one who had made the trip, and we knew less +about the continent of Africa. + +It had been decided that we should sail November 24, 1897. While Elder +and Mrs. Engle were making their tour of the churches, some of us had +finished visiting and were waiting the time of sailing. So he suggested +that we secure the tickets. We did so to England, and through an agent, +Mr. Mills, of England, arranged in advance for tickets from England to +Cape Town. The tickets were bought, the good-byes were over, and the +date of sailing found us all at New York Harbor, a little anxious, it is +true, but eager to launch. + +Being inexperienced, we had a little difficulty in having some money +matters attended to. Sister Hershey and myself had each a draft which we +desired to have exchanged for one on an English bank, and were told by +one of the men to take them to the bank on which they were drawn and +have it attended to there. So we were obliged to go up into the city +the morning of the date of sailing, when the steamer was to leave at 12 +M. We were gone all morning, only to find on reaching the bank that +there was no one to identify us, and nothing could be done. Hurrying +back to the hotel, we secured our hand baggage and hastened to the +wharf. The rest of the company had already embarked, and only a few +minutes remained until time of sailing, but we appealed to our agent to +exchange the drafts for some on an English bank. Although one of the +other men objected on account of the shortness of time, he promptly +attended to them, Elders Jacob Engle and John Niesly, who were brothers +of Brother and Sister Engle and had come to see them off, going +security. The gangway for passengers had already been removed from the +steamer and we hurried along that on which baggage was carried. As soon +as we were aboard, the steamer _Majestic_ began to move; and ere we +found the rest of our company on board, a narrow stretch of water lay +between us and our native land. + +This, our first voyage across the Atlantic, was a delightful one. The +sea was unusually calm for that season of the year, so that none of our +number became sick, except one, as we neared the coast of Ireland. The +passengers on board were on the whole congenial. As we paced up and down +the deck, many thoughts crowded in upon us too deep for utterance. What +did the future have in store for us? What awaited us on the other side? +The Lord alone, whose messengers we were, could foresee. The great, +wide, boundless space of water was an ever-increasing source of +interest and delight, and greatly enlarged our conception of the power +and majesty of Him "who hath measured the waters in the hollow of His +hand." We felt in truth that we had let go the shore lines and had +launched out into the ocean of His love. + +The second day out was Thanksgiving Day, and in company with another +missionary on board we had a very enjoyable service which was attended +by most of the second-class passengers. Sunday morning there were the +regulation Church of England services, and later our genial table +steward asked Elder Engle to preach in the evening. He did so to a +large, intelligent, and interested congregation. As there had been much +conjecture among the passengers as to who we were, and what our belief +was, he embraced the opportunity, while speaking, of setting forth some +of the tenets of our faith, much to the satisfaction of those present. + +On November 31 the steamer reached Liverpool, England, and the first +part of the voyage was at an end. As we stood on deck gazing at the +strange scenes around us and at the sea of unfamiliar faces looking up +into ours, and awaiting our turn to disembark, we realized in truth that +we were strangers in a strange land. How was our agent to be found on +that crowded wharf?--but this question was quickly settled. No sooner +had we stepped off the gangway, than a gentleman approached, and, naming +us, introduced himself as Mr. Mills, our agent. What a relief it was to +all of us in our ignorance of foreign travel! We were thus forcibly +reminded that He was going before and preparing the way so that we need +have no anxious fear. This thought was further impressed upon our minds +as we entered our room in the little hotel in Liverpool, for there, on +the opposite wall, as we opened the door were the words, "The Lord shall +be thy confidence." Mr. Mills then and there took charge of us and our +baggage and did not relax his vigilance until we had safely embarked for +South Africa. + +Fortunate it was that our baggage was in such good hands, for part of it +had been miscarried and reached the steamer at Southampton only about an +hour before we left that port for South Africa. English travel has many +things to recommend it, some of which Americans would do well to profit +by; but one learns to appreciate the excellent system of handling +baggage in America only after he has had a little experience of the +slipshod manner in vogue abroad. This fact was again brought to my +attention on my first furlough to America nearly seven years later. When +I disembarked at New York, an English lady from the same steamer bought +a railroad ticket from New York to San Francisco and checked her +baggage. + +I said to her, "Now you need not trouble yourself about your baggage +until you reach your destination." + +"So they tell me," she replied. "It will seem so strange to travel +without having to look after one's luggage." + +One is pleased to note, however, that the increased amount of foreign +travel of late years has brought about some improvement along this line, +even in conservative England. + +The ride from Liverpool to London was most enjoyable, and would have +been still more so had there been some one to point out the places of +interest. The fields, still green at that late date, were well kept; but +the methods employed in farming seemed somewhat antiquated to people +fresh from the farms of western America. As the train glided along we +were favored with a glimpse of a hunting party in their brilliant +colored costumes in pursuit of the poor little animals on one of the +game reserves. The small private compartments on the train were a +pleasing novelty, but there was no one to call off the names of the +cities through which the train was passing, and the surroundings were +too new for us to know where to look for the names. Once when the guard +came to examine our tickets, I inquired the name of the place. +Concluding from his silence that he had not understood, I ventured to +repeat the question. The stare he gave made me realize that I had been +guilty of a breach of something, but what it was is not exactly clear to +me to this day. We also had a glimpse of London, that great metropolis, +with its narrow, crowded streets, its rush of business, and its +perfectly-controlled business traffic. Here our company was met by +another agent, who conveyed us to Black Wall and placed us on the +steamer _Pembroke Castle_, of the Union Castle Line, for a three weeks' +voyage to Cape Town. + +The associations on the _Majestic_ had been pleasant and we expected a +similar experience on this second steamer; but the long voyage to Cape +Town leaves much to be desired. One may always find some congenial +spirits, but even under the best circumstances the voyage finally +becomes tiresome. Only too often the more turbulent element gains the +upperhand, so that drinking, gambling, dancing, and even grosser evils +prevail. + +After sailing from Southampton one soon leaves behind the cold, chilly +winds of the temperate climate and begins to enjoy the soft, balmy +breezes of the subtropical climate. However, as the heat becomes more +intense, this enjoyment gradually gives place to discomfort. The only +stop on the way to Cape Town was at Las Palmas, on Canary Island. As we +approached the place, the low-lying mountain peaks could have been +mistaken for clouds, but soon the entire island lay before us in all its +beauty. What appeared at first sight to be bare cliffs were soon seen to +be clothed with verdure; and while we were feasting our eyes on the +scene, on one side of the steamer, our attention was called to the +opposite side where the city of Las Palmas lay. It was indeed a +magnificent scene and beggars description. The city, which is almost +entirely white, rises tier after tier up the mountain side, and the +whole had a dark background of mountain peaks. We were in the bay with +the island nearly surrounding us. In a short time our steamer was +encompassed by a number of small boats full of natives, some of whom +came to sell their wares of fruit or fancywork. Other boats were full of +diving boys, ready to plunge into the sea for money thrown from the +steamer into the water. + +In a short time the steamer was again on its way; but where was it +taking the little band of missionaries? and what was to be their final +destination? Their tickets called for Cape Town, but beyond that the way +seemed like a sealed book. Africa, with its barbarism, its unknown +depths, its gross darkness, lay before them; and they were keenly +conscious of their ignorance of the continent. They had implicit +confidence, however, in their Great Leader, and believed that they were +going to a place which the Lord said He would show them. Many prayers +ascended that they might understand His voice when He spoke to them. + +Personally their ideas about the location of the work differed. At first +Elder Engle felt drawn for various reasons towards the Transvaal (not +Johannesburg), because that was not so far inland. To one of the party +the call had been distinctly into the interior and most needy regions +where Christ had not been named. All, however, were ready to let the +Lord lead. + +A number of the passengers on the steamer were familiar with some parts +of Africa and gave valuable information. One of the officers, the chief +engineer, was especially helpful. He brought out his maps and went +carefully over the ground, showing where missionaries were located and +where there was need. Ere the party left the steamer, the consensus of +opinion seemed to be that Rhodesia, or the part of it known as +Matabeleland, was the Lord's place for them to begin aggressive +missionary work. This was further confirmed when it was learned that the +Cape to Cairo Railroad had just been completed as far as Bulawayo, the +chief town of Matabeleland. + +This having been decided upon, the next question was as to how long they +were to remain at Cape Town before proceeding into the interior. The +amount of money at their disposal was not large, and as it was the +Lord's money it was necessary to know His will as to its disposal. They +soon learned that He was continuing to go before and prepare the way. +Those were precious days of waiting on Him; for never does His will and +guidance seem so precious as when He is showing only one step at a time, +and as one becomes willing to take that, lo! another is revealed just +beyond. Why then do we so often halt, fearing to walk alone with Him, +knowing that we cannot stumble as long as we keep hold of His dear hand? + +On December 26 the steamer entered beautiful Table Bay, and the long +voyage was over. Praises ascended to Him Who had given such a prosperous +journey. It was Sunday when land was reached and the passengers were +allowed to remain on board the steamer until Monday if they so desired. +All of us attended divine services on land Sunday morning, and in the +afternoon Brother and Sister Engle went to the Y. W. C. A. Building +where the Secretary, Miss Reed, offered to help them look for rooms. + +They accordingly went on Monday morning, the rest of us remaining with +the boxes and in prayer. They at first were unsuccessful in securing +rooms, but after again looking to the Lord for guidance, Miss Reed was +impressed to take them to a Mrs. Lewis (nee Shriner), a prominent +temperance and reform worker of Cape Town, and a most devoted +Christian. This lady was a friend in need to many of God's children. She +had lately rented a large building in connection with her work; but the +venture had not been as successful as she had hoped, and she was in +prayer about the matter, pleading that the place might be made a +blessing to some one. Even as she prayed, three persons stood at her +door desiring to speak with her. These were Miss Reed and Elder and Mrs. +Engle, whom the Lord had directed thither. As soon as she heard their +errand, she felt that here was an answer to her prayer. Arrangements +were immediately made by which they were to receive three +plainly-furnished rooms for a sum which was very moderate indeed for +Cape Town. She said she would prefer to give the rooms gratis if she +were in a position financially to do so. Together they fell on their +knees and thanked the Lord for answered prayer which meant so much to +all concerned. When Elder Engle returned to the waiting ones their +hearts, too, leaped for joy at the good news. They thought it was almost +too good to be true, that so soon rooms had been secured, and that they +were to have a little home of their own without the expenses of a hotel. +Truly, "He is able to do exceeding abundantly all that we ask or think." +Boxes were soon transferred to the new home and our feet planted firmly +on African soil. + + + + +CHAPTER THREE + +Preparation and Progress + + +We were here on the threshold of Africa, eager to move out. We realized, +however, how meager was our knowledge of this vast continent and its +needs, so it was necessary to go slow and gain all possible information +from this vantage ground. + +Cape Town is the oldest of South African cities and is the largest +seaport town, having a population of about 80,000 inhabitants. The long, +tiresome sea voyage being over, the sight of this picturesque city, +nestling so cozily at the foot of Table Mountain, is one long to be +remembered. The mountain rises abruptly 3,850 feet in the background of +the city. Its majestic flat top is two miles long, and when the weather +is clear, it stands sharply outlined against the blue sky. Frequently, +however, a white cloud, known as the "Table Cloth," comes up from the +sea from the back of the mountain and rolls down over the face, a sign +that a change of weather is imminent. It has been said, "The glory of +Table Bay is Table Mountain," and "The glory of Table Mountain is the +Table Cloth." Bay, town, and mountain combine to make the picture +beautiful and unique of its kind. + +Cape Town was laid out by the Dutch, and the substantial, +antiquated-looking houses in the older parts of the city bear ample +testimony to this fact. There are also many fine, modernly-built houses. +The place is supplied with all the latest improvements, which are a +necessary part of a modern city. The population is most varied. Dutch, +English, Hottentots, Malays, and Kafirs abound. The scenes on some of +the streets at that time, especially in the evenings and on holidays, +were most varied and picturesque. There were to be seen Europeans in +civilian dress, others in soldier's uniform, Malays in their turbans and +bright, flowing robes, well-dressed blacks, and the raw native African +with only a gunny sack to cover him, for clothed he must be before he +can enter the city. + +Mr. and Mrs. Lewis, together with other Christian people whom we met at +Cape Town, thought Matabeleland, the chosen field, was a good one, +especially the Matopo Hills, as there were no missionaries in that +locality. The late Cecil Rhodes, who was still powerful in Rhodesia, was +at that time living on his estate, Groot Schuur, near Cape Town, and +Bishop Engle was advised to go to him and endeavor to obtain from him a +tract of land for a mission site. This was another special season of +looking to the Lord on the part of the little company, that He might +overrule it to His glory and to the advancement of His Kingdom. Brother +Engle was received kindly by the gentleman, and his request was +favorably considered, especially the suggestion of going to the Matopo +Hills. He at once gave Brother Engle a letter to the British Charter +Company, of Rhodesia, with the recommendation that we be given 3,000 +acres of land in the Matopo Hills for a mission station. He added that +"missionaries are better than policemen and cheaper." + +Every forward step only served to confirm us in the decision on the +steamer that Matabeleland, which is a part of Rhodesia, was the Lord's +place for opening up His work in Africa. The fact that the railroad had +just shortly before been completed that far, thus making it easier of +access; the advice of those on the steamer who were familiar with the +country; the advice of the spiritually-minded friends met at Cape Town, +and the encouragement given by him, the "Empire Builder," who perhaps +more than anyone else had the welfare of the country at heart and whose +name, Rhodesia, the country bore, together with the conviction of the +missionaries themselves, all served to set at rest any further question +as to location that might arise. + +Sister Hershey, it is true, was somewhat burdened as to whether Rhodesia +was the Lord's place for her. While she was seeking to know His will in +the matter, she received a letter from Mr. and Mrs. Worcester, of +Johannesburg, inviting her to come and assist in the missionary work at +the Compounds. She felt at once that this was the Lord's place for her, +and accepted it as from Him. We were truly sorry to lose so valuable and +consecrated a colaborer in the work, but felt to bow in submission to +Him Who knoweth best. + +While we were waiting at Cape Town, we learned that the Tebele language +spoken by the natives in Matopo Hills and vicinity was a dialect of the +Zulu language. The Bible had been translated into the Zulu, and there +were grammars and dictionaries to be had, and we at once endeavored to +procure these so that we might do some studying. Efforts were also made +to secure a teacher, but the Zulu teacher recommended did not have +sufficient English to be of any real service to us except in the +pronunciation of Zulu words, so we were obliged to study on alone and +consequently made very little progress. + +We had arrived at Cape Town in the midst of the summer and dry season. +Like California, Cape Town and vicinity have rains chiefly in the +winter, and a most healthful climate the year round. Other parts of +South Africa, however, have their rainy season in the summer, and in +some localities, notably Rhodesia and farther inland, the deadly +malarial fever is especially severe during the rainy season. So we were +advised to remain at Cape Town until the rains were over in Rhodesia. +Mr. Lewis was contemplating going north with us to assist Brother Engle +in opening the work; but before this could be accomplished, both he and +Mrs. Lewis were summoned north to Bulawayo by a telegram to minister to +one of their friends there who was very sick. + +After reaching Bulawayo they immediately sent a telegram south telling +us to remain at Cape Town, and under no consideration to venture into +the interior until the rains were over. As if to emphasize the message, +both of them, while attending to the sick, were stricken with fever, and +all were obliged to hasten south as soon as possible. We also came into +contact with some of the Seventh Day Adventists in Cape Town, and +through them learned that two of their missionaries in Rhodesia had +just succumbed to the fever. + +From the illness brought on at this time Mr. Lewis never fully +recovered, and shortly after our departure from Cape Town, we learned, +much to our sorrow, that he had been carried away by the disease. We +were often made to feel, as Mrs. Lewis expressed it, that the Lord had +sent them before us to preserve life. Otherwise we would undoubtedly +have gone to Bulawayo at an earlier date than we did and would probably +have had to suffer in consequence. We shall never forget the great +kindness of these friends during the entire four months of our stay at +Cape Town. The wise counsel, the spiritual and financial aid which they +gave, will ever be a green spot in our memory. And not only then, but in +later years, Mrs. Lewis' home, "The Highlands," and her large heart were +ever open to our missionaries. As each recruit stepped foot on Africa's +shores she was the first to welcome him. When any needed rest, her house +was wide open for any who might choose to come and rest there. When a +few years ago word came that she had gone to meet her Savior Whom she so +much loved, we all felt that we had indeed lost a friend that could not +be replaced. + +At last the time came when it was considered safe to move out, Sister +Hershey to Johannesburg and the rest to Bulawayo. Mrs. Lewis had given +us a nice large tent, 16 x 16 feet, which could be used as a dwelling +place while huts were being built, and she had also on her trip north +met some of the white people of Bulawayo who were ready to assist us. +Other friends at Cape Town also kindly helped us on the way. + +On April 28, 1898, we took the train at Cape Town, bound for Bulawayo, +1,362 miles inland. We traveled four days and four nights in a +comfortable coach and reached the place May 2. The same journey formerly +required six months and longer with an ox team. We passed through only a +few towns worthy the name; Kimberley, the center of the diamond mines, +being the principal one. Some of the country through which we passed +looked like a desert; not a blade of grass to be seen, but the red sand +is covered with bushes. This is known as the Karroo, and, as rain seldom +falls on much of this land, one is surprised to see flocks of sheep and +here and there an ostrich farm. There are many flat-topped mountains and +hills, at the foot of which one occasionally catches sight of a +farmhouse with its accompanying sheep pen. A letter sent to America at +the time adds: + + Parts greatly resemble Kansas prairies, while the last four or five + hundred miles of the journey the country looks like old, deserted + orchards. We were also introduced to African life in its primitive + state, and during the latter part of the journey no white people + were visible save the few connected with the railway service, but + many native huts were to be seen. Some were made of mud, others + formed of poles covered with various-colored cloth, forming a + veritable patchwork, while the natives in semi-nude condition came + crowding about the car windows, begging for money and food. How my + heart bled for these poor souls! Although the railroad was built, + ostensibly, for the purpose of developing the commercial and mining + interests of the country; yet, as I looked upon those poor natives, + I wondered whether the real + purpose of it under the Providence of God was not to bring the + Gospel to them. Other missionaries are here before us, but I + believe we are the first to make use of the new railroad for this + purpose. + + + + +CHAPTER FOUR + +Matabeleland + + +Before proceeding with my story let me introduce to my readers the +people and the country to which we had come. The Matabele are a branch +of the Zulu tribe of Southeast Africa. During the reign of the great and +despotic Zulu King, Tyaka, they revolted under the leadership of +Mzilikazi, or Moselikatse, and started north through Africa, proving a +terror to the various tribes along the way and meeting with numerous +hardships and varying degrees of success. About the year 1836 found them +in this country, to which they gave the name Matabeleland. This land, +together with Mashonaland, constitutes what is now known as Southern +Rhodesia. + +Here they established themselves by ruthlessly slaughtering all who +opposed them, and enslaving the natives already in the country. After +the death of Mzilikazi, his son, Lobengula, became King. He was more or +less tyrannical, like his father, and he lived with his sixty wives +about two miles from what is now known as Bulawayo--the killing +place--or, as the natives often say, "o Bulawayo," meaning murderer. A +rock near this place is still pointed out as the place where a number of +his wives met a violent death. + +This King Lobengula ruled his people with a rod of iron. The young men +were all enlisted in his army and the women and children left to carry +on the work in the gardens and kraals. Rev. Helm, one of the first +missionaries in the country, said it was impossible to get hold of the +young men; and even if the boys did start to school, the King would take +them for his own use as soon as they were old enough. He, however, never +molested the missionaries themselves, and probably considered it an +honor to have a white teacher in the country; but, as Mrs. Helm +remarked, they were careful not to offend him. + +The British Charter Company had obtained some concessions from the King +in 1889, and, in the next year, Europeans entered the country to +prospect and mine the gold. It was a foreseen conclusion that there +would eventually be a conflict between a savage despot, to whom many of +the white people were obliged to cringe, and a civilized people. The +inevitable reached a climax in 1893, when war broke out between the King +and the white people of the country. There were only a few white men in +the country at that time, but assegais and other native weapons were no +match for Maxim guns and European tactics. The King's house being burnt, +he himself fled and eventually died in January, 1894, thus causing the +war suddenly to come to an end, as there remained no one to keep the +forces together. The British South African Company took possession and +began to occupy and build up the country. + +The Matabele, however, did not consider themselves conquered, and many +circumstances conspired to bring about a second conflict. Perhaps the +chief among these was the fact that all the cattle were regarded as the +property of the King, although being distributed among the people and +used by them as their own. However, since the cattle belonged to the +King, the British Company looked upon them as theirs by right of +conquest, and proceeded to appropriate some of them. This greatly +angered the natives, as also the rinderpest, which came later and swept +off many of the remaining cattle. Then 400 of the subject tribes were +armed and enlisted as native police; and this was most galling to the +proud Matabele warriors, that they should be exulted over by their +former slaves. The disease among their cattle, the locust, which +devoured their crops, and numerous other troubles were all, by their +witch doctors, laid at the door of the white man. Umlimo (their god) +also affirmed that their King was still alive and was ready to assist +them in gaining their liberty. + +This second conflict, known as the Matabele Rebellion of 1896, came very +suddenly upon the 4,000 white people, scattered in various parts of the +country. No one seemed to expect danger, although there were several who +had had a little warning, and many natives who were working in Bulawayo +were called home by their parents. One boy in speaking of the time said: + +"I was working in Bulawayo when my father sent word that I was to come +home. I did not want to but I was afraid to disobey. I was afraid to +look at my father, he looked like a mad man. He said, 'We cannot live +and be oppressed like this. We would rather die than be treated as we +are!' + +"The rest of the people, too, looked just that way!" + +The natives rose against the Europeans and suddenly murdered 200 in the +outlying districts, including a number of women and children. Some of +these were murdered by their own servants. The rest of the white people +hastily gathered into the new town of Bulawayo, while soldiers scoured +the country in search of native troops. A large number of the native +police had gone over to the enemy, carrying their rifles with them, and +a number of the natives, both in Matabeleland and Mashonaland, had in +some way secured several thousand firearms; so that in this war the +natives were much better prepared. + +This rebellion lasted eight months, and the natives were finally driven +into the Matopo Hills. In these, nature's vast strongholds and caves, +all efforts of the European soldiers to dislodge them proved unavailing. +Here finally came Mr. Rhodes, unarmed, into the midst of the enemy's +camp and made peace with them. The tree under which this famous council +was held is still pointed out not many miles from where Matopo Mission +now is. We entered the country a little over a year after the close of +the rebellion, while all the causes and events were still fresh in the +minds of the natives. What is still more significant, we were located in +the very heart of these hills where no missionary had yet penetrated, +and being surrounded by many of the rebels themselves, we were able to +glean much of the above history at first hand. When we went among them +they were still seething with discontent from the same cause which led +to the Rebellion. + +Mr. Rhodes, who had made peace with these natives, was always respected +and trusted by them, and while he was no religious man himself, he +thoroughly believed in missionary work among the people. His desire that +we come to these hills and his statement, that "missionaries are better +than policemen, and cheaper," was actuated by no mercenary motive. It +was his conviction, borne out by experience and by long years of contact +with the Africans, that missionary work and the Christianization of the +natives was the only solution of the native problems. + +But to return to our story, we arrived at Bulawayo late in the evening +and were taken to the Royal Hotel. This was a good, up-to-date hotel, +with an up-to-date African price. In the morning, as we looked out of +the window, the first sight which greeted our eyes was a large African +wagon drawn by eighteen oxen. Except for this and similar sights we +could easily have imagined that we were in an American town, for this +place, with broad streets and thriving business, is said to have been +patterned somewhat after American cities. My impressions of the town and +vicinity written at the time were as follows: + + Bulawayo is a modern wonder, an oasis of civilization in the midst + of a desert of barbarism and heathendom. It has nearly 3,000 + inhabitants, and has been built since 1894. Before that time + Lobengula, the great Matabele King, held sway about two miles from + here at the place where the Government House now stands. This place + reminds one of the booming Kansas towns of a few + years ago, but it is hundreds of miles from any other civilized + place, and is well built of brick and iron, has good stores of all + kinds, five churches, public library, electric lights and + telephone, not only in town, but also extending to various police + forts in the surrounding country, but no public schools. There are + comfortable riding cabs, or traps, drawn by horses or mules, but + the traffic is carried on by heavy carts or still heavier wagons + drawn by a large number of oxen or donkeys. The manual labor is + done chiefly by the native boys, the white people considering it + beneath their dignity to do anything a native can do. + + The surrounding country is very pretty and level, and one can see an + abundance of the "golden sands" mentioned by the poet, and even gold + sands are not wanting, but I am sorry to say that the "sunny + fountains" rolling down them are very few, especially at this season + of the year when there are seven months of drought! + +This for Bulawayo in 1898 and first impressions. + +We remained at the hotel only two days. Our tent and the other goods had +not yet arrived, but a gentleman, to whom we had a letter of +introduction through Mrs. Lewis, most kindly offered the use of his +house and furniture for two weeks, which offer was gratefully accepted. +Before the end of that time our tent had arrived, and this being placed +on a vacant lot furnished ample protection for that season of the year. + +Bulawayo, being of such recent growth and being surrounded by pagan +tribes, would have afforded abundant opportunity for missionary work. +Daily these raw natives would come to our tent door to sell wood or +other articles; and we longed to tell them something of a Savior's love, +had we been able to speak to them. One morning thirteen native women, +each with a great load of wood on her head, arranged themselves, smiling +and expectant, before the door of our tent. We could only smile in +return, that one touch of nature's language which is akin the world +over. We were thankful that we could do so much, but back of the smile +was a heavy heart that we could do so little. + +During the two months we remained at Bulawayo efforts were made to +secure a suitable location among the Matopo Hills. Mr. Rhodes' letter +had been delivered to the government officials, and they generously +undertook to assist in locating the work. The first place to which they +took Brother Engle--the one recommended by Mr. Rhodes--was found to have +been surveyed by a private individual. They then made another selection, +about thirty miles southeast of Bulawayo, the place now known as Matopo +Mission, and they agreed to give us here a Mission Reservation of 3,000 +acres. The officials, as well as other Europeans in Bulawayo, rendered +us much assistance. In addition to these the Seventh Day Adventist +missionaries also greatly helped us on the way. These had a mission +station about thirty miles west of Bulawayo, and about fifty miles from +the place selected for us; and while we were waiting in Bulawayo, they +kindly took out, at different times, Brother and Sister Engle and Sister +Heise, for a visit to their station. + +The time came for us to move out to our location among the hills, and +the question of how we should get ourselves and our goods to the place +was becoming a serious one. Transportation, like everything else in the +interior of Africa, was exceedingly expensive. In this emergency Mr. +Anderson, of the Seventh Day Adventist Mission, offered to come that +long way with his donkey wagon and move us for half the sum required by +a regular transport driver. + +It is difficult for the reader to form any conception of what these +various expressions of kindness along the way, coming so unexpectedly +from entire strangers, meant to that little band of missionaries out in +the heart of Africa. Even as I write these things, after a lapse of +sixteen years, and live over the events of that time, tears of joy +unbidden come and my heart wells up in gratitude as I again recall these +evidences of the wonderful "faithfulness of a faithful God." + +We had been ignorant of our destination when we left the American shore, +and even more ignorant of the cost of living in the interior of Africa; +so that, by the time supplies had been purchased to take along to the +hills, the money on hand was about exhausted. We knew not how long a +time would elapse before a fresh supply could reach us. Knowing, too, +that the Church had very little experience in foreign missionary work, +one could not fail at times to be a little anxious. Thanks, however, to +the wisdom, ability, and promptness displayed by the old fathers who +formed the Mission Board, and to their support, backed up by the Church; +as soon as conditions were understood at home means were forthcoming and +we were never allowed to be in want. + + + + +CHAPTER FIVE + +The Opening of the Work + +We must remember that it was not by interceding for the world in glory +that Jesus saved it. He gave Himself. Our prayers for the evangelization +of the world are but a bitter irony so long as we only give of our +superfluity and draw back before the sacrifice of ourselves.--M. +Francois Coillard. + + +We heartily echo the words of this sainted missionary to the Barotse, +but we believe that the thought uppermost in the heart of each of the +four waiting ones at Bulawayo was not sacrifice but privilege, on that +July morning, so long ago, when the command to go forward was given. We +were soon to reach our destination, the place to which we had started +from New York over seven months previously. An account of this trip +written at the time reads somewhat as follows: + + We left Bulawayo on the evening of July 4 and traveled three nights + and two days before the mission valley was reached. The nights were + cool and a bright moon lighted up the way, so that traveling went + better at night than during the heat of the day. The wagon was + about eighteen feet long, very strong and heavy, and was drawn by + eighteen donkeys. These were led by one native boy, while another + with a long whip was doing the driving. The load of about three + tons was very heavy--too heavy, in fact, for a part of the way. + Donkeys can travel only two miles an hour on good roads and on poor + roads it sometimes requires two hours to go one mile. Occasionally + we stopped from two to four hours to let the donkeys rest and + graze. + + During such times we would build fire on the veldt, and cook and eat + our food; or, if it were night, we would wrap our blankets about us, + take our pillows, and lie down in the shelter of some friendly bush + and sleep. Mother Engle usually preferred the shelter of the tent on + the back of the wagon, although the place was too much crowded for her + to rest comfortably. Since the load was so heavy we spent a great deal + of the time walking. We would walk ahead of the wagon for a distance, + then sit down and rest until the wagon reached us. Only two of three + settlers' houses were visible, and no native kraals, and we were + informed that as soon as the white man makes a road, the natives move + away from it. + + After twenty miles of travel we came to Fort Usher. At this place + there reside an English magistrate and a number of white police. Here + we were kindly received and given a native guide for the rest of the + journey. We now left the government road and plunged into the hills. + The wagon went along another five miles with very little difficulty. + Then it mired on going through a swampy place, one side sinking nearly + to the hubs of the wheels, and further progress was impossible. All + put forth every effort to extricate it but to no avail. What was to be + done? + + While we were in this dilemma, the Chief of the natives in this part + of the country, Hluganisa by name, with some natives came to meet us + and bid us welcome. They gave us a very friendly reception, and then + joined in to assist in extricating the wagon, but without success. Mr. + Anderson, who could speak the native language, explained to the chief + who we were and our object in coming, and he promised to meet us at + the mission site the next day, as it was now evening. + + Mr. Anderson then took our party forward a little distance to a dry + spot, where we rested during the night. He and his native boys + returned to the wagon, and, removing the greater part of the load, + carried it beyond the marshy place. The donkeys were then able to pull + out the wagon. It is needless to add that Mr. Anderson and his boys + were extremely tired after this laborious task and were glad to + snatch a little rest. Even under such circumstances they did not + indulge long in the much-needed rest, but at an early hour were + again ready for the journey. Those of us who had enjoyed a good + night's rest were also aroused, and we started on our last trek + into the hills. We reached the valley, which is to be our home, on + the morning of July 7. + + This valley is surrounded by immense granite hills and boulders, some + of which cover hundreds of acres, so that at first sight the rocks + seem to constitute the chief part of the country, but a closer + inspection showed us to what a beautiful place God had led us for His + work. There, spread out before our eyes, was a beautiful rolling + valley of rich, dark earth, well supplied with an abundance of fresh + water. It was stated that the "sunny fountains" are rare in this part + of Africa, and that is true. Here, however, in this beautiful valley, + in the heart of Matopo Hills, are sparkling fountains of beautiful + water, crystal clear, oozing from under the surface of the rocks, and + flowing down the valley. Some contain delicate mosses and pretty water + lilies, and surpass the Michigan lakes in transparency. + + In the meantime the Chief had sent word to the headmen of the various + kraals to meet us. So, in the morning, obedient to the call of their + superior, they came and sat in a semi-circle while their chief + addressed them (Mr. Anderson interpreting for our benefit): + + "These are not like other white people." + + The deep-toned voices of the headmen responded in unison, "Yes, my + lord." + + He continued, "They have come to teach you and your children and to do + you good." + + Again came the response, "Yes, my lord." + + "Now do what you can for them and help them." + + And again the same response was repeated. + + One may imagine how that impressed us. Here we are, far from other + white people, among a class of natives who have never been subdued by + the English soldiers. They are kept in subjection only by forts of + police stationed among the hills, the nearest being ten miles distant. + Yet these people recognized us at once as their friends and received + us with kindness far above what we dared expect. Our hearts overflow + with thankfulness to Him who rules the hearts of men. + +The Chief and one or two other natives went with us to look up a +location on which to pitch the tent and build huts. The tent was finally +pitched under the shade of a large umkuni tree, Mr. Anderson returned to +his station, and we were left without an interpreter, and with no +practical knowledge of mission work. We had, however, a Great Teacher, +and we were willing to be taught. + +Both Matabele and their subject races, known as Amahole, live in the +Matopo Hills. The majority of them are not black, but a chocolate brown, +and some have features resembling white people. They are generally +large, well-formed, and intelligent-looking. They are more or less rude +in manner, uncouth in appearance, and wear little or no clothing except +the loin cloth. This in the men usually consists of the skin of small +animals, and among the women a short skirt of cloth or skins. Over the +upper part of the body is sometimes thrown a larger piece of cloth. + +Among those that gathered about us that first day were some who had been +quite active in the late rebellion. As we gained their confidence, they +often pointed out to us the caves where they stored their grain, and +where they themselves hid during that terrible time. A year of famine +had followed the war, and some had starved to death. At the time we +entered upon the work there was a great deal of destitution all about +us; for some had not yet been able to grow grain, and they had no flocks +to fall back upon as they usually had in time of grain famine. + +Many of the white people in the country and in Bulawayo were continually +talking about and expecting another uprising. They looked for it to come +from these Matopo Hill natives, and some sought to warn us not to +venture into this, the enemy's stronghold. We, however, living among +them from day to day, saw no cause for fear. + +The natives came to see us in large numbers. Sometimes fifty would +appear in one day and crowd around the door of our tent, desiring to +have a good view of the newcomers and their belongings. Many of them, +especially the women and children, had never seen a white person before, +or at most a white woman. Some three or four families had heard a little +of Jesus, but the great majority knew absolutely nothing of the Gospel. + +Our ignorance, both of the language and the people, led to many +blunders, both ludicrous and otherwise. The desire to help them and to +show them that we were their friends caused them often to take advantage +of our kindness. We soon learned that the African is not so much +interested in the things that are for the good of his soul as in that +which ministers to his body and appetite. It was so difficult to know +just what to do at all times, for they were destitute of nearly +everything which we considered necessary for comfort. They were +confirmed beggars, and the more they received the more they wanted. The +missionary opens his Bible, and reads, "He that hath two coats, let him +impart to him that hath none; and he that hath meat let him do +likewise"; he then gets down on his knees and prays that the Lord might +help the poor souls about him, but he often feels that his prayers do +not ascend very high. What he needs to do is to get up and answer his +own prayers. + +[Illustration: Hut Built by H. Frances Davidson and Alice Heise at +Matopo.] + +When we made a contract with them for work, and told them what pay they +would receive, they always wanted more than the contract called for when +the time came to settle. This is characteristic of the native in dealing +with the white man. He sees that the other has clothing and many +comforts of which he is deprived, hence concludes that the pockets of +the white man are full of money. Socialist that he naturally is, he +thinks that the property should be equally distributed. It never occurs +to him that his laziness and shiftlessness have much to do with his +destitution. In fact, that thought does not generally occur to the +missionary when he goes among the heathen for the first time, unless he +is with some one who understands the situation. + +It is necessary to make the natives understand at times that the +kindness of even the missionary has a limit. One day I was in the little +straw shed which served as a kitchen, and was endeavoring to bake bread. +As usual a number of people were about the door, and one man, taking +advantage of my kindness, came in and sat down by the stove in front of +the bake-oven door. He made no effort in the least to move away when I +tried to look into the oven door. I bore it for some time, not wishing +to be rude to him, and not knowing how to ask him in a polite way to +move. Suddenly it dawned upon me that the proper native word was _suka_. +So I made use of the word and told him to _suka_. He looked up in +surprise and repeated the word to know if he had correctly understood, +but he moved. Afterwards, in looking for the word in my dictionary, I +found that it was a word often in the mouth of the white man when +addressing a native. It really meant a rough "Get out of this." So the +look of mild reproach in the eyes of the native was accounted for. Some +of the softness in the missionary, too, soon wears off as he is obliged +to deal with the native from day to day. He finds that it is necessary +to make the native understand their relation one to another as teacher +and pupil. + +Living in a tent during the dry and healthy season is not unpleasant in +such a climate, except that one suffers from the heat by day and the +cold by night. + +Matopo Mission is located about 20-1/2 deg. south latitude and 29 deg. east +longitude. It is 5,000 feet above sea level, so that, although it is +within the tropics, it has a delightful and salubrious climate the +entire year. From the middle of November to the middle of April is what +is known as the rainy season. The rest of the year rain seldom falls. +One cannot live in a tent all the year, but must provide better shelter +for the rainy season. So hut building occupied the first few months. We +had no wagon and no oxen, nothing but two little donkeys, which had been +brought out with us from Bulawayo, and we did not know how to make the +best use of native help. The poles used in the construction of the huts +were cut and carried to the place of building by natives. + +As the manner of building was quite foreign to an American, Brother +Engle took occasion to examine other huts, built by Europeans, so that +he was enabled to build very good ones for the mission. He was alone +and, to make the work lighter, we women assisted, and used hammer, saw, +and trowel, brought stones for building chimneys, raked grass, and +assisted in thatching. The huts are built somewhat as follows: + +A trench about fifteen inches deep is dug the size and shape of the +desired hut. In this are placed, near together, poles from the forest, +space being allowed for doors and windows and sometimes for fireplace. +The poles are cut out so as to extend about eight feet above ground. +Large ones are sawed lengthwise for door posts and window frames. Some +flexible poles are nailed around the top and about halfway up the side, +so that the walls of the hut are firmly fastened together. Longer poles +are then used as rafters, these being firmly fastened to the walls and +nailed together at the top. Small, flexible ones are also used as lath +to fasten the rafters together and upon which to tie the grass in +thatching. The grass used for this purpose grows in abundance among +these rocks, and sometimes reaches the height of eight feet. The women +cut this and bring it in bundles, glad to exchange it for a little salt. +It is first combed by means of spikes driven through a board. It is then +divided into small bundles; the lower ends being placed evenly together, +and the bundles tied closely together on the lath with tarred rope. The +next layer is placed over this like shingles, so as to cover the place +of tying. When completed the thickness of grass on the eaves of the roof +is from four to ten inches. Then follows the plastering. The mud or +plaster is made from earth which had been worked over by white ants. +This, pounded fine and mixed with water, makes an excellent plaster, and +when placed on the walls it soon dries and becomes very hard. The native +women put this on the outside with their hands, as the walls are too +uneven to allow the use of a trowel. Similar earth, mixed with sand, is +used as mortar in building with brick and stone. The floors also are of +this earth pounded hard and polished. + +The windows have either small panes of glass or muslin stretched on a +frame, and the doors boast of imported timber brought from Bulawayo. +Each hut is about as large as an average-sized room. It is difficult to +make them larger on account of the scarcity of suitable material in this +part of the country. The walls are whitewashed on the inside, and some +have a white muslin ceiling. Much of the furniture is of our own +manufacture and is made of boxes or of native poles draped with calico. + +When completed the rooms looked quite cozy and comfortable, so that we +felt thankful for such pleasant homes in connection with our work. The +first year there were four of such huts built, kitchen, dining-hut, and +two sleeping-rooms. + +Dealing with the natives while building these was not always easy. +Sometimes difficulties arose through not being able to make the natives +understand, so that we could not always place the blame on them. When +grass was wanted for the thatching a contract was entered into with one +of the headmen to furnish one hundred bundles for five shillings +($1.20). The grass was brought until there was about half the specified +amount, then the pay was demanded. This was of course refused. The man +brought a little more and then he stoutly affirmed that he had fulfilled +his part of the contract. After considerable delay and, being harassed +by the headman, we finally paid him. After all, he may have been honest +in the affair and a mistake may have been made in the beginning; for the +word for _one hundred_ and that for _much_ were similar except in the +prefix. He may have understood that he was to bring much grass, and he +certainly did that. + +Again, when the first hut was to be plastered, arrangements were made +with certain women to plaster it for a stated amount. They brought a +number of others along to help them plaster; and when pay day came, the +total amount of pay demanded was about double the original agreement. +There was such a noisy, unpleasant demonstration that day, that we +learned our lesson, and we were very careful so to arrange matters that +the difficulty would not occur again. + +[Illustration: Matopo Mission--March, 1899.] + +Our living at the time was of the simplest. Nearly all kinds of eatables +could be procured in Bulawayo; but they were very expensive, and there +was no way of bringing them out except by native carriers, or by +trusting to the friendly assistance of the white traders at Fort Usher. +Sometimes it fell to the Elder's lot to walk the thirty miles to +Bulawayo in order to purchase supplies. There was no need, however, for +us to do, like many a missionary in the wilds of Africa has done, +deprive ourselves of wheat bread and ordinary groceries. These we always +had, but we were more economical in their use than we would have been at +home. We had no milk, except tinned milk, no butter, and very little +meat, and no gun to procure game. But we had chicken and could +occasionally procure meat from the natives. Of course at first there +were no vegetables to be had, except such as we could at times procure +from the natives--corn, sweet potatoes, pumpkins, and peanuts, but these +were scarce. + +Elder Engle, alive to the value of the soil and the need of wholesome +food, at once secured fruit trees and set them out, including a number +of orange trees. He also bought a small plow and with the two donkeys +broke land and planted vegetables. One native, who continually stood by +us during those early days, was Mapipa, our nearest neighbor. He was a +powerfully-built Matabele and reminded one of the giant of Gath; for he +had six fingers on each hand and six toes on each foot. He had been +quite active in the Rebellion and was wounded in one of the battles. He +could always be depended upon in work, and Brother Engle greatly +appreciated his assistance. + +Perhaps some one who reads these lines may wonder whether building, +farming, and such manual labor is missionary work. Did not the Great +Missionary, according to all accounts--I say it in all reverence--take +an apprenticeship in the carpenter's shop where He "increased in wisdom +and stature and in favor with God and man"? Did not the Apostle Paul, +undoubtedly the greatest of His followers, unite tent-making with his +missionary work? Should then we, such feeble imitations, belittle manual +labor, even though it falls to our lot as missionaries? Any one going to +the mission field should not, if he is to be successful, decide in his +own mind that he is going to do certain things, he should be willing to +do whatever the Lord gives him to do, of spiritual, intellectual, or +physical labors. + +There are so many sides to missionary work, and who can tell which will +result in the greatest good? To preach Christ and lift Him up that +others may see and accept Him is undoubtedly the central thought of the +Great Commission. The ways of exalting Him, however, are so many and so +various. Christ must be lived among the people before He can in truth be +preached to them. The heathen of Africa cannot read the Bible, but they +can and do continually read the lives of those sent among them. If these +do not correspond to the Word read and preached among them, they are +keen to discern and judge accordingly. If the Christ-life is lived +before their eyes, day by day, many will eventually yield their hearts +to Him, even though, they may for a time resist. + + + + +CHAPTER SIX + +Educational and Evangelistic Work + + +The natives were eager to see inside the new huts. When they had an +opportunity to look at the whitewashed walls and the homemade furniture, +they stood spellbound, and the first word that broke from their lips was +"_Muehle_" (pretty). + +They had another and more personal interest in seeing the huts +completed. They had been told that, as soon as the goods were moved out +of the tent, school would be opened. Both large and small were +exceedingly eager to learn, or at least they thought so. They had never +seen books, and writing was like magic to them. To put down some +characters on paper and from those to spell out their names when they +next visited the mission was little less than witchcraft. Both old and +young like to be known. They are pleased if their missionary pronounces +their name and seems to know them when they come a second time. + +School opened October 11. The first boy to come bright and early was +Matshuba, together with two of Mapita's girls. This little boy, then +about thirteen years old, had been a very interested spectator of all +that occurred from the time the mission opened. Day after day he would +be on hand, and his bright eyes and active mind took knowledge of +everything that was said or done. His father, Mpisa, then dead, had +been one of the most trusted witch doctors of the King, and had been +held in great respect by all of the natives in that part of the country. +This boy was very eager for school, and the first morning he and +Mapita's girls begged us to allow only the Matabele to attend school, +and not the Amahole, or subject races. This furnished an excellent +opportunity of teaching them that God is no Respecter of persons. + +The first morning of school twelve bright-looking boys and girls entered +the tent and sat down on the floor, curious to know what school was +like. It was a momentous time. It was the beginning of a work the result +of which human eye could not foresee. How the teacher, who had often +stood before a far larger and more inspiring-looking school in a +civilized land, trembled as she stood there before those twelve little +savages in the heart of Africa! She knew that those bright eyes were +reading her thoughts, and realized that she came so far short of the +"measure of the stature of the fullness of Christ." The special burden +of the prayer that morning was that, as these dear souls learned to read +the Word, the Light might enter their hearts and they yield themselves +to God. + +The second day eight more were enrolled, and the third day fourteen, and +by the end of the month there were forty in all. Sister Heise and I were +kept busy during school hours as the pupils were taught to sew as well +as to read and write. Cleanliness is a rare virtue with them, so they +were told to wash before coming to school. As new ones entered the +school the admonition was repeated, with the statement that we wash +every morning. Mapita's little daughter, Sibongamanzi, with shining +black face, which showed that she had been heeding the command, looked +up brightly and said, "Yes, but you are white and we are black." She +evidently had thought that, if she washed every morning, she too would +become white, but she had concluded it to be a hopeless task. Mr. +Anderson said that some of their children thought that if they ate the +food of white people, they too would become white. + +This, our first schoolroom, was very primitive. It consisted of a tent +16 x 16 feet. In front there was a box which served as a teachers' desk +and as a receptacle for slates, pencils, paper, books, and sewing. Other +boxes served for teachers' chairs. There were two easels made of poles; +one supported the blackboard and the other the charts. The blackboard +consisted of a few small boards nailed together and painted black, and +the charts were of cardboard, 18 x 24 inches in size. There were ten of +them printed on both sides with syllables, and Tebele words and +sentences. These had been printed by homemade stencils and pen, and had +occupied our leisure time while we were hut-building. The floor of the +tent was covered with straw, and the pupils sat on this without seats or +desks. They knew nothing of the comforts of the schoolroom in civilized +lands and thought they were well supplied. + +Since we had no primer at the time, the Gospel of St. John was given to +them as a textbook when they had finished the charts. To enable them to +read and understand the Word of God was the aim of the school work and +the Bible the Textbook throughout. After they had learned to write the +letters of the alphabet, their copy usually was a verse from the +Scriptures. They were also taught to memorize certain portions in +connection with the daily worship, and hymn singing. + +The pupils compare very favorably with white children in their ability +to learn, but few of them come regularly to school. To most of them +school is just a side issue, some place to go when there is nothing else +to be done. Some have an idea that they can learn to read in about a +month, and when they find that it requires months of weary, patient +effort at meaningless characters, they give up in despair. Others are +ridiculed by the older people for throwing away their time at such +useless work; "There is no money, no beer, no food in it and they are +dunces to go." + +Again, some are grown, and being past the age when mental effort is +easy, they soon become discouraged. One big fellow stumbled along until +he had mastered the chart after a fashion. Then, to his delight, he was +given the Gospel of St. John to read. Day after day he struggled along +over the, to him, meaningless syllables and words. Still he persevered +until it gradually dawned upon him that the printed page meant +something. He looked up one day with a most delighted expression on his +face and exclaimed, "This book is talking to me!" + +The native cannot be said to be very persevering, owing to the fact that +all his life, in his untaught state, he goes on the principle that the +world owes him a living. His needs are few and often they are supplied +by nature. When he comes up against a difficult problem of any sort, +his usual answer is, "It will not consent." For this reason arithmetic +is always difficult for him and his progress in it is very slow. One day +I was endeavoring to show a girl how to make the letter _b_. After a +vain effort to make it properly, she exclaimed, "My pencil will not +consent to slide that way." + +The sewing hour probably was the most interesting time to all. They +expected to receive the garments after they had finished sewing them and +had worked for the cloth with which they were made. The dearest wish of +their hearts was to have a garment to put on. And that is not strange, +for in the cool morning air they come shivering, and at noon the hot sun +burns their bodies. We might have made the garments and donated them; +but that would not teach them to work and would have done them more harm +than good. A native always appreciates most that upon which he has +bestowed labor or money; so both boys and girls learned to sew. It was +rather amusing to see them, in the absence of other garments to which +they might pin their sewing, place it between their toes. It was also +interesting to watch the different expressions when at last the garments +were finished and they could clothe themselves. + +Matshuba put on his suit; then, folding his hands, said in a quiet and +contented manner, "Now I am not cold any more." Amuzeze, when he had +finished his garments, put them on, and taking a good look at himself +stepped off as proudly as if he owned a large estate. Sibongamanzi kept +her dress for Sunday. At home she would carefully fold it, and putting +it in an earthen jar cover it up for safe keeping. + +In the meantime services on Sunday had not been neglected. At the +opening of the work none of the missionaries could speak the language, +but they could read it after a fashion. So, from the very first Sunday +after the work opened, endeavors were made to instill into the minds of +the natives that one day out of seven was a day of rest and worship. To +them all days were alike--workdays, rest days, or carousal days, as they +chose to spend them. Sad to say that even the few that went to work for +the white man saw little or no difference between the days of the week. +It falls to the lot of the missionary to teach the significance of the +fourth commandment as well as the rest of the decalogue. On Sunday the +people were invited to assemble under the shade of a friendly tree, and +a portion of the Scriptures was read to them and hymns sung. They are +great lovers of music, so that in itself was an attraction. The first +congregation was very small. Sometimes there would be only Mapita and +his family, five or six in number. As the nature of the meetings began +to dawn on the native mind, others would assemble with us, but in the +first few months, or until the opening of school in October, not more +than twenty-five congregated at one time. + +Acquiring the language is always a tedious, though important, part of +foreign missionary work. The missionary sees the natives about him, day +by day, and longs to tell them something of Jesus and His love, but is +unable to do so, especially if he be a pioneer in the work and without +an interpreter as we were. We had been endeavoring to study the +language from the Zulu books on hand, but on coming face to face with +the natives it was discovered that the set phrases we had acquired +seemed as unintelligible to them as their words were to us. There were +several reasons for this. One was that we had not learned the proper +pronunciation and accent, and another was that their dialect differed +somewhat from the Zulu, which we had been endeavoring to learn. Another, +and far weightier reason, and one which, to our sorrow, we did not +discover until some time afterwards, was that some natives did not speak +the correct language to us. Those who had been accustomed to speaking to +the Europeans had invented a jargon of their own, which they seemed to +think especially adapted to the mental capacity of white people. This +medium of communication is known as "kitchen Kafir." + +It consists of a small vocabulary, chiefly of Zulu words, simplified and +divested of all inflections--and grammar, it might be said. This +dialect, which is especially distasteful to linguists, is invariably +used by many natives in addressing white people for the first time. It +is the common language of the kitchen and the shops, between master or +mistress and their native servants. It has also of later years spread +much among the natives themselves where various tribes meet and +converse. Its use has become so general over South Africa, and even in +parts of South Central Africa, that it has, not inaptly, been termed the +"Esperanto of South Africa." Undoubtedly it lacks much of the elegance +of the real Esperanto, but is in daily use by more people. Not only is +"kitchen Kafir" spoken between whites and blacks and between blacks +themselves, but sometimes, when a common language fails, something akin +to this is used between even the white people. + +Not so many of the natives in the hills had come into contact with +Europeans before our coming among them, yet there was sufficient +"kitchen Kafir" among them to confuse the newcomers and make it +necessary in after years to unlearn many of the things they first +acquired. + +Learning the language is trying, especially without a teacher, and many +blunders and misunderstands occur; but it is not the least useful of +missionary experiences. People on first coming into contact with raw +heathendom are seldom capable of doing much preaching to them in such a +manner that the native can understand and appreciate. + +While one is learning the language, he is also learning to know the +native himself, his surroundings, and modes of thought. By the time one +is able to converse with the native, he also knows better what to say to +him. One thing, however, it is always safe to do from the time the +missionary enters the field of labor; he may always read the Word, if he +has it in the language. The unadorned Word is always safe and suits all +conditions of men. + +Gradually we learned to speak the language, sentence by sentence. How +our hearts burned within us those days to be able to tell the story of +Christ and His love! Usually the dull, darkened look on the faces of the +few present would cause the speaker to feel that he had not been +understood, or that there had been no answering response. Then +occasionally a dusky face would light up, as if a ray of light had +penetrated a darkened corner, and the speaker would be encouraged to +renewed efforts to make the subject plain. Thus, Sunday after Sunday, +the effort would be renewed. + +It was not only on that day, however, that some of the older ones heard +the Word read and an attempt at explanation given. Morning and evening +worship was held in the native language, and often a larger number, in +those early days, gathered about us on workdays than on Sunday. The door +was always open and everyone was invited to enter at time of prayer. +After school opened, and it became better known which day was Sunday, +and that the services were held in the tent, the attendance gradually +increased. + +Our feelings, as written at the time, were somewhat as follows: + + We realize more fully every day that much wisdom and grace is + needed in dealing with this people. If we did not have such + confidence in our Great Leader, we might at times be discouraged, + for the enemy of souls is strong here in Africa and human nature is + alike the world over. When the truth is driven home to their + hearts, they are quite ready to excuse themselves. Thus we find it + necessary to get down lower and lower at the feet of Jesus and let + Him fill us continually with all the fulness of His love and + Spirit, that there may be no lack in us. + +In his own eyes the pagan African is always a good, innocent sort of +person. He has done no wrong, has committed no sin, hence has no need of +forgiveness. One of the first requisites seems to be instilling into his +mind a knowledge of God and His attributes. This must be "precept upon +precept," "line upon line," "here a little and there a little." Time +after time this thought of God must be reiterated until it is burned +into the consciousness of the hearers. We are told of one missionary +who, for the first two years, took as his text, Sabbath after Sabbath, +"God is." And it would seem to be a wise course to pursue. The +conception of a Supreme Being Who is holy, omnipotent, omniscient, and +omnipresent, and cannot look upon sin with any degree of allowance, to +Whom all must render an account, needs to be indelibly impressed on the +native mind. Until they realize that "all have sinned and come short of +the glory of God," it seems useless to preach Christ as a Savior to +them. + +Missionaries soon realize that they cannot sit down and wait for the +people to come to them. They must go out into the streets and lanes of +their villages and "into the highways and hedges and compel them to come +in." Kraal-visiting forms a very important part of the Gospel work. +Sister Heise and myself went among them as much as possible. We went +chiefly on foot, and many miles were traveled in all kinds of weather, +so that the people might be instructed in the things of God. At first +these visits could be little more than a friendly call and the speaking +of a few broken sentences. These wild children of nature were quick to +respond to the interest that prompted the visits, and would always +welcome the visitors. As soon as we were within sight the children would +come to meet us and pilot us to their parents. When we left they would +again accompany us a little distance, perhaps to the next kraal. Who +shall say but that these early journeys, in which little of the Gospel +was given, was not as fruitful of results for God as later ones? Back of +those black exteriors are human hearts waiting to be touched by the +finger of love and human sympathy, ready to imbibe the milk of human +kindness. They know something of the natural love of parent to child, +and _vice versa_; but they need to realize that there is such a thing as +disinterested love in their welfare, and by this means be led to realize +in some little measure the _wonderful love of God_. In this, thank God, +we had no need to simulate love. A spark of the Divine love for them had +entered our hearts before we even set foot on Africa's shores. + +It is difficult to understand the expression of a missionary who visited +Matopo some time after the work was started, and who in his own field of +labor seemed to have been used of the Lord. He said one day: "I cannot +say that I love these people. I do not love that child," pointing to a +little girl at some distance in front of him, "but I realize that Christ +loves them and desires them to be saved, hence my work among them." This +seemingly cold sense of duty may answer. If, however, the pagan African +once realizes that disinterested love prompts our treatment of him, he +is generally most pliable and teachable. Without something of the Divine +love work among them must be hard indeed, for there are so many trying +things to be met with day by day. + +After a time it was discovered that the donkeys might be made use of in +kraal visiting. I well remember our first experience at this mode of +travel. We had no saddles, so we placed blankets on the backs of the +donkeys and fastened them with surcingles of our own manufacture. Sister +Heise was an expert rider, while I was quite the reverse. Our first trip +was to a kraal about five miles distant, the home of the chief, +Hluganisa. Two boys, Matshuba and Sihlaba, accompanied us as guides. All +went well on the trip over. We were very kindly received by the people +and afforded an opportunity to give them the Gospel. The village was up +among the rocks, and as donkeys are expert climbers they had no +difficulty in making the ascent, or descent, either, but on the return +journey I could not keep my place, and was sent over the donkey's head +on to the ground. My companion, when she saw that no harm was done, +rather considered the accident as a good joke, and I joined in the laugh +at my own expense. The boys failed to see any fun in it, and seemed +greatly to resent the laughter. + +Some time after this we made another journey of about the same distance +in the opposite direction. The reason for this second visit was as +follows: Among our pupils was a nice, modest-looking girl about twelve +years of age. She belonged to Mapita's family, and seemed to be an +affectionate and well-behaved child. She was absent from school for a +few days, and on inquiring we learned that she had gone to the home of +her intended husband. Greatly shocked, we made further inquiry, and were +told that Mapita had sold her to a man who had already one wife, and +that he lived about five miles away. It was our first experience with +heathen marriage, and we determined to hunt her up and if possible +release her. We looked upon this child as a slave or prisoner. + +Taking the donkeys and our two boys, we again started out one morning. +The path was not familiar, even to our guides. It wound around among the +rocks and we were in great danger of being lost. Immense boulders were +piled up in all sorts of fantastic shapes, and a white person could +easily be lost among the hills and perhaps never find his way out, but +the native will always find his way. Once we found ourselves on the top +of a nearly perpendicular rock, and dismounting reached the bottom only +with great difficulty. The boys inquired the way of a native in his +garden, but he regarded us with suspicion and remained silent. Since the +close of the rebellion, when the natives hid themselves among these +rocks, they have been very suspicious of white people, for fear some one +may desire to capture them. It was only after repeated assurances by the +boys that we were missionaries, and their friends, that he consented to +direct us. + +Finally we reached the home of Buka, the man who had taken little +Lomanzwana. His kraal was situated up among the rocks in one of nature's +fortresses. Here, in this desolate place, in the midst of densest +heathendom, was the girl. Her husband was a cripple and very pagan +looking. But what could we do amid such rock-bound customs as held these +people? Nothing. With hearts lifted to the Lord in prayer we tried to +point them to the Lamb of God. The man regarded us with wild-looking +eyes, and listened with seemingly dull, uncomprehending ears to our +stammering tongues. When he was asked a question, he looked at those +about him and wanted to know what sort of an answer the missionary +desired; then he would answer accordingly. In another hut was a very old +woman, the mother of Buka, who was an imbecile and was fed like an +animal. We retraced our steps with heavy hearts, but for many a day the +memory of that visit haunted us. + +As for the girl, the man did not pay sufficiently promptly to satisfy +Mapita, so he finally took her home. Later she was sold to a man who +paid a large sum. Here they quarreled and the girl returned home, and +the pay had to be given back. It is needless to say that the girl was +thoroughly demoralized by this time. She was finally disposed of to +another man. + +In February, 1899, Matshuba came to stay at the mission and attend +school. Ever since the mission had opened he had been a great help to us +in acquiring the language, and as he could understand us more readily, +he often explained our meaning to others. He knew too just how many Zulu +words were in our vocabulary, and in speaking to us he adapted himself +to our limited understanding. He also gradually acquired the English. He +made rapid progress in school; and as the Light came to him he accepted +it. He did not do this all at one bound, but, as it were, according to +his capacity to understand the meaning of the Atonement and kindred +themes. The day came when he saw himself a great sinner, and he repented +in truth. He was the only boy staying at the mission for a time, so that +many and various duties fell to his lot. These he performed faithfully, +except that he was somewhat careless in herding the donkeys, and lost +them. + +One evening he came to the door of our hut in great perplexity and said +that he would like to have a talk. He came and sat down on the +hearthstone, then said, "I prayed this morning, but the donkeys were +lost at any rate." By his language he evidently thought that if he +prayed the Lord would do the watching. This gave us an opportunity of +telling of David, the faithful shepherd boy, and of the "Great +Shepherd," who told us to both "watch and pray." The boy then told +something of his early life. Among other things he said: + +"Father used to tell me to go and watch the gardens so that the animals +would not come and take our food. I did not watch well and the animals +destroyed the crops and father was grieved." + +"Are you sorry now that you did not obey?" + +"Oh! yes, indeed," was the reply. "If I might live that time over again, +I would be a better boy." + +He continued, "When father was sick they said he was bewitched. So they +tried to find out who had bewitched him. Once, before he died, he said +that he would like to see a missionary. _Umfundisi_ [Missionary] Engle +should have come sooner, before father died." + +"Matshuba, did you ever hear of Jesus before we came?" + +"Yes, Missus," he replied, "I heard His Name once, and I wanted my +mother to go where there was a missionary; then the Lord sent you." + +Here was this dear soul, groping in the night and reaching out for +something better than he had known, he knew not what. When the Light +comes to him he is ready to accept it. There are many other such boys, +and girls too, all over Africa, who are waiting for some one to bring +them the Light. Is it you? There are many other old men to whom the +message will come too late unless some one makes haste and brings it. + +Matshuba had many hard battles to fight, and often have we heard him out +among the rocks praying for help and victory. I well remember the first +day on which he prayed openly before the school. Almost the hush of +death fell upon all, for it was a new era to them. One of their number +had learned to pray like the missionaries. There was no hut at first for +him to sleep in, so he lay in the tent. One morning he came out, his +face all aglow. He said, "I saw Jesus last night. He came and stood +before me. He was tall and bright looking." + +Some months after he came, another boy, Tebengo, came to stay at the +mission. He, too, had been attending school and desired to be a +Christian. Bright, impulsive, but easily misled, in his instability he +was just the opposite of the more steadfast Matshuba. There were also +others of the schoolboys who were stepping out into the light, and among +these were Kelenki and Siyaya, who were Mashona people. Their home +seemed more heathenish than some of the others, but these boys, with +others from their kraal, appeared earnest in the service of the Master. + +A Sunday-school was also opened this first year and proved quite +interesting to the younger ones. On the first Christmas Day the natives +were invited for services and about ninety came--the largest number up +to that time. After the services they were invited to a large, +unfinished hut, and all were treated to bread and tea and some salt. +Father and Mother Engle sat down among them and partook of bread and tea +with them. This greatly delighted all, and it was just as much of a +pleasure to our elder and wife, who always enjoyed mingling with the +people. The rest of us saw that all were served. The people were very +thankful for the treat, and all expressed their gratitude in a forcible +manner. + + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN + +Reinforcements, and Progress of the Work + + +The various departments of the mission were gradually enlarging, and as +the work increased the burden fell more and more heavily upon Elder +Engle. It will be remembered that efforts were made to secure an +assistant for him before we left America, but without success. In April, +1899, however, we gladly welcomed into our midst three new missionaries +from America. These were Mr. and Mrs. Clifford Cress and Mr. Isaac +Lehman. They were able and consecrated messengers, and a valuable +addition to the work. With them came also several large boxes of +clothing, cloth for the sewing school, and other goods which had been +donated for the mission. About this time also the Board sent out some +farm implements, a large Studebaker wagon, a two-seated spring wagon, +and a bell for calling the people to services. More donkeys had already +been purchased by Elder Engle, so that the question of traveling, and of +bringing out supplies from Bulawayo, was most satisfactorily settled. + +Shortly after this we also had the pleasure of welcoming Mr. and Mrs. +Van Blunk, of the Christian Holiness Association. These had come to make +their headquarters near us and engage in evangelistic work. We had now +quite a little company of Christian workers--nine in number--and had +very inspiring and encouraging English services, as well as those in the +native tongue. Although Brother Van Blunks were under a different Board +and their work was in a measure separate from the rest, yet they were +spiritual and consecrated missionaries and of great assistance in +exalting Christ among the people. + +On account of the large increase in the number of workers, it was +necessary also to enlarge our dwelling place. During this season five +new huts were erected, including those for the natives, making the +mission premises look like a little village. A building for church +services and school was also greatly needed. During the entire rainy +season these had been held in the tent, which was proving inadequate for +the growing congregation. So Brethren Engle and Lehman, with the +assistance of the natives, erected a very respectable looking church +building of poles and mud, 16 x 30 feet. It was furnished with plank +seats and good tables, and Brother Van Blunk donated glass for windows. +Long poles of native timber were then secured and a framework was made +for the bell. This being hoisted and fastened in place could be heard at +many of the kraals. It also assisted in informing the people of the +Sabbath. + +At sunset on Saturday evening it was rung a long time to inform the +people that the morrow was the Sabbath, and that they should lay aside +their work and prepare for rest and service. Later in the work some of +us agreed to take that time for secret prayer in behalf of the people, +that the Lord might incline their hearts to come to the house of the +Lord. After there were a number of native Christians, they too joined us +in prayer, each going to his private place. One evening we were greatly +impressed to see Mazwi, the boy who was ringing slowly, down on his +knees, as if, while he was calling the people to prepare for worship on +the morrow, he was also calling upon God to persuade them to come. We +were often made to feel too that the Lord especially honored some of +those prayers. + +The sight of so many people about us being destitute of clothing had +greatly touched Brother Engle's heart, and he had written to America +about it. The result was a large box of clothing generously donated. He +gave each of the headmen and the chief a shirt and a pair of trousers, +and told them to come to services. They seemed to be, and no doubt were, +very grateful for the favor bestowed, and a very few made good use of +the garments. Others came once or twice clothed, and then nothing more +was seen of them or their clothing. In less than a year these latter +ones came again and asked for clothes, stating that they had nothing to +wear to church. It is needless to say that by this time the missionaries +had learned their lesson, and those desiring to be clothed had to work +for it. A number did come and work for clothing and were well paid, but +what they did with the clothing was often a mystery. Shirts they +generally liked and appreciated, and sometimes the other garments would +be sewed up in a wonderful manner and do duty for a shirt or coat, or +they would answer for a grain bag. + +Day by day we were learning the nature of the people about us, and were +obliged to adjust ourselves to our changed understanding. They are all +children and must be dealt with accordingly. The missionary soon finds +that he not only needs much of the love that "never faileth," but also a +large supply of patience continually in his work. He must also be firm +in his dealings with the natives and make them know their place. They +will respect him all the more if he does this in the proper spirit. Old +children are more difficult to handle than young ones, as they are more +unreasonable and more set in their ways. They generally do not feel +under any obligations to keep their promises to you, but they fully +expect you to keep yours to them, otherwise they will lose confidence in +you. + +When one first goes to the heathen and sees them in their ignorance and +superstition, seemingly lacking everything to make them comfortable, he +is led to speak much of Christ and His love, thus seeking to win them. +They begin to say within themselves, "Well, if He loves us, He will do +us no harm, so we need not trouble ourselves about Him," and they +continue, as vigorously as ever, to seek to appease the malevolent +spirits, who they think are seeking to harm them. Then the missionary +thinks he should pursue another course. He soon becomes somewhat +discouraged and disgusted with their indifference and hypocrisy, and is +often led to the opposite extreme, and dwells much on hell and +condemnation, which tends to harden his hearers. Finally he reaches a +golden mean. He realizes that these poor souls about him have had no +opportunity of rising above their degrading surroundings, and he must +take them as they are, and seek by the ability which God giveth to live +the Christ life among them and lift them to a higher plane of living. + +[Illustration: Matopo Mission Church in 1899. Built by Elder Jesse +Engle.] + +The Sunday-school had been chiefly for the younger ones, but we +concluded to add a class for the older people. This was greatly +appreciated by some of them, especially Mapita. It began with few in +number; but as time passed it gradually increased in attendance and +interest. Mapita seemed so eager to learn in those days, and would often +look with longing eyes into the Kingdom, and the very joy of the Lord +would seem to be reflected in his face, but he was afraid to step over. +He gained a great deal of knowledge of the Scriptures too, and he was +not slow to tell other people. + +All the services were more or less informal, and any one was free to ask +questions; yet in the Sabbath-school class many felt more at home and +often expressed themselves freely in regard to the difficulties in the +way of their becoming Christians. One day, after we had explained the +lesson, Nyuka, a witch doctor, said: + +"I believe all you say, and that Christ is able to save us, but what can +I do? My hands are tied. I have five wives." + +Nothing had been said about a plurality of wives, but intuitively he +realized that it was a formidable obstacle in his way. We could only +tell him that if he really reached the place where he desired to be +saved, the Lord would open the way for him. + +As question after question arose in the class, the answer often given +would be to open the Bible and read a portion suitable for the question. +One day, after this had been done several times, one of the men +exclaimed, "It is no use to argue any more; that Book knows everything." +The difficulty generally was that, although they believed the Word, they +were not willing to take the Way. The darkness seemed too dense, the +effort required was too great, the transformation was too absolute for +these old people, rocked in the cradle of paganism for generations. It +is the younger generation that are chiefly benefited by the mission +work. Sometimes some of the others, seeing this, will say, "I am too +old; you should have come sooner." + +Then again the missionary sometimes meets with a Caleb or a Joshua. He +receives some encouragement, from even the old. Allow me to give an +account of a visit made at this time: + +We are going to visit an old queen. It is not our first visit to her, +but we are informed that she is ill at present and her friends are +fearful that she might die, as she is very, very old. Sisters Heise, +Cress, and myself are going. We carry a little bread, cocoa, and a New +Testament. She is living at the kraal of Mapita, our faithful helper. He +also has been sick with fever, but he is somewhat better today, and is +sitting out of doors by the fire, where his wife and children are +preparing their evening meal. This consists of peanut gravy, kafir-corn +porridge, and pumpkin. After greeting these, we pass on to the hut where +the queen lies. We sit down on the ground, so that we may look into the +little opening which serves as doorway. The woman in charge invites us +to enter, and we crawl into the hut. In the center of the hut is a fire +with four large stones around it; the smoke finding its way into our +eyes or out through the straw roof, for there is no chimney and no +window. Near this fireplace lies the poor old queen. Her bed consists of +a large hide spread on the hard, polished earthen floor, and a block of +wood serves for a pillow. A blanket is thrown over her body. We offer +the cocoa, which the sick one gratefully accepts, but the bread is +refused. We then go to her side and try to point her to the Lamb of God, +which taketh away the sin of the world, and tell her of the home +prepared for all those who love God. She tries to listen, and sometimes +responds to the question asked. Of course our knowledge of the language +is still imperfect, and it is more difficult for the old to understand +than for the young. When the sick one does not fully comprehend, the +nurse, who is Matshuba's mother, explains. Sitting here by this old +woman, and seeing her stretch out her thin hands to the warm stones at +the fire, we forget that vermin surrounds us or that our clothes might +become soiled; our hearts only overflow with a desire to let a flood of +light into the soul of the poor one before us. As the talk continues she +does seem to grasp some of the spiritual truths, and she gives a more +ready assent to the questions asked: + +"Do you desire us to pray for you?" + +"Oh! yes," she exclaimed with feeling. "I always love to have you pray +to Jesus for me." + +Kneeling there we offer prayers that the Lord would speak to this dear +soul and prepare her to meet Him. Her farewell word and clinging clasp +of the hand on our departure cause us to feel that light is breaking, +and that she, in her feeble way, is, by faith, taking hold of Christ. +Once before, when we visited her, she too offered up her feeble +petition. + +We emerge from the hut and stop a few minutes to speak with Mapita and +his family, and offer up a word of prayer. The sun has already set, so +we hastily bid them adieu and start for home, but not before they have +sent their respects to Father and Mother Engle. + +Thus ends one of the many visits we are called upon to make. But who is +this old queen, amid such unqueenly surroundings? She was one of the +numerous wives of Mzilikazi, the founder and first king of the Matabele +tribe. He had a large number of wives, not fewer than forty or fifty, +and this was one of them. The natives here claim that she was his chief +wife and the mother of Lobengula, the king. We think that, however, is +very doubtful, although the husband of the woman where she stays was one +of Lobengula's most trusted men. + +[Illustration: Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness.] + +This poor queen in her younger days had no doubt plenty, with slaves to +wait upon her and do her bidding. Now, in her old age, she tries to work +for a living by cultivating the soil, and growing her own food. If her +change of fortune is instrumental in leading her to Christ, she is +richer than she knows. She will not have all her good things in life. We +have been trying to help her also in temporal affairs. + +She arose from this sick bed and afterwards visited us. One day, when we +were again speaking of Christ, her face lighted up and she exclaimed, "I +am happy because Jesus lives in here," putting her hand on her breast. +We feel, as Sister Heise expressed it, "One would look upon her as one +of the first fruits of our mission work in Africa." + +Although the work among most of the older people thus far appeared to +make little progress, if we may judge by their lives, yet a number of +the pupils were steadfast. As far as could be ascertained they had +accepted Christ as their Savior and were walking out in all the light +they had. Since they were eager to follow the Lord in all things it was +considered advisable to baptize some. Accordingly, after the little +church was completed, they were examined as to their faith. In August, +1899, nine boys and one girl were by Elder Engle led into one of those +sparkling streams and dipped three times into the name of the Trinity, +and thus put on the Lord by baptism. It was a time of great rejoicing +and encouragement to the missionaries when this was done, and they could +gather around the table of the Lord, with some dark-skinned brethren, +who had so lately come out of pagan darkness. Although these were but +babes, yet the missionaries felt that the Lord had set His seal upon the +work. + +It might seem that we were somewhat hasty in thus so soon receiving into +church fellowship. The mission had been opened only a little over a +year, and our imperfect knowledge of the language, as well as of the +native character, made it scarcely possible for them to be well +instructed in the things of the Lord. There was no cause to think, +however, that they were not honest and sincere so far as they knew. +There was a radical change in their lives, and some were steadfast, but +others had not fully counted the cost and soon fell back, if indeed they +were really saved. One of the oldest, who was over twenty years of age, +stood well until he went to work for a European, who made sport of him, +and the boy gradually fell back into his former habits. Great pains were +taken to lead them on to know the Lord. + +During this year the war known as the Boer War began in South Africa. It +was a conflict which seemed inevitable between the wealthy English mine +owners and their Dutch rulers. We are perhaps safe in saying that heavy +taxation without sufficient representation was the chief cause of the +war. The first event of importance in connection with it was the siege +of Kimberley, the great diamond field, and the headquarters of Mr. +Rhodes at the time. This occurred October 14. The war then spread +through other parts of South Africa and to the border of Rhodesia, but +did not extend into it. English troops were, however, stationed there to +repel an invasion should one be attempted. + +The war did not directly affect us, but indirectly it did. By the siege +of Kimberley, and later that of Mafeking, and the destruction of the +railroad our line of supplies from Cape Town was cut off, consequently +prices in Rhodesia rose very rapidly. Sugar was soon two shillings (48c) +per pound, flour about three guineas ($15) per one hundred pounds, and +other groceries in proportion. With little money on hand, and the +prospects of receiving more under such conditions uncertain, famine +might have stared us in the face. There was no need to be uneasy, +however; the Lord and the forethought of Father and Mother Engle +prepared us for such an emergency. Shortly before this the Charter +Company had placed some cattle on the mission farm, and we had the use +of milk. Butter, eggs, and vegetables for a time brought a very high +price in Bulawayo market, and with all these the mission was supplied. +The little spring wagon, drawn by four donkeys, went to Bulawayo nearly +every week for a time, taking in produce which brought a high price, and +we were in turn able to pay a high price for groceries and food for the +table; so that, during the darkest days of the war, all our needs were +supplied. + +Occasionally disquieting rumors would reach us that the Boers were about +to force their way through and come into Rhodesia. The natives +themselves were not a little interested in the outcome of the war. They +had no newspapers or system of telegraphy like the white people, but +they had a means of gaining news which to them was much more effective. +This was by means of communication among themselves. How they so quickly +secured news of the various engagements in the south and the result of +each engagement was a mystery. We on our part, situated among them as we +were, and conscious that there were many who were still seething under +British rule, could not avoid wondering what might be the outcome were +the British defeated. On the other hand, many of the natives seemed to +prefer British rule to that of the Dutch. They chose to remain as they +were rather than change masters. + + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT + +Extension of the Work Followed by Dark Days + +Verily, verily, I say unto you, Except a corn of wheat fall into the +ground and die, it abideth alone; but if it die, it bringeth forth much +fruit.--St. John 12: 24. + + +Matopo Mission was only one little light in the surrounding darkness, +and it was hoped that other stations might be opened in time. So after +Brother and Sister Cress came, or as soon as they had some little +knowledge of the language and of the work, they desired to open another +station. After looking the country over, they felt led to a place up +among the hills near the kraal of Buka, of whom mention was made earlier +in these pages. There were a number of kraals in the immediate vicinity, +and the location seemed a good one, except that it was somewhat near +Matopo Mission. They decided to move out in November, and at that time +they, together with the tent and supplies, were taken to their new +station. Unfortunately a heavy rain came on while they were on the way +and the ground was thoroughly soaked before they had an opportunity to +pitch their tent. They concluded, however, to remain at their place and +build. It was named Entabeni Mission. + +The building progressed satisfactorily, and they held services on each +Sunday for about two months or a little over. They felt encouraged in +their work and the natives interested. At the Christmas holidays they +came to spend the time with us, and we had a very enjoyable time with +the natives. The third week in January, 1900, a messenger arrived to +inform us that Sister Cress had been stricken with fever. A conveyance +was immediately sent to the place to bring her to Matopo Mission, and by +the time that reached their mission Brother Cress also was sick. Both +were brought to the mission and made as comfortable as possible. At +first no one considered their illness serious, for our party had thus +far been enjoying good health since the work opened. Other complications +set in in connection with Sister Cress' illness, and she gradually grew +worse. For twenty-four hours she lay unconscious and then rallied and +seemed quite bright. We were all present--Engles, Van Blunks, Sister +Heise, Brother Lehman, and myself--when she rallied. She requested that +prayer be offered for her recovery. This was done and we felt that she +would gain strength, but it was not to be. In half an hour that sweet +young life passed to be with God. This was February 8, 1900. All through +her sickness she felt perfectly resigned to the Lord's will, whether for +life or death. + +We felt that we could not spare this saintly woman, so well fitted both +by nature and by grace to shine for God. She had laid her all upon the +altar for Africa, and often expressed herself that she wanted to spend +her life in behalf of this people. She had been in Africa only nine and +one-half months, yet she had entered heart and soul into the work of the +Lord, and was rapidly acquiring the language, so that she could +converse with the people. She had formed some of the women into a sewing +class, uniting this work with religious instructions, and endearing +herself to all with whom she came into contact. She loved the people and +was willing and ready to undertake any kind of work that came to her. +She was especially gifted in prayer, and it was always an inspiration to +the rest of us to listen to her heartfelt petition. Why the Lord thus +early in her missionary career took her to Himself, we know not; but +when the things of earth shall be revealed, when we shall know as we are +known, then all will be clear. + +Brethren Engle and Lehman made a coffin; we covered it within with white +muslin and without with black cloth, and thus laid the body away. Mr. +Eyles, of Bulawayo, was interested in the mission and occasionally +visited us and spoke to the natives, since he had good command of the +Zulu language. On this occasion he consented to come out and preach the +funeral sermon. The chief men of the people carried her to her last +resting place beneath the Umkuni tree, and they mingled their tears with +ours. The occasion was made more sad by the fact that the husband was +still ill and unable to view the corpse or attend the funeral. + +During the sickness of these two people we greatly appreciated the +presence and help of Brother and Sister Van Blunk, who still lived near +the mission. Both were very kind in assisting to care for the sick and +also in the last sad rites. Shortly afterwards they moved to Bulawayo +and made that the headquarters of their evangelistic work. + +[Illustration: Elder Engle and Donkey Team at Matopo Mission.] + +Brother Cress recovered from his illness, but concluded that it was best +for him to return to America, and wrote the Board accordingly. He felt +his loss keenly. The work in general resumed its normal condition until +the last week in March, when our bishop and overseer, Elder Engle, +became sick. He had been very busy with the work, and in his frequent +trips to Bulawayo, sometimes in the rain, he may have exposed himself. +His condition did not seem serious, and he was not obliged to keep his +bed continually. On April 2 he walked to a garden near by, and when he +returned he again lay down. He ate heartily of the dinner prepared for +him, after which his wife came to the dining-room and ate with us. At +the close of our 3 P. M. dinner she went to her room, but returned at +once and asked me to fill the hot water bottle and come over. I did so +and found Brother Engle having a heavy chill and speaking the Zulu +language rapidly, seemingly unconscious of our presence. We endeavored +in every way to help him, but soon found that he was rapidly becoming +paralyzed. Sister Heise and Brother Lehman were called and a +consultation held. It was decided to send a messenger to the fort, ten +miles away, and from there telephone to Bulawayo for a doctor. Brother +Cress had left that day to go as far as the fort on his way to Bulawayo, +and he was also to be informed. + +All night we watched by the Elder's bedside, but there was nothing that +could be done. Brother Cress arrived near noon the next day, but the +doctor did not arrive in time. That was a dark time as he lay paralyzed +and unconscious in the little mud hut he called home, far from his +children, far from the comforts of civilization, with none of his family +or relatives, save his devoted wife, by his side. As it became evident +that the end was near, that heroic mother, who had been such a worthy +companion in all his labors, stooped over and imprinted on his face a +kiss for each of their seven sons in far-away America. At 5 P. M., April +3, he breathed his last. Thus, in less than two months from the date of +Sister Cress' death, Elder Engle also was called home. The loss of our +sister was great, but this seemed to be a still greater blow on the +mission. + +He was so absorbed in the work, and no sacrifice was too great, no labor +too hard, for him to endure. Perhaps, if he had spared himself a little +more, he might have been able to continue longer in the work. Who knows? +The language was difficult for one at his age, yet he was making heroic +efforts to acquire it, and could make himself pretty well understood. We +have seen him, after reading the Word, stand before the people, with the +tears running down his face in his great love for them and in his desire +to help them to Christ. And the natives knew that he loved them and they +in turn loved him and greatly lamented his departure. The language of +many of them might be summed up in that of one woman. As she stood by +his coffin, weeping, she said: + +"He was good to me. He gave me salt, he gave me calico. What shall we do +without him?" + +It seemed that his life work was finished. He had had the desire of his +heart, in that he had been permitted to reach Africa and see a work +started in the wilds. He had been privileged to see something of the +travail of soul by beholding some step into the Kingdom. Now he had gone +to hear the welcome message, "Well done, good and faithful servant ... +enter thou into the joy of thy Lord." + +This time it was Brethren Cress and Lehman who made the coffin. There +was no lumber on hand, but they removed some from the hut doors for the +purpose. Again we covered it to contain the form of our elder. Mr. Eyles +could not meet with us at this time, and the Van Blunks were away; but +two of the officials from Fort Usher were present, and a number of +natives, not so many, however, as at the previous time. No doubt they +were becoming suspicious of this oft-repeated death. The white men +present, together with some of the natives, carried the body to its last +resting place beside Sister Cress. Brother Cress spoke in English to the +white people present, while the natives were addressed by the writer +from 2 Tim. 4: 7-8. + +The devoted wife had been wonderfully sustained by a Higher Power +through all this sad scene. She had been called here, far from her home +and family, to lay away her husband, but she realized that she was not +alone. When, however, the funeral was over, the effects of the shock and +of the strain through which she had been passing were manifest. She too +took her bed with the dread African fever. + +[Illustration: MATOPO CEMETERY. Elder Jesse Engle. Mrs. Cress. Mrs. E. +Doner. Elder Jacob Engle at his father's grave and Elder John Sheets.] + +The Seventh Day Adventist missionaries, who had been so kind to us when +we first came to Bulawayo, sent letters of condolence as soon as they +heard of our bereavement, and offered the services of their physician, +should we need him. In this emergency we sent for him to come and see +Mother Engle. He rode the fifty miles on horseback to come to minister +to her and to give us instructions as to how to treat the disease. This +was something which we greatly needed and appreciated, and it has been +of great service to us in later years. He would accept no compensation +for his long and tiresome journey. Such are the big hearts one finds in +the interior of Africa. They are enlarged to take in more of the Spirit +of the Master. All was done that could possibly be done for Mother +Engle, so that she might gain her health sufficiently to return to +America with Brother Cress. She continued to have relapses of the fever +for three months, and it was not until July 19 that she was able to make +the journey. + +Brother Cress' stay of sixteen months in Africa had brought great loss +to him, but the Lord had sustained him. We were sorry to lose him as +well as Mother Engle in the work. She never felt called of herself to go +as a missionary, but only to be with her husband. When he was led of the +Lord to go forth, she most cheerfully bade farewell to her family and +all that was dear to a mother's heart and went with her husband, neither +of them knowing whether they would be permitted to see their family +again. She was not merely a companion to him, but a most devoted +helpmate, not only in all that can possibly mean in civilized lands; but +larger still, in the heartaches, the weariness, the loneliness, and the +discouragements that come to a missionary. How often the names of their +loved ones would be spoken by these two! How they would linger over the +letters that came, and yet never a word of complaining or regret that +they had left all for this. When Elder Engle died we felt that we had +lost a father; so, when she left for America, we realized that the +mother and homemaker was gone. + +Before their departure a most important event transpired. I refer to the +marriage, on May 1, of Mr. Isaac Lehman and Miss Alice Heise, by Rev. +Van Blunk. This was to have taken place earlier, but was delayed by the +sorrowful events through which we were passing. Even the day of the +wedding was saddened by a most serious relapse of Mother Engle, and we +felt quite anxious on her account. This was the first opportunity for +the natives to see something of a Christian wedding, and we believe they +were impressed with the difference between a Christian and a pagan +marriage. Brother Lehman was a consecrated young man and had from the +first taken hold of the work along all lines with zeal and readiness. He +had also made rapid strides in the language. Sister Heise, too, ever +since the opening of the mission, had been a most able and efficient +worker, so that both were well equipped to do effectual service for the +Master. + +All of us accompanied Mother Engle and Brother Cress to Bulawayo, where +they rested for a day and then took the train for Cape Town, while we +returned to continue the work. For a time nine white workers had been at +Matopo Mission, and in less than six months the number had been reduced +to three. Those left, however, were not discouraged. May 23 of the same +year one of them wrote to the _Evangelical Visitor_: + + "He that keepeth thee will not slumber." This is the Father's + promise to all His dear children, not only to you who are sheltered + in Christian homes, but also to us who are in the wilds of Africa. + We have just as much faith in the promise today as when to outward + appearances everything was more secure. Your hearts with ours have + no doubt been torn by the sad messages which have crossed the + waters during the few months just past, and some one may be even + tempted to doubt whether it was the Lord's will for us to come to + Africa. Beloved, does England doubt the outcome of the deadly + conflict raging in South Africa because she has already lost + thousands of men? Is her courage failing? No; far from it. Money + and men are continually pouring into the country and soon the + independence of two states will be a thing of the past. Shall we as + Christian soldiers have less faith in the King of kings? Shall we + give up the conflict because two have fallen by our side? No; not + if all men forsake us, for with God we still have a majority. While + our hearts feel bereft by the departure of our beloved colaborers, + we still have confidence in our Great Captain, and we know that He + never lost a battle. + + + + +CHAPTER NINE + +The Battle Is not Yours, but God's + +Wherefore take unto you the whole armour of God, that ye may be able to +withstand in the evil day, and having done all, to stand.--Eph. 6: 13. + + +The missionary going among the heathen must realize that he is about to +engage in a warfare, and that the conflict will be fierce and long. He +is assailing the great enemy of souls in his stronghold. The fight is on +continually and one must keep armed for battle. More important yet than +this the missionary should remember that he is under orders and that the +work is not his but the Lord's. + +The loss of our fellow-soldiers was most keenly felt, and there were +some severe tests to face. The work had become disorganized by the +continued illness and the deaths, when all our energies had been needed +in caring for those about us. Encouraging letters, however, came from +the homeland and the Mission Board, so that we realized that prayers +were being offered in our behalf and in behalf of the work. We also +expected that reinforcements would be forthcoming in the Lord's own +time. So, under the leadership of our Great Captain, the army was again +set in array and the conflict continued. + +We were pleased to note that the people stood by us nobly in this +extremity, even though Satan had put forth every effort to defeat the +work. Some who had started to follow the Lord saw that they had become +indifferent and renewed their covenant. There were four boys who were +staying at the mission at this time, and they came one evening and said +they would like to have a talk. This was not so strange, as we often had +little confidential chats with them. On this particular evening they +came in and sat down. Then, without any preliminary remarks, Matshuba +arose and made a complete confession of his past life. He then sat down +and Kelenki arose and began to do the same. I said, + +"Boys, if you desire we will call Brother and Sister Lehman, that they +may hear likewise." + +They replied, "Yes, Miss, do so, for we desire to confess everything and +have all wiped away, and we do not want to repeat our wrongdoings, for +we want to be ready when Jesus comes." + +So one of them called the Lehmans, and beginning again they arose, one +by one, and told of their past life. When each one had finished he would +turn around and inquire of the rest if he had told everything. Three of +them were baptized members, and they evidently had been having a meeting +in their hut and became concerned about their condition. They had not +been guilty of any new sins, but were in doubt as to their standing +before God, and wanted pardon and cleansing. They had taken 1 John 1: 9 +very literally. When the confessions were finished we all knelt in +prayer; and after we had prayed, they too most earnestly besought the +Lord that they might be set completely free from their past life. When +they arose to their feet their faces were shining and they said "God +had heard and answered." + +Then, as they sat there, they told of their old lives and of the lives +of the people about us, until we felt that we were just beginning to +know the people among whom we were situated. Conditions which, up to +that time, they had been timid of telling, for fear of their people, +they now boldly and fearlessly exposed, and they seemed to be done once +and forever with their heathen past. Our hearts went up in gratitude to +the Father, and our eyes were opened more and more to see the real need +of this people and the obstacles in their way of becoming Christians. + +People reared in Christian homes, with an entire Bible which they can +read from childhood, with the privileges of church and Sunday-school, +with good literature and hymns and many other advantages which might be +mentioned, cannot possibly, by any stretch of imagination, put +themselves in the place of those who are deprived of all these; and not +only that, but who, from infancy, have been in an atmosphere of +ignorance and superstition, reeking with influences the most foul and +loathsome imaginable. Then, too, is it to be wondered at that when +people, who have been brought up amid surroundings the most helpful +possible, spiritually, and the most conducive to growth in grace, grow +lean in soul and backslide--I say is it to be wondered at that the +Christians in heathen lands, in their desperate struggle against such +adverse and degrading surroundings, sometimes relapse into heathendom? +Not only is it not to be wondered at, but it is positively surprising +and a great cause for rejoicing among missionaries, that so many +grasping hold of the Everlasting Arm do once and forever shake off the +bog and filth of the bottomless pit and stand as monuments of His power +to save to the uttermost. + +During the dry season of 1900 an aggressive campaign against Satan and +his followers among the rocks and strongholds was begun, for we felt +that the Lord would have us press the battle to the gates. During the +rainy seasons, when people are busy in their gardens, and when there is +a great deal of sickness, both school and evangelistic work suffer, so +that it is necessary to make the best use of the dry season. As soon as +the crops were gathered the school at the mission increased in numbers +and interest, and Brother and Sister Lehman opened a school at the +village of Chief Hluganisa. They rode back and forth day by day, and +when they were unable to go two of the boys were sent to teach. The +attendance and interest there were encouraging. + +What of this chief, who had so kindly received the missionaries two +years before? It would be a pleasure to be able to report that he had +opened his heart to accept Christ as his Savior, but such was not the +case. He was very ready to receive the gifts of the white man, whether +from officials, missionaries, or any one else. He was also quite willing +that the school should be started in his village; for would not this +make his people wiser and more able to secure the good things of the +earth? But the white man's religion, he would none of it for himself. He +was a most troublesome beggar from first to last. Elder Engle, had made +him a present of a very good blanket, with which he was greatly pleased, +but he seldom came to services. When he came to the mission it was +always with the expectation of asking and receiving something. + +One day he came to pay us sort of a state visit, and a little later his +three wives followed in order of their rank. We were desirous of +treating them all kindly after their long walk to pay us this visit, so +Mother Engle concluded to give them bread and tea. A plate of bread, +together with a quantity of tea and sugar, was placed before them. We +expected, of course, that all would receive some. The chief appropriated +everything; emptied all the sugar into the tea, drank all, and ate all +the bread. When they started home the wives went first, the lowest in +rank preceding, to prepare everything for their lord and master, who +followed at his leisure. One day one of the missionaries, tried by his +cupidity and avarice, gave him a straight talk. He did not return for +some months after this, not until the funeral of Sister Cress. Until +this day he continues to be a rank heathen, greedy, and superstitious, +and a lover of wives and beer. + +All three of us by this time were fairly well prepared in the language, +and some of the boys were beginning to be helpful in evangelistic work. +Early in the season the Lehmans, with one of the men as guide, made a +tour to the southeast of us in a section not yet visited. They reported +an interesting and profitable trip and met the people from six different +kraals. As it was a section of raw heathendom, they were surprised to +find, at one of the kraals, a woman who joined heartily in the hymn +sung and was familiar with the words. On inquiry they found that when a +girl she had lived at the house of Rev. Thomas, one of the first +missionaries of Matabeleland. He had a station at some distance north of +Bulawayo, and his memory is much revered by those natives who knew him. +The brother and sister had the fortune, or misfortune, to be present at +a beer drink. This is their way of getting a lot of work done: They make +a quantity of beer; then call in their neighbors to help work, paying +them with beer. It is surprising how much beer they can consume at such +times. They often become quite boisterous and even intoxicated, and +frequently quarrel and fight as a result of their debauch. On this +occasion the men were friendly, but scarcely in a condition to receive +the Gospel. The travelers returned tired, but rejoicing in the Lord +because of another opportunity of sowing seed. + +The life of a missionary is not full of exciting adventures and +encouraging incidents. It is very ordinary at times and very crushing at +others. The ups and downs would soon wear him out did he not take fast +hold of God and, looking up by faith, keep saying to Him, "Lord, this is +Thy work. Do Thou bear the burdens, the joys, and the sorrows that keep +crowding thick and fast upon me, and let me be only Thy instrument and +Thy weapon of warfare." I remember, during the first year, I at times +felt I was not burdened enough for the souls about me, and once spent +long hours of prayer, asking that the burden might rest more heavily. I +retired to rest. The next day the Lord answered the prayer of His +messenger. I thought it would crush me to the earth, but the lesson had +been learned. He knows how much we can bear, and we should always say, +"As Thou wilt." + +In our visits among the people one day is much like another, but they +must be made in order to keep in touch with them. August 17 I wrote as +follows: + + "One more day's work for Jesus, + One less of life for me, + But heaven is nearer and Christ is dearer, + Than yesterday to me. + His life and light fill all my soul tonight." + + This being Saturday, I arose early to go out among the people. + After taking some food, I started a little after sunrise with + Sihlaba as guide. We went to visit the kraal of Siponka, about two + miles distant. These people have been on my mind for some time. + They are good-hearted but veritable heathen, and care only for the + good things of this life. They are entirely too indifferent to come + either to school or church, although two, who were members, live + here. The downward influence is too strong for even them, and + seemingly they have done according to the proverb. + + Early as it was in the morning, the people were nearly all away, + but we found at home two men, some women, and boys and girls. There + was an opportunity for giving the Gospel to them, and the Lord + greatly helped in the presentation of His Word. They gradually + became interested and seemed at least to have greater light. May + the Lord send home the truth into their hearts! + + Siyaya (one of the backslidden boys) went along with us to the home + of Amuzeze (another member). Here there were a number of women, one + man, and some young people. They were more willing than usual to + listen, also more able to understand, and Amuzeze took part in + prayer. + + From there Siyaya also went along to Umvunzi's home. Poor boy! he + followed us around, seemingly hungry for the Word, but helplessly + overcome by the gross darkness surrounding him. At this last place + there were only a few present. The men from all these kraals had + gone a long distance to buy goats. Here the powers of darkness were + so great that I could not shake off the feeling and have victory in + speaking. I wonder what my spiritual status would be at the end of + the year, if I were obliged to live long amid such surroundings; + and yet I have Christ and His Spirit in my soul and much of His + Word written in my heart, while these poor ones have only + generations of paganism back of them. + + We then turned our faces homeward, moving in something of a circle + and coming first to Seba's village. This is not far from the + mission, and yet it is our first visit to this place. The people + seemed very glad to see us, and some here had the privilege for the + first time of hearing the Gospel, and were eager to catch every + word. While we were speaking, a native, carrying poles, was + passing, and he put his poles down and entered to listen. He was a + stranger to me. A tall fine-looking fellow he was. He informed us + that he had moved near and was building a hut. Mapita and his wife + also had entered during the services. Seba invited us to remain for + dinner and eat of their _inkobe_ (boiled corn), but it was not yet + ready, so thanking him for his hospitality we continued our + journey. + + First, the stranger invited us to go over and see his wife and the + hut he was building, which was only a short distance away. We did + so and here we met two women from our nearest kraal. We then + proceeded on our homeward way, and had gone only a short distance + when we met John (a Christian) and his brothers, who followed us + home. + + On the way we stopped a few minutes at Mapita's home to see the + children, and then reached the mission at midday. The boys remained + a short time to talk. I then tidied my hut, made a dress and gave + it to a little girl, + and entertained a number of native women. After our three o'clock + dinner and worship I read and studied the language, and here it is + evening and the close of a very enjoyable day. + +This account has been given, not because there was anything unusual +about it, but because it is typical of many Saturdays on the mission +field, and some of them have been days of the most exquisite enjoyment +we have ever known. Such days never seem to become monotonous. One +forgets the long and tiresome walk if he finds eager and interested +listeners at the end. Even if some steel their hearts against the Word, +there is still the consciousness to the messenger that he has done what +he could. Then again much of one's time on the mission station is spent +talking to the natives who come. They may not be anxious for the Gospel, +but one always hopes some word or message may sink into their hearts. + +The first few years of the mission, the country was occasionally visited +by locusts, sometimes in such large swarms as almost to darken the face +of the sky. These were not the seventeen-year cicadas, which some people +are pleased to term locusts, but large grasshoppers, various kinds of +which made their appearance to the great destruction of crops and +vegetation. Sometimes the corn and the kafir corn would be stripped. +Again, an immense swarm would come suddenly and alight--so that in a +very short time the whole face of nature would be transformed from a +bright green to a reddish brown, the color of the locusts--and would +then as suddenly fly off without doing much harm. Wherever the locusts +settled for the night, the natives would be there early in the morning +with their nets and catch them for food. + +The year 1900 was especially one of these locust years. During the dry +season, the adult locusts selected suitable places, remained to feed for +a time, then deposited their eggs in the earth and died. As at this time +the insects cannot fly, the natives catch them in large numbers and +carry them home for food. One such swarm settled about two miles from +the mission, and thither day after day went the women and girls to catch +them. They would put them in bags or large baskets and carry them home. +One could often see ten or twelve women walking through our premises, +each one carrying on her head a bushel or more of locusts. They would +cook them in large earthen pots, then spread them on the rocks to dry, +after which they would go for a fresh supply. When the locusts were dry +they would be stored away for food. In eating them the natives would +remove head, wings, and legs and eat them somewhat after the manner of +dried herring, and considered them a great delicacy, saying, "They are +our meat." We have partaken of them in this manner and found them not +unpalatable, and they are certainly a cleaner food than many things +eaten in civilized lands. The natives' favorite way of preparing the +locusts, however, was to stamp them in a stamping block, then cook them, +together with ground peanuts, into a gravy to be eaten with their +porridge. + +Although many of the locusts had been safely stowed away in the native +storehouses, during this year, yet numbers remained in various parts of +the country to lay their eggs in the ground. When the rains came and +softened the ground these eggs hatched. After a colony hatched, the +little wingless larvae, or hoppers, started forth as an army, all going +in one direction. These armies were generally about a rod or two in +width and much greater in length, and woe to the young garden that came +in their way! They would spread over it, devour the tender shoots, and +then proceed in the same general direction in which they had been +traveling. The natural grass and herbage of the country was too tough +for them to eat. Not only one but several such armies coming from +different directions passed through our gardens that season, and some of +the cornfields had to be planted two or three times. One was finally +left unplanted, while our potatoes and many of the garden vegetables +were destroyed. At first we endeavored to fight them with fires when +they were seen to be approaching a garden, but this was soon found to be +useless. The missionaries felt the loss of their crops and vegetables, +but their loss could not be compared with that of the poor natives, many +of whom could not procure grain for a second planting, and they had +nothing else to depend upon. + +During this year we were seriously contemplating an advanced step in the +work, by opening the way for more boys and girls to come as boarders. +They would thus be given a Christian home and be trained to work and to +habits of cleanliness. Up to this time the largest number staying at one +time was four boys; and one girl had come lately. The day was not far +distant when it would be necessary to erect better and more permanent +dwellings, as the huts were already showing signs of decay; and if more +boys could be received and these trained to make brick and assist in +building, it would be an advantage both to the boys and to the mission. +As the year drew near to a close there began to be a desire on the part +of some of the older boys to attend school and perhaps come to stay with +us. We knew enough of the native character to believe that it was best +not to throw out any special inducement, as it is always best for them +to desire a thing for themselves and to be fully persuaded in their own +minds so that they might not be wavering. + +On New Year's Day, 1901, after the close of the services, a boy, +probably nineteen years of age, stood at the open door of my hut with +rather a wistful look on his face. He was well dressed and had been +working for white people, but had shown no interest in school or in the +Gospel up to this time. Something in his face that day prompted me to +say, + +"Ndhlalambi, when are you coming to stay at the mission and give your +heart to the Lord?" + +He promptly replied, "I am coming one week from tomorrow." + +Afterwards, in giving his experience, he said, "While I was working at +the mines I became convicted of my wrongdoing and made up my mind that I +would come to the missionaries and go to school and give my heart to +Jesus. When I came I was afraid to ask and the Lord told Miss to ask +me." + +He did come and did yield his heart to the Lord, and seemed to settle +it in his mind, if one may judge by subsequent actions. "I care not what +course others may take, but as for me I will serve the Lord." He made a +good confession and was always ready to step out into the light as it +shone on his pathway. His way, however, was not an easy one. He met with +violent opposition at times from an irascible pagan father, and +persecution in various ways, but he stood firm. A special test came to +him a year or two after he started to school. One day he came in great +distress and said, + +"Father is very angry with me. My mother's brother died and left me a +lot of cattle and other property, and my parents wish me to go and claim +the property. But if I go, they will have a big dance and claim to call +back the spirit of my uncle and ask him his will about the property, and +they will want me to take part in their worship. I desire to follow the +Lord." + +I said, "If you do not go perhaps you will not receive the property." + +"That makes no difference," he replied. "I love the Lord more than I +love the cattle. Only pray that father will not be angry with me for +refusing to go." + +Later he came with his face all aglow and said, "The Lord has heard our +prayers. Father is not angry with me any more." + +In school he was slow but persevering, and in work likewise. He had his +faults, and seemed at times to be lacking in humility, yet he never +seemed to waver in his determination to follow the Lord. + +Several other young men also applied for admission, among whom was +Gomo, a brother of Tebengo and Muza and Emyonleni; also two younger boys +who were already Christians, Masikwa and Madhliwa. There were now nine +boys, and several months afterward three girls came. These girls were +trained by Sister Lehman to do housework. The work was looking quite +encouraging, for all showed an interest in desiring to become +Christians. + +As this rainy season came on, it could not fail to remind us of the loss +and of the trying times of the previous year. Some of our number thought +it best to go to a more healthy place until the rains were over. This, +however, would almost necessitate closing the work, which was not to be +thought of. + +In the midst of the rains, in March, Sister Lehman took down with the +fever one day and on the following day her husband was also laid low. +The buildings at Matopo are in a healthy place, yet during the rainy +season one is always more or less exposed to fever, either by traveling +and sleeping out, or even by going down to the gardens in the valley in +the evening. At that time we did not understand so well how to check or +combat the fever as in later years. So the sick ones grew worse and +required my constant attention day and night for about ten or more days. +Fortunately the boys were good helpers, as there were no girls at the +time. Matshuba was able to take charge of the school; Ndhlalambi and one +of the little boys could help me in the kitchen and sickroom; Gomo did +the washing outside of the window where I could see and direct; and the +other boys attended to the gardens. + +As the sick ones grew worse we sent a boy for a doctor, but on account +of the damp, rainy weather, he delayed several days before coming, so +that the fever was broken by the time he reached the mission. It was a +trying time and one of looking to the Lord on the part of the sick and +the well ones. To make matters worse some of the boys became quite ill, +and we were unable to give them the attention they needed. One day +Kelenki, who was very low, managed to crawl to the kitchen and begged to +be allowed to lie there by the stove. Mrs. Eyles kindly came out from +Bulawayo when at last the doctor was able to reach us. She remained for +a week during their convalescence and cared for the sick. This gave me a +much-needed rest and an opportunity to turn my attention to the boy, who +was still quite ill and needed help. It was a day of rejoicing when our +brother and sister and all were restored to health, and we were thankful +that the Lord had mercy upon us, lest we should have sorrow upon sorrow. + +During the time we were passing through these afflictions, another +difficulty was staring us in the face, which threatened, if possible, to +be more serious than any which we had yet been called upon to meet. This +was the land question. Mention was made that we were looking toward the +erection of more permanent buildings. We had sent to the Board for money +for this purpose; also for money to survey the land. Up to this time the +3,000 acres upon which the mission had been located by the government, +had not been surveyed. It had been given only as a reservation for +mission purpose, and permission had also been granted that the +missionaries could stake off a plot of 3,000 acres and make a diagram +without going to the expense of employing a government surveyor, as that +kind of work is costly in Africa. For this purpose, the year previous, +four of us, Brethren Engle and Cress, together with Sister Heise and +myself, started out to stake out the land, supposing, as we had been +informed by the official who located the mission, that the two beacons +north of us were the limit of the surveyed territory. We climbed hills, +went over precipices, and waded swamps under a hot August sun and made a +diagram of the desired farm, only to find at the close that the result +was not satisfactory to the government. It was necessary for a +government survey to be made, and this had not been done; but we had +sent for money for the purpose, and the money had just arrived. + +The day on which Sister Lehman took sick, two Europeans brought some +cattle and put them in our pen, from which the company's cattle had been +removed the previous year. They did not ask for permission to place +these cattle on the mission farm, and to us it seemed rather a bold +step. They informed us, however, that they thought a mistake had been +made in locating the mission, and that we were on surveyed land. They +stated that they were not certain in reference to the matter, as the +owners did not know the exact boundary of their farm. + +The Charter Company, of Rhodesia had, especially at the close of the +war, made large concessions of land to companies, syndicates, and +individuals. These grants often comprised many thousands of acres, and +in many instances the owners, in the early days, did not know the +location of their land. They simply sent out a surveyor to measure and +stake off the requisite amount and erect beacons; then the land was left +entirely unimproved. If they were fortunate enough afterwards to know +the boundaries of the farms, they often sent out an agent to collect tax +of the natives living on it. The best of the land being disposed of, +very little remained for farmers, who would have improved the land, or +for missionaries, who would both improve it and instruct the natives. No +doubt the government, when too late, realized their lack of wisdom in +making some of these grants, as it greatly retarded the work of building +up and developing the country. + +This was the condition of affairs when Matopo Mission was located. We +had, however, no intimation that a mistake might have been made in the +location, until informed by the two Europeans previously mentioned. One +of them desired to collect hut tax for the company owning the land, but +this he could not do, as he was not certain of the boundaries, and the +company, at the time, was not willing to bear the expense of having a +surveyor come out to locate the land. It is needless to say that it was +a dark and trying time for the missionaries. If we were on surveyed +land, we might have to change the mission site and much of the work +already accomplished would be lost. Again, how were we to find out where +we were? If a wealthy company did not care to bear the expense of +locating their land, how much less able were missionaries, whose +purses, at the best, are never too full! Should we go to the expense of +sending for a surveyor to locate us, we might be forced to move the +mission, and the outlay incurred would benefit the company alone. We +were in these wilds; could we succeed in locating ourselves? + +As usual, when difficulties thus confronted us, we looked to Him who +never fails. Any one in the mission field has often reasons to be +thankful for the varied training and experiences of the home land; for +no knowledge or previous experience of whatever sort comes amiss when he +is out where there is little outside help. We had studied, hence had a +little knowledge of surveying. Would that knowledge help us here in +these fastnesses? + +Mr. Jackson, the magistrate at Fort Usher, who had always been a friend +in need, was appealed to. He did not know the boundaries of the farms in +the immediate vicinity, but he knew the location of one important beacon +several miles north, for he had had occasion to settle a difficulty in +reference to it some time previous. So, with this knowledge to begin +with, we went to the government surveyor and secured a diagram of all +the farms in the vicinity of the mission. Thus equipped, and securing a +compass, we started for home. Brother Lehman made a temporary chain, and +together with some of the boys we went to the beacon pointed out by Mr. +Jackson. From this a survey was made south, and it was discovered that +the mission was on a tract of land known as "Matopo Block," owned by the +Bulawayo Syndicate. This was a farm of 25,000 acres, and it was about +twelve miles long. As there were no beacons for a distance of seven +miles on the south of the mission, it was not difficult to understand +how the mistake was made in the location. By further survey we +discovered that we were on the extreme east end of this farm, and a line +drawn nearly southeast from the beacon north of us would give the +mission the required 3,000 acres. Another surveyed farm lay adjoining +this on the east. + +We had located the mission, but it remained to induce the government to +arrange with the syndicate and give them land elsewhere in exchange for +the amount promised to the mission. It is needless to enter into the +details of the slow process necessary for settling the difficulty, for +any one dealing with the affairs of government knows something of the +tediousness and red tape required. Letters were addressed to both the +government and to Mr. Rhodes, who was then on his estate near Bulawayo. +The government officials met the question in a spirit of conciliation +and fairness, promising to do all in their power to bring it to a +satisfactory settlement. We were asked later to make further survey, to +be certain that we had given the correct location. At one time it +appeared that the exchange could not be made, and we were requested to +look up another location. Looking to the Lord, we made another appeal, +which resulted, in September of the same year, in the mission being +allowed to retain its location. At first this was to have been only a +reservation, but the final papers, which were not made out until late in +1902, resulted in giving a ninety-nine-year lease, which was much more +satisfactory. + + + + +CHAPTER TEN + +Reinforcements and Industrial Work + +It is not the mere preacher that is wanted here. The bishops of Great +Britain, collected with all the classic youth of Oxford and Cambridge, +would effect nothing by mere talking with the intelligent people of +Uganda. It is the practical Christian tutor, who can teach people how to +become Christians, cure their diseases, construct dwellings, understand +and exemplify agriculture, turn his hand to anything, like a +sailor--this is the man who is wanted. Such an one, if he can be found, +would become the savior of Africa.--Henry M. Stanley. + + +During the progress of the land question and the negotiations with the +government, important changes were taking place in the personae of the +mission. In June of 1901 we were pleased to receive much-needed +reinforcements in the persons of Mr. Levi Doner and Miss Emma Long. +Accompanying them were Mr. and Mrs. Jacob Lehman, who were on their way +to engage in mission work at the Compounds in Johannesburg. On account +of the war they were not yet permitted to enter Johannesburg, so they +came to Matopo for a time. + +At the same time Brother Isaac Lehman and wife thought it best to go to +Cape Town for a rest, as she had not fully recovered from her attack of +the fever. We were very sorry to lose so valuable colaborers at this +time, for they had the language and experience in mission work, and it +always requires time for new missionaries to take hold of the various +duties. I especially felt the loss of Brother Lehman, as I was the only +one left who could speak to the natives. Brother Doner, however, made +rapid strides in the language, and soon acquired a working knowledge of +it, and was also a willing and efficient messenger along all lines. Very +early in the work he was laid low with fever, but he recovered. Then +Sister Long was quite sick for a time. These experiences, coming so +early in their missionary career, were somewhat discouraging. + +The mission family was steadily increasing. A number of other boys had +come to stay at the mission and become pupils and industrial workers. +From the very first in receiving boys at the mission station, it was our +plan to have them in school three and one-half hours and the rest of the +time, which was five or six hours, they were engaged in some industrial +work. As the natural inclination of the native is toward laziness and +filthiness in personal habits, we were opening the door and taking all +who desired to come and giving them a home, our aim being to take them +out of their degraded home surroundings and give them the threefold +training, spiritual, intellectual, and industrial, all of which seemed +necessary to help them become strong, established Christians. + +These natives, for sanitary and other reasons, are always given their +own separate huts, away from the Europeans; they have their own native +food and live their own life. Some of them are appointed to grind and +cook their food and do the work of their kitchen. It could not be +otherwise in such a country. Even the most civilized natives as a rule +prefer to eat by themselves. The missionaries sometimes accept the +hospitality of the natives in their homes and eat of the food set before +them, but even there the natives will wait until the missionaries have +finished eating, or else they will eat in a separate place. + +Since the pupils have time to do considerable work, they receive, in +addition to food and schooling, a small sum of money sufficient to +clothe themselves; and on Saturday afternoon, after washing their +clothing, they have the time for recreation and mending their clothing. + +Up to this time the industrial work of the boys had been chiefly on the +farm and in the gardens; but now a new line of work was being +introduced, that of brickmaking. Brother Doner desired to start in this +work at least. It was at this time somewhat of an experiment, as the +various kinds of soil had to be tested so that he might know which was +best suited for this purpose. It was also too late in the season to +spend much time in this work. A few thousand of brick were made; and as +rains threatened to come early, they were hastily built into a kiln and +burnt. A beginning had been made, however, and some knowledge of +brickmaking gained. + +During November of this year an event occurred which was second to none +in the history of the work. I refer to the arrival of Elder and Mrs. +Steigerwald, sent out to have charge of the mission. + +We had been looking forward and hoping that some one might come in this +capacity. In the meantime we were carrying on the work as well as we +were able during the nineteen months since the death of Elder Engle. The +brother and sister took hold of the work courageously from the first. It +is not an easy task to begin mission work in heathen lands, among a +strange people, strange tongue, strange surroundings and ways of living. +It is no less easy to step into a work already begun amidst such +different surroundings and new ways of doing things, and find the work +pressing in on all sides. Such were the conditions that met Elder +Steigerwald from the first, but it soon became evident that he was equal +to the task. + +Constant changes in the mission field are trying, both to the people and +to the missionaries themselves. Here two had been called away by death, +four had returned home (including Brother and Sister Van Blunk), and the +two Lehmans and their wives had gone to Cape Town. The people could not +help feeling these changes and scarcely knew what to expect. The changes +seem to have been unavoidable, yet it makes the people suspicious of +those who remain. The natives, like all those in heathen countries, love +to think that their missionaries have come to stay and be one with them. +The true missionary bears much the same relation to his people as the +parent does to the child; for they are his spiritual children. Then too +the language is not mastered in one, two, three years, or even in a +longer period of time. In fact, many do not master it in a lifetime, so +that all these changes could not fail to have their effect on the work +and the natives, and render the position of Brother Steigerwald a +difficult one. + +His first important work was to unite in marriage, on Christmas Day, +Brother Doner and Sister Long. There were many more natives present on +this occasion than at the previous marriage to witness the ceremony and +to congratulate their missionaries. + +Money had been forthcoming for permanent buildings which were greatly +needed. The huts were not only showing signs of decay, but some were +damp and unhealthful during the rainy season, and even became mouldy at +times. It was evident that, however convenient and useful they had been +in their time, their day was fast passing away, and for the comfort and +health of the missionaries something more permanent must be erected. The +rains had started before Elder Steigerwald's arrival, so no more bricks +could be made until the rains were over. Brother Doner was busy with the +farming, and this left Brother Steigerwald free to make preparations for +building. + +There is an abundance of fine granite stones and slabs in the vicinity; +and as the new year of 1902 opened, he had these hauled together for a +foundation. During the rainy season, whenever the rains stopped for a +time, he built at the foundation of the house. Although he had natives +to assist, yet he found the work to be very heavy and taxing to his +strength, but by the end of the rainy season he had a most excellent +foundation for a house laid. Then he and Brother Doner, with the help of +the schoolboys and some other natives, made and burnt a large kiln of +bricks and were ready to begin the house. + +[Illustration: Matopo Mission House. Front View.] + +The brethren in Africa can tell you that building on a mission station +in the wilds of Africa is quite a different affair from what it is in +civilized countries, or even in the cities of Africa. In these latter +places, a man, desiring to build, buys his timber, his ready-made brick, +and other material. Then the stone masons come and lay the foundation. +The bricklayers, carpenters, plumbers, plasterers, and painters all +follow in their order, together with their helpers, and the work is +completed in an incredibly short space of time. On the mission field all +this usually falls to the lot of one man, from the blasting out of the +stone for the foundation and the brickmaking until the building is +completed. He is mason, bricklayer, carpenter, plumber, plasterer, all +in one. That one often is not a trained mechanic, or even a practical +one, but many times he comes direct from the farm, schoolroom, or +pulpit. With the many duties of a missionary pressing in upon him, +sufficient to occupy all his attention, he must in addition undertake +the laborious task of building a house, and even make most of the +furniture with which it is fitted up. + +Some one may inquire, is it not possible to secure skilled workmen to do +the building? Yes, in some instances this can be done; but the high cost +of living in Africa raises the wages of skilled mechanics to such an +extreme height as to make it practically impossible for the missionary +to employ them. Again, he has around him raw natives, who need to be +taught to work, and his ambition is to do mission work in connection +with his building. + +Elder Steigerwald was equal to the emergency, and together with the help +of Brother Doner and the natives, he completed the house in a little +over a year from the time he began to haul the stone. The house is +large, having nine good-sized rooms, with a fireplace in each one. There +is a broad veranda nearly all around it and an iron roof over the whole, +and it is a building that would be a credit to any one. The building is +high and dry and has good board floors in four of the rooms, which add +much to the healthfulness of it. Brother Steigerwald could no doubt tell +you, if he would, of many days of arduous toil, which threatened to +undermine his health; of many difficult and perplexing questions which +confronted him in the process of construction; of lying awake at night, +planning how everything was to be accomplished; especially how he was to +build three fireplaces opening into one chimney and all have a good +draft--a feat which he most successfully accomplished. + +There were natives who lightened some of the heavier parts of the work, +but to train these to perform their work properly is often a greater +task than to do it one's self. This training must be done, however, if +the missionary is faithful to his trust of developing the native +character along useful lines as well as in giving him the Gospel. One of +the officials, in making a report of the work, stated, "Here, at least, +are missionaries who believe in teaching the natives the dignity of +labor." This is the course pursued at all our stations. To train them +properly is no easy task. It requires much wisdom, patience, firmness, +and love. One meets with many discouraging results and often with great +ingratitude on the part of those instructed; yet in the end it pays, if +natives are ever to be brought to a more civilized plane of living. + +There is one thing which operates strongly against the natives +respecting labor. The average European, on coming to Africa, even though +he may have been a day laborer and hard-working man in the country from +which he came, soon sees that the more menial tasks fall to the natives; +and when he takes the hoe or pick or shovel, he is told, "We do not do +that here. Let the nigger do it and you oversee." The majority do not +need a second invitation, and so such work is relegated to his black +neighbor. The native soon sees, or thinks that he sees, that the white +man regards manual labor as beneath him. This training is exactly what +the African finds in his own home. He leaves the distasteful and hard +tasks to his wife and the younger members of his family, while he sits +down and enjoys himself. He is thus confirmed in his belief that labor +is degrading. + +Not so with the missionary. He works continually along many lines, and +seeks to teach the native by his example, as well as by precept, the +dignity of labor, and that only indolence, dirt, vice, and kindred evils +are degrading. It is true that on account of climatic conditions and the +many duties falling continually to men and women on the mission field, +they are obliged, as their field of labor widens, to leave many lines of +work to the natives they have in training. If they did not do this the +spiritual part of the work and their own health would greatly suffer in +consequence. + +Perhaps some one might ask, Do those ignorant blacks ever learn to be +cleanly and do their work properly? Yes, some of them respond in a +surprisingly short period of time to faithful, energetic, yet patient +training, and become real helpers to the missionary, both in the house +and outside. Some, in addition to handling the oxen on the farm, also +learn to use hammer, saw, chisel, and plane, and work side by side with +white mechanics in certain lines of work. + +While the house was being built at the Matopo Mission, Matshuba, still +quite a young lad, was an interested spectator of everything that was +done, and he himself did carefully whatever he was able to perform. +When he found a small piece of lumber which was not likely to be used, +he would say, "Mufundisi [Missionary], may I have this?" If permission +was granted he carefully put it away, but said nothing. After several +pieces had been obtained, he asked permission to use tools and work-shop +on Saturday afternoon, when other work was stopped. He worked away in +the shop, asking questions of no one. After a few weeks had passed he +finally surprised us by showing a neatly-made chair, patterned after one +that had been purchased in town. He gradually learned to do all kinds of +work, as well as to build himself a good dwelling house. + +There are almost insurmountable difficulties, however, in the way of +teaching the trades to the natives as a means of earning money. The cry +of the country is for industrial schools and for native skilled labor, +but almost in the same breath the European will tell you that he will +not work side by side with the native in the same line of work. A +gentleman in Bulawayo had a contract for a fine, large building. His +mechanics were white, while the blacks were the attendants. Being in +need of more skilled labor, he sent south to the more civilized portion +of the country for a native mechanic, and of course paid his way to +Bulawayo. The white mechanics absolutely refused to work with this +native and threatened to strike. The only course left for the contractor +was to pay the native some wages and his fare home. This was no heathen +native, but one who had grown up amid civilized surroundings, and no +doubt his parents also were civilized. + +We do not wish to criticise such mechanics, for here, in a land where +the blacks so far outnumber the white population, there are many things +to be considered. But with these facts staring the missionary in the +face, there is little inducement for him to spend a great deal of time +in training natives. The only course left which will give the native any +chance at all in some sections of the country is for a contractor to +have all native mechanics. He might then be employed by the more +broad-minded Europeans, but be boycotted by others. Notwithstanding +these difficulties, industrial training in its broadest sense is very +important on the mission field, and it is encouraged by the governments. +It enables the natives to improve their condition and way of living and +to earn more money. + +While these changes and the industrial training were in progress, the +intellectual and spiritual part of the work was not neglected. New boys +were continually coming, and some who came during these years were +destined to be of help in after years. First was Nyamzana, who began to +follow the Lord before coming as a boarder. Although not so quick in +books as some, yet he was a faithful and devoted Christian, never giving +his missionaries any uneasiness as to his spiritual standing. There were +also Nkwidini, Mlobeka, and Mahlenkle. The last named was a nephew of +the late king, and he had begun to attend school when the Lehmans were +teaching at the kraal of the chief. He was an exceptional native, most +steady and unassuming, ready and willing for any task assigned him. I +have mentioned these names because they with others already referred to +were among our future evangelists and teachers. Nor do I wish to forget +Kolisa, a son of Buka, whom we visited up in the hills. + +Not all, however, continued to remain at the mission. Some left, never +to return. Others went away to work for a time, that they might obtain +more money and then return again to enter school. The new boys as they +came generally showed a desire to leave their old heathen lives and +become Christians. Others were a cause of great anxiety to us. There +were times of heart-searching and crying out to God, which showed that +His Spirit was still at work in their hearts. One after another would +come and confess their temptations and failures, and ask for prayer and +help that they might be more victorious over evil. Some would receive +definite help and blessing, while others seemed, for some reason, unable +to take hold of the Lord by faith. Often we would feel greatly +encouraged over the progress some were making, and look forward to their +becoming able helpers and soul-winners for Him, only to have our hopes +and expectations suddenly dashed to the ground. This was all a part of +our training as missionaries. The Lord was teaching us by these +experiences to take our eyes off individuals and fix them upon Him. He +was also giving us sufficient encouragement, day by day, through some +who were steadfast, to enable us to realize that our labor was not in +vain for the Lord. There were a number in the inquirers' class, and in +July, 1902, three more were baptized by Brother Steigerwald. Of this +number were Ndhlalambi and Nyamazana. + +The attendance at school was not as satisfactory as could be desired. +The authority of the parents being paramount in the home, if there was +anything to be done, such as digging in the gardens, herding, keeping +the animals from the gardens, or running errands, the children must stay +at home and attend to it. An early morning school was also started for +those who could not attend at midday, and this enabled some of the +herdboys to attend. + +The parents were especially opposed to their daughters attending school, +because they became unwilling to marry the old men to whom they were +betrothed. As we mentioned previously, several girls did come to stay at +the mission. One of them was Ganukisa, a daughter of the king. She was a +very nice, modest girl and proved a great help in many ways. She also +became a Christian and member of the Church. Another girl, Zwadini, ran +off from home twice and came to us, imploring us to save her from the +man her parents were forcing her to marry. We tried to buy her freedom, +but to no avail, and she finally was forced to return home and marry the +choice of her parents. At this time we had no right by law to interfere +in these matters, however much we longed to free some of these dear +girls from their lives of slavery. It required time and prayer and much +looking to God before a certain amount of freedom of choice was granted +the daughters, and then it came through an action of the government. + +In the school some were making good progress. English and some other +branches had been added to the curriculum, but the Bible continued to be +the chief Textbook, and some were acquiring a fair understanding of it. +Natives have generally a keenness of discernment and a clear grasp of +the subject, so that it is necessary for the teacher to be well prepared +for any question that may arise. The one who was first at the mission +was a philosopher and a keen thinker. Nothing seemed to escape him. I +have heard him deliver most excellent sermons and bring far more out of +a Sunday-school lesson than the ordinary teacher. One day in reading the +book of Isaiah, he came to the eighteenth chapter. He knows nothing +about Ethiopia, but after he had finished reading, I inquired what +people the prophet referred to. He thought for a moment and then +exclaimed, "I believe he means us, the black people." + + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN + +Continuation of the Work + +Furlough + + +The missionary, however robust he may be, cannot keep at his work all +the time; for he generally works seven days in a week and fifty-two +weeks in a year. After a few years of such labor it is necessary to call +a halt, if one does not wish to break down altogether. New missionaries +can take much of the burden, yet those who have something of the +language and can speak to the people must be ready in season and out of +season, to talk, interpret, explain, as well as to have heart-to-heart +talks with the people. + +I had now been actively engaged on the mission station for four +strenuous years and was greatly in need of a rest and change. The Board +at home, as well as the missionaries on the field, had been urging me to +go south for a few months. The only difficulty in the way was the need +of some one to take the school, and so we had been looking forward to +the return of Brother and Sister Lehman from Cape Town to take charge of +it. They, however, had been looking on the fields for mission work at +the Compounds on Johannesburg, and had decided to go there. As a last +resort we decided to ask Matshuba to do the teaching. He was capable of +doing it, and he was also becoming able to do some interpreting from +English into the vernacular. + +Before this happened an event occurred which more or less concerned all +South Africa, and especially Rhodesia. I refer to the death, on March +26, 1902, of Cecil Rhodes at his home, Groot Schuur, near Cape Town, the +place where he had so kindly received Brother Engle on our first coming +to Africa. It had been his request to be buried in Rhodesia, the country +that bore his name. In the Matopo Hills was a beautiful spot which he +had discovered and to which he gave the name, "View of the World." This +is about fifteen miles from Matopo Mission, as the crow flies, but over +twenty-five miles by wagon road. Here, on the summit of a large granite +hill, in the heart of Matopo, is the spot he selected to be his last +resting place. + +When the body was brought to Bulawayo, thousands of people, both white +and black, vied with each other in paying a last tribute of respect to +him who had done so much for the development of the country. The natives +realized that they had lost a friend that could not be replaced; and the +white people believed that no one could carry out so successfully many +of the public affairs with which he was associated. When the funeral +procession reached the burial place, the heavy casket was raised to the +top of the granite hill. Into the solid rock a grave had been cut, and +into this the casket was lowered. The grave was then covered by an +immense granite slab, on which was fastened a large brass plate with +this inscription: "Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes." + +A part of his property was left for the improvement of the country to +which he had devoted his time and talents. His two large estates in +Rhodesia, together with an annuity, were bequeathed to this country; and +his fine and well-built estate near Cape Town was given over for the use +of the government of Cape Colony, but the grounds are continually opened +to the public. The Rhodes scholarships for various countries, including +two for each State in the United States, were given with a hope of +cementing nations together. He wished no monument to be erected over his +grave, but near the place is the Shangani Monument to the memory of +those who fell in the Matabele War. The grounds have been beautifully +laid out and a well-built road extends from Bulawayo to the grave. On +his estate at Cape Town is a granite monument seventy feet long, built +near the seat overlooking both the Atlantic and the Indian Oceans, where +he used to sit and lay his world-wide plans. There is a sad feature +connected with his life, like that of many other men whom the world +calls great. While he made so much provision for earthly things, there +seems to be no evidence that he made provision for eternity. + +During this year there also died near us a native who had been more or +less interested in the work, by the name of Fusi. He had been a +prominent soldier under King Lobengula, and also remembered the first +king, Mzilikazi. He loved to talk about the good old days, and could +tell of a visit that Rev. Moffat, the father-in-law of Livingstone, once +made to this country. He said, "I remember Chete [Rev. Moffat] quite +well. I was just a young man at the time and King Mzilikazi treated +Chete nicely. He said to me, 'Go and milk a cow and bring some milk for +the missionary.'" + +This old warrior, however, never showed any desire to become a +Christian; but he was always glad to have his people attend school, and +his youngest son was one of the first communicants. The native finally +became sick with dropsy, and when we visited him during his sickness, he +said an enemy had bewitched him, adding: + +"Before the white man came into the country we put all the witches to +death and we were well. Now we are not allowed to kill them and we must +suffer." + +Later we again visited him. When asked if we should sing for him, he +replied, "Yes, sing one of the old hymns you used to sing when +Missionary Engle was alive." We did so, and he too joined his quavering +voice in the chorus. He also listened most attentively to the Scripture +reading and comments that day, and joined us in prayer. What thoughts +these things stirred in his heart we know not, for that was the last +time we saw him. + +In July of this year the time finally came for our furlough. I took a +ticket from Bulawayo south to Port Elizabeth. This was shortly after the +close of the Boer War, and all along the railway in the south were to be +seen the blockhouses erected to guard the railway from destruction. Here +and there were the demolished farmhouses and the orchards and beautiful +groves that had been leveled to the ground. Worst of all were the many +graves--mute testimony to that saddest of all human employment, human +butchery. Kimberley already was recovering from this terrible siege. +This was still a small town, its chief attraction being the great masses +of blue earth surrounding it. This diamondiferous blue rock is mined far +down in the earth, where it had been formed under great pressure; and +when brought to the surface, the combined action of rain and sun slakes +it somewhat like quicklime. It is then washed, which removes the lighter +earth, leaving the diamonds and other precious stones. + +From this place I went to Port Elizabeth, which is 1,200 miles south of +Bulawayo. It is the principal seaport of Cape Colony, as it furnishes a +shorter and more direct route into the interior than Cape Town does. +This is a town of about 35,000 inhabitants, but there is nothing +especially inviting about the place except its thriving business. It has +been said of it: "Out of sand-hills and scrub, Anglo-Saxon energy has +created a town that, for cleanliness and health, and for the +handsomeness of its business buildings, is second to none in South +Africa." After a stay of a few days at this place I took the steamer +_Norman Castle_ for Durban, where the greater part of my vacation was to +be spent. + +Durban is the seaport and largest town of Natal, and has nearly 70,000 +inhabitants. The business part is low and often quite hot, but the part +known as the Berea is high and cool, and has many fine dwelling houses. +Natal is more thickly populated than other parts of South Africa. It has +a most luxuriant vegetation and varied and picturesque scenery, and well +deserves the appellation, "Garden of South Africa." In this warm, moist, +subtropical climate of the coast many delicious and tropical fruits are +grown. This is the home of the Zulu tribe of Africans, of which the +Matabele are a branch. + +My special purpose in coming to this section of the country to rest was +to make my furlough as profitable as possible, and to gain information +helpful for mission work. Missionaries had been in this section of the +country the greater part of the nineteenth century. The American Board +had started their work some time in the '30s, and this formed an +excellent opportunity of seeing some of the fruits of missionary labors. + +I spent some time at an English Mission under Mr. Eyles at Imbezana, at +a Free Methodist Mission and girls' school, Fairview, and at four +missions of the American Board--a boys' school at Adams, a large girls' +school at Inanda, and one at Umzumbi, and also visited their work at +Durban, in charge of Rev. Bridgeman. At all these places I was most +hospitably entertained and given every opportunity for studying the +work. It was an inspiration to see what God had wrought among these +erstwhile heathen. Here were large boarding-schools, and natives living +like white people in neat brick houses, built by themselves. Here were +missionaries, like Mrs. Edwards and Mrs. Bridgeman, grown old in this +soul-saving work, and yet so attached to the natives and the work that +they could not think of leaving the country. + +Natal, like Cape Colony and the Transvaal, can no longer be called +heathen Africa, as so many of the natives are civilized. The large +cities of white people are built in modern style, with all the latest +improvements, electric lights, street cars, telephones, and the like, +and since then automobiles. There are also many white farmers, as well +as small towns of white people, throughout the country. Missionaries of +many societies are here in this densely-populated and easily-accessible +district of Natal. This is considered one of the greatest fields for the +overlapping of missionaries, perhaps, to be found anywhere, yet all seem +to have plenty to do. + +With all the advantages for improvement which the Africans here possess, +I was surprised to meet, within a mile or two of one of the oldest +mission stations, natives with paint and grease, and when the +evangelists go to the homes of the people they still find some raw +heathen. Some not only do not and will not accept Christ, but they also +prefer their dirty, indolent, ignorant way of living to that introduced +by civilization. + +At Durban I took the train to go north to Johannesburg, a distance of +480 miles. The war had been over for some time, yet it was still +necessary to procure a pass to enter Johannesburg. This I procured +through Brother Lehman, who was then at Johannesburg. People were +flocking thither as fast as they could procure passes and trains to +carry them. The trains were crowded every day, and one was obliged to +book ahead in order to secure a seat. This ride to Johannesburg is a +delightful one, so far as the scenery is concerned, but the winding +railroad is exceedingly rough and uncomfortable. One passes through a +landscape most beautiful and varied, from the green, grassy hills of the +coast, through mountains and valleys, to the high, rolling veldt of the +Rand, where the famous gold reefs of South Africa are to be found. In +this journey one leaves the sea level at Durban and gradually rises to +the height of 6,000 feet at Johannesburg. It is said of this place: "In +1886 the site was nothing but a bleak, bare plain, that could have been +bought for one hundred pounds. Then came the discovery of gold reefs +east and west for sixty miles, and stores, public buildings, and +churches sprang up with marvelous rapidity." This is now the largest, +richest, and most modern city of South Africa, and the Rand is this +sixty miles of gold-reef mines. + +At these mines are many thousands of natives from all parts of South +Africa, and when they are not at work they are confined in large +enclosures known as "Compounds." This furnishes the missionary an +excellent opportunity of doing mission work among this conglomerate mass +of natives. The great variety of languages is one hindrance in the way, +but if the missionary is able to speak one of the chief divisions of the +Bantu family of languages, such as the Zulu, he can generally find some +native to interpret for him into other languages. + +In this mission field we found our beloved colaborers, Brother and +Sister Isaac Lehman, who had just come from Cape Town and were becoming +settled in their new home. A dear little girl, Faith, had come to bless +their home and cheer their hearts. Brother Jacob Lehmans also were +engaged in mission work here, as well as our dear Sister Swanson (nee +Hershey), who had left us at Cape Town to come to this place. As our +Board had no mission station here at that time, these were all laboring +in connection with an undenominational mission in charge of Mr. A. W. +Baker. All were actively engaged in mission work. It is a broad field +and is a great opportunity for giving the Gospel to the heathen. +However, one has the same obstacles to encounter as in the native +village, _i. e._, the indifference of the people. While we would be +having a service in one part of the Compound, other natives would be +dancing within sight in another part, and often be making such a noise +as to disturb the meeting. One difficulty with the work is that the +natives often remain at the mines only six months or a year, not +sufficiently long to get them established. Much good is, however, being +done; schools are established to teach the natives when they are not at +work, and services are held regularly at various places. Natives, +accepting the Light, carry it to other parts of Africa, and sometimes +become teachers of their people. + +After spending a most enjoyable month at this place I again returned to +Matopo Mission, after an absence of three and one-half months. It was a +pleasure to get back to the old battle ground, for it was still the most +beautiful spot on earth and its people the dearest. Great changes had +taken place during our absence. Then the foundation of the house had +been laid and the brick burnt, but now an imposing structure met the eye +and the house was rapidly being completed. It looked as if the +missionaries had come to stay and were to have a comfortable place to +live in. + +The school was progressing favorably under Matshuba's management, and +all parts of the work seemed encouraging. As there was continually some +difficulty about the stability of some of the industrial pupils, it was +decided to divide the school year into two terms of five months each, +with a month's vacation intervening in which the pupils could return +home if they so desired. This worked well and seemed more satisfactory +to all. The one who had been teaching was retained as pupil teacher and +was also permitted to take advanced work. + +[Illustration: "Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes."] + +There was again opportunity for me to visit in their homes. So, +accompanied by some of the boys or girls, we made long excursions on +foot among the people, sometimes walking from eight to twelve miles and +meeting many people. Because so many missionaries had left them and did +not return, they were not a little pleased to see me back, and, +native-like, were inclined to make flattering speeches. One day we +visited nine kraals, and everywhere had attentive listeners, and the +people seemed to be hungry for the Word. At another time we went to +Sibula's village for the first time, where we met and gave the Gospel to +over one hundred people. They had never been visited before and seemed +anxious for a school. Later they built a schoolhouse, and Nyamzana was +given to them as a teacher. + +One day when we were out to the kraals we happened to come to a beer +drink, where they were having a digging-bee. + +They said, "Why does not Missionary Steigerwald invite the people to +come and dig his large gardens? He is so busy with building." + +"Will you come if he invites you?" we asked. + +"Certainly we will," they replied. + +When we reached home we told Brother Steigerwald what they said, and he +at once thought it a splendid opportunity for getting his corn planted. +So he appointed a day and sent out invitations to the people. One +hundred and sixty-four adults with their hoes came and digged and +planted an eight or ten-acre lot. It was an interesting sight to see +that many people digging in one place. They would usually sing a native +song, and with their hoes keep time to the music. They performed this +piece of work without pay, and of course received no beer, but a +generous supply of bread and tea was furnished them, which they greatly +enjoyed. These Matabele are always very ready to come out to work when +invited, and in this respect they were a contrast to some natives. When +hired to do work, however, it was necessary to make them keep their +promise and come at the time appointed, and also finish their work. + +Sister Steigerwald was much amused at Sibongamanzi shortly after she +came to the mission. My hut needed replastering, and Sibongamanzi was +engaged to do the work. The appointed day arrived, but the girl did not +come according to her promise, and as the work was urgent I employed +another girl to do it. The next day Sibongamanzi came to do the work and +was quite disappointed to find some one else had accomplished it. + +I said, "Why did you not come yesterday according to your promise?" + +"I am sure a person has a right to change her mind," she replied. + +"Yes, I think so, too, so I employed some one else." + +In school one is obliged to use the English word for such articles as +slate, pencil, and paper, since there is no word in the language for +these things. When Steigerwalds came, there were also a number of boxes +of goods sent out; and in unpacking these a pencil fell out. Sister +Steigerwald picked it up, and handing it to Masikwa, said, "Here is a +pencil." He was most delighted, and came and said, "The Inkosikazi +[Mrs.] can speak our language already. She said 'Pencil.'" Sister +Steigerwald, together with the other sisters, had their own experiences +in teaching natives in the kitchen and housework, as well as in sewing. +She proved most capable and patient in training various ones to be +cleanly and to do their work properly. + +The services at the mission were well attended at this time, and +sometimes we were obliged to have an overflow meeting. Natives would +come fifteen miles to be present at the Sunday services. "Our little +church is too small," said some. "We need a new one." + +Our congregations were gradually emerging from barbarism, and their +appearance on Sunday was often quite striking. Some of the boys and +young men would come, clean and neatly dressed in European clothes, +including hat and shoes, and exhibit good taste in the selection of +their clothing. Some again came well dressed but without shoes; others +would appear partly dressed, but anxious to display all the clothing +they had. Perhaps on a sweltering, hot day some would don a heavy winter +overcoat reaching below the knees, or a heavy suit of bright red +flannel. Another would have on a coat turned wrong side out to show all +the colors, and a vest outside of this, while a number continued to wear +the purely native garb of skins. A few of the girls were neatly clothed +in dresses; others in short skirts with or without a cloth thrown over +their shoulders. Some of the women's clothing was very modest and +picturesque. + +Natives, especially at this stage of their advancement, do not as a rule +dress according to the weather, for to them clothing is more or less a +matter of ornamentation and they don it accordingly. One must be very +careful about placing special emphasis upon clothing, as the native is +naturally vain, and when he is able to be better clothed his vanity +often increases. He soon thinks that if he is clothed he is a Christian, +or if he goes to school and learns he is a Christian. He is quite ready +to put on these outward semblances of civilization without yielding +himself to God. If the missionary is willing to accept the outward form +of Christianity, whether of clothing or ceremonials, he may soon have a +large membership. He must continually guard against these things, and +seek to know the inner life of those about him, and their daily walk; +nor is it always easy to ascertain what is beneath the surface. +Hypocrisy is not at all unusual. + +Early in our work there was a native who came occasionally to our +services. He had worked in Bulawayo and attended one of the native +churches sufficiently long to gain a smattering and lingo of +Christianity. He came clothed in black broadcloth and carrying a book +under his arm, and withal seemed a person of some consequence. He was a +brother of one of our boys, and we were informed that he could read. One +day in church, at the close of the services, he asked permission to say +something, and not knowing what was coming we gave him permission. He +arose and began to read out of his book and then talked. Again he read +and talked in a preaching way until he was finally requested to sit +down. As we were suspicious from his manner in regard to his ability to +read, we took occasion to test him and found that he knew absolutely +nothing about reading. What he gave had been memorized, and we learned +that his life too was decidedly corrupt. This taught us how necessary it +was to be careful of the stranger who came and claimed to be a +Christian. + +December 26, 1902, there was a most welcome addition to the mission +family in the person of a little son to Brother and Sister Doner. This +was the first white child at the mission, and it was quite a curiosity +to the natives. Of course every one must have a look at it, and happy +was the one who might touch or hold this wonderful white baby. + + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE + +Looking on the Fields + +Say not ye, There are yet four months, and then cometh harvest? behold, +I say unto you, Lift up your eyes, and look on the fields; for they are +white already to harvest.--St. John 4: 35. + + +We moved into the new house early in 1903. This left the huts empty, for +our increasing family of boys. As soon as the rains were over for this +year, Brother and Sister Steigerwald and myself felt led to make a tour +of exploration in the interests of the work. Matopo Hills or Mountains +extend northeast and southwest for a distance of about sixty miles. +Between the hills and Bulawayo there is a mission station and work had +been carried on for some years, although there were at this time many +raw natives to be seen. Through the hills and south for a long distance +there were as yet no missionaries except our own, and as our mission was +on the north side of the hills, we desired to go through them and +explore some of the south side. + +In June we arranged to make the trip, taking our large wagon on which +was a canvas top, which was drawn by donkeys, consequently progress was +slow. Three of our boys accompanied us. We were obliged to go west about +nine miles before a road could be found leading through the hills. This +wagon road was exceedingly rough and stony and very little traveled, and +the donkeys slowly wended their way in and out among the hills which +continually surrounded us and seemed to close us in. Frequently as the +immense piles of rock seemed to stretch across our path in front and bar +further progress, we would be led to exclaim, "Truly, there is no way +out of this," but on we went and the way continued to open. + +The tediousness of the journey was relieved by the exceeding beauty of +the scenery as it gradually unfolded before our eyes. In the first of +the trip are to be seen the immense bald hills of solid granite, similar +to some in the vicinity of the mission. Soon the scene changes and the +eye is greeted on every side by lofty ridges, consisting of immense +boulders piled up in all sorts of fantastic shapes, by the Great +Architect, and from out of every possible crevice grow trees and +shrubbery of all sorts. The dark green of the foliage, interspersed with +the varying shades of grey, yellow, red, and green of the rock, forms a +picture of surpassing loveliness. Baboons, large and small, would make +their appearance on the jutting rocks, as we passed along, and bark at +these intruders into their peaceful domain. + +As the hills abounded in game, and Elder Steigerwald was a good shot, we +did not want for meat on the journey. So, while the donkeys were +grazing, fires would be built and pot roasts and many sorts of +delectable dishes would be prepared and eaten with relish. Natives are +generally happy if they have plenty of meat to eat; so on this journey +Tebengo declared that they would be longing for the fleshpots of Egypt +when they returned to the mission. Next to meat, their favorite dish was +Graham flour made into a loaf by means of water and a little salt, then +baked in the hot ashes. + +South of the hills we left the beaten track, which proceeds east to +Gwanda, and started south to the open country, which is known as Mapani +Land, named from the large amount of excellent hardwood Mapani trees +which grow here. Very few natives were seen on the journey through the +hills, but in this rich, open plain of the south there were numerous +kraals. The natives received us gladly and readily consented to have +services; and as there were no missionaries in this part of the country, +many of the people had the privilege of hearing for the first time the +Story of the Cross. On this trip we came to the home of Holi, a rich and +prominent native. His wife is a daughter of King Lobengula and a sister +of Ganukisa, who lived at the mission. Here we were very kindly received +and Holi presented Elder Steigerwald with a fine fat sheep. + +From this point we turned west and north through the hills by a +different route. Along the way we visited some places of interest, +especially the "View of the World," where Mr. Rhodes was buried. Thence +we proceeded east and south to the mission. We had been absent about two +weeks, had traveled over one hundred miles, and had had a most pleasant +and profitable trip. It had also been a change from the labor and +routine of the station. + +Brother and Sister Doner had for some time been contemplating opening +another station, and they concluded during this dry season also to make +a tour and explore the country, as well as do evangelistic work. They +made preparations to spend a month in this way, taking the wagon and +several boys. Little Oliver, who was then only seven months old, also +went along, thus early in his life learning what trekking in Africa +meant. + +They went south over the same route we had taken, and it was on this +trip, if I mistake not, that the present site of Mapani Mission was +selected. They spent a very delightful month and came home quite +enthusiastic over the prospects of opening a new work and eager to +launch out at once. Permission did not come from the Board, however, in +time to open that dry season, and the work had to be postponed another +year. + +During this year word came that one member of the Executive Board had +passed "over the river." Dear father died the latter part of March. It +was a double loss to some of us; for we should now miss not only his +fatherly letters, but the wise counsel that he gave in his capacity as a +member of the Mission Board. He always seemed to have such a keen +insight into the work, and wrote about it as if he had been on the field +and knew exactly our surroundings. + +[Illustration: Matopo Mission Church. Built by Elder Steigerwald in +1905.] + +The work at the mission continued to go along as usual, and two more +united with the Church, and everyone found plenty of profitable +employment. One feature of the work, not yet mentioned, but which always +requires much of the missionaries' time, is medical work and the care +of the sick. The natives accept the miracles of healing, mentioned in +the Scriptures, without question, and the sick frequently asked the +prayers of the missionaries. There were several instances of remarkable +cases of healing without the application of medicine, when the native +could be led to take hold of the Lord by faith. On one occasion a native +came for Elder Engle, from a kraal about five miles distant, where a +woman was very sick and had eaten nothing for several days. She was very +low indeed and seemingly unconscious of what was going on about her and +her friends were weeping. Brother Engle felt led to anoint her and pray +for her. The next day they came to say that the woman was much better +and was eating, and they declared that the missionary had raised her +from the dead. + +At another time one of our Christian girls was sick with such a disease +that we knew we could not help her, and she desired prayer. We granted +her request and she was healed immediately, even to our surprise. Some +time after Brother Doner had come, an elderly native was quite ill with +lung trouble, and his people had been trying in every way to heal him. +They appealed to us, so we made the case a special subject of prayer and +he was healed immediately, and told everyone that Jesus had healed him. +A mother also wished us to pray for her child, who was very ill and +seemed ready to die at any minute; it too was healed at once. Other +instances of help might be cited; but we give these, because we see that +He is the same Christ yet today and often shows His power, saying unto +the sick, "According to your faith be it unto you." + +[Illustration: Back View of Matopo Mission House, Showing Granite Hill +Beyond.] + +Why He does not always choose to manifest His power in this way I know +not. I am giving things as I found them. At first we were more or less +loth to use medicine, and some of the early losses may have been owing +to this fact. We believe also that He receives honor in helping the +missionary make use of remedies to relieve the suffering of the sick. +With the natives sickness is always the result of witchcraft or the +influence of their ancestral spirits. If one can by means of remedies, +under the blessing of God, show them that this is not true, he is doing +much to overthrow some of their superstitious beliefs. So the sick are +visited in their homes and ministered to, and many come to the mission +for treatment. Sometimes the disease may be such as will not yield to +treatment, but the gentle sympathy and the delicacy for the appetite +are always much appreciated, even from some sources least expected. The +missionary necessarily becomes physician and nurse to his people, and it +brings him into contact with them and relieves their sufferings and thus +paves the way for ministering to their spiritual needs. He who neglects +this part of the work makes a grave mistake. Many missionaries, who had +done little medical work at home, have by a willingness and desire to +learn, become quite proficient in healing on the mission field. + +Elder Steigerwald has been much used in this line of work. Many and +various cases have been treated by him most successfully. In addition to +the sick who come for medicine, there are generally some who remain for +a time at the mission to be treated. + +During this dry season, as usual, kraal visiting occupied much of my +time outside of school hours, and many long and enjoyable trips were +made to all the villages surrounding us. During these journeys the Lord +was also reminding His messenger of some things that had been almost +forgotten. He was showing the large fields yet beyond where the people +were in pagan darkness and the Light of Life had not yet penetrated, and +where missionaries and teachers were greatly needed. + +[Illustration: In the Matopo Hills.] + +The reader of these pages will remember that our call had been to the +far interior of Africa, where Christ had not been named. When Matopo +Mission was started it was felt that here was my place to begin work, +but that the time would come when the Lord wanted me to press on farther +in the interior. This thought kept following me, and in the second +year of our work at Matopo, on my speaking to a friend of the call to +press on farther, the question was asked, "You do not intend to go +alone, do you?" My reply was, "No, I do not think that will be +necessary. Perhaps the Lord will raise up others who desire to go beyond +the Zambezi." Also, while Brother and Sister Van Blunk were at Matopo, +the question of going north was often mentioned, for their eyes were +likewise looking in that direction. + +As time went on, however, and the work at Matopo increased, I entered +more and more deeply into it and became absorbed in my surroundings. The +children and also the older people occupied a large place in my heart +and crowded out for the time being all thought of anything else. The +Lord had to take His own way of cutting me loose and again lifting up my +eyes to the fields beyond, and I could not doubt but that His time was +near at hand. On the other hand, what a struggle it was to be willing to +leave these! He, however, showed me most strikingly one day that when I +was willing to lose these children there were others waiting to be +found; and when the work was given into His hands, He accomplished that +which to me was impossible. + +First, the pushing out of the work must be presented to the Board and +the home Church and their consent and aid solicited. Permission was +given to return to America, and as Conference drew near, it seemed as if +the Lord's time had come for me to do this. Together with my colaborers, +we made it a special subject of prayer, and felt that I was to start at +once. So, on March 25, 1904, I left the mission for America. Sister +Emma Doner, as she bade me good-bye, said weeping, "If I did not know of +a truth that it was the Lord's will for you to go at this time I could +not say good-bye." That was the last time I was permitted to look into +her dear face. Brother and Sister Steigerwald, together with several of +the boys, accompanied me to Bulawayo, where I took the train for Cape +Town. + +I shall not dwell on the events of that journey to America, for many +things connected with it are too sacred to find way into public print. +It is sufficient to say that it was a time of severe sifting and +testing, but of such sweet fellowship with the Father, that I would not +blot it out of my life, if I could. I learned, in truth, what that +meant, "With God all things are possible." After it was over one of +God's children greatly desired to hear of the trip home, and when told, +he was quiet for a time; then he said, "I believe it was God's +preparation for going farther into the interior. I believe the way will +open." + +America was reached just in time for Conference in Ontario. We were +sorry to learn that Elder S. Zook, the Treasurer of the Foreign Mission +Board, had in the meantime passed away in February. We greatly missed +him who had always been such an able pillar in the Church and missionary +work, for his farsightedness and wise counsel had smoothed the way in +many a difficulty. The old fathers were thus passing away and the work +was devolving upon younger shoulders, but they were equal to the task. +The Executive Board now consisted of Brethren J. R. Zook, Chairman; Eli +M. Engle, Secretary; and Peter Climenhage, Treasurer, two of whom had +been connected with the foreign missionary work from its inception. + +A report of the work from the field met with an enthusiastic reception, +and it was requested that the churches all be visited and an account of +the mission work be given. Permission was also granted for an appeal to +be made for pressing the work on into the interior, both for workers and +funds. + +In the meantime Miss Sallie Kreider had gone to Africa to engage in +mission work, and Elder and Mrs. John Meyers and Miss Lydia Heise had +also gone there on a visit. Brother and Sister Doner, with some of the +mission boys, had gone to Mapani to open a mission station in August, +1904. At first Brother Doner was troubled with fever, and much of the +hut building fell to Ndhlalambi; then Sister Doner became quite ill, and +Sister Kreider hastened down to assist in caring for her, but she passed +away. Thus three precious lives had been sacrificed for the people and +the work. Brother Doner was desirous of taking the body and laying it by +the side of the others at Matopo. This was unusual in a hot climate like +this, where interment is usually attended to at once, and the natives +too object to carrying a dead body, so there was much parleying before +they would consent to take hold of the bier and carry it. The way over +the hills was much shorter, but it was also much more difficult. It was +an exceedingly trying journey for all of them, and only the grace of God +could have sustained them through it; but Brother Doner had the comfort +and satisfaction of seeing his loved one resting in the little cemetery +beside Sister Cress and Brother Engle. + +Sister Doner's stay of over three years in Africa was almost a continual +struggle, one might say, against disease, and heroically she bore up +under it. Her constitution was naturally not very rugged, and this +malarial climate aggravated her disease, as it is sure to do with any +one who is not strong. She was afraid to write home and inform her +friends of the condition of her health, lest they should insist upon her +return to America, and that she did not desire. She loved the work among +the heathen, and we believe she had her desire in laying down her life +in their behalf, rather than return to America where she might have +lived for a longer time. Little Oliver continued to thrive, but as +Brother Doner's health was great impaired, it was deemed advisable that +he return to America on furlough and, after placing Oliver with friends, +regain his own health. So in the spring of 1905 he left for America, and +Ndhlalambi was left to care for the work just started at Mapani. + +In America the work was progressing; a number had volunteered for the +foreign field, and four were ready to go to Africa at once; these being +Mr. and Mrs. Harvey Frey and Misses Adda Engle and Abbie Bert. Over +$2,000 had been donated toward pushing the work on into the interior. +This was offered to the Mission Board, but they concluded that it was +best to leave it in our hands toward the opening of the work. Of the +four new missionaries who were going to Africa, none were pledged to +the interior work except Sister Engle, but we still hoped others would +be ready to go. + +We reached Matopo Mission August 1, 1905, and rejoiced that the Lord +permitted us again to return. Some very noticeable changes had taken +place during our absence: Brother Steigerwald had been busy making +improvements, and a fine, large brick church, with an iron roof, had +been erected. This was much needed and it added greatly to the +appearance of the mission premises. The women, about eighty in number, +gladly offered their services free to put in a fine polished earthen +floor. A number of the class members had been baptized, and Matshuba was +doing well in the schoolroom, where Sister Kreider was also doing some +teaching. + +[Illustration: Mapani Mission, 1907.] + +Ndhlalambi had been holding on faithfully at Mapani Mission. A number +there had accepted Christ and he had formed them into a class for +instruction. It was thought advisable for Sister Engle and myself to +spend the remainder of the dry season at Mapani and help in the work +there, so we turned our faces in that direction. We were there two +months and helped in the various lines of work and visited some of the +people in the surrounding neighborhood. Some of the converts were very +encouraging at that place. At the time in which the rains usually open +we returned to Matopo. On the way down we had gone by wagon road, but on +our return four donkeys had been sent down, two for pack saddles and the +other two for Sister Engle and me to ride, and two boys came along to +assist in the homeward journey. + +[Illustration: Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church. Matopo M. Hospital.] + +We left Mapani Mission at sunrise and took the shorter journey across +the hills, the same path along which they had carried the body of Sister +Doner the year previous. It was a most difficult trip for us and we had +to marvel how they could have possibly made the journey. We were obliged +to stop on the way and let the donkeys graze and eat, and did not reach +the hills proper until afternoon. As the climbing was difficult and +there were many trees and shrubs growing out from between the rocks, it +was difficult for us to keep our seats, so we dismounted and walked. The +pack saddles would frequently be nearly brushed off the other donkeys. +Once one of the donkeys in attempting to go up a steep rock fell back +and became fast in the rocks. The boys removed the load and carried it +up; they then extricated the donkey and after much persuasion got it on +the rock and again placed on the load. By the time we reached the +summit, darkness had overtaken us and we were obliged to make the +descent in the dark. We knew not where we were going, and were +frequently in danger of broken limbs or becoming fast in the rocks. We +were very thankful when at last at eleven o'clock we reached the mission +without any serious accident. This was one of Sister Engle's first +experiences in Africa, but from her composure through it all one would +judge that she expected such things. + +[Illustration: Christian Wedding Reception Near Matopo.] + +Ndhlalambi remained on at the work in Mapani most of the time for one +and one-half years, and when Brother Doner at last returned there were +some nearly ready for baptism. Not long afterwards thirteen were +baptized there and proved faithful Christians. + +Brother and Sister Steigerwald had now had four very strenuous years of +work at Matopo and were in need of a change. So, while the new workers +were at Matopo, the way was opened for them to go to Cape Town over the +rainy season. Here they had a good rest and returned in April, 1906, +quite refreshed, ready to take up their duties at their station. Brother +Doner also returned from America at the same time and was ready to +resume work at Mapani. + +There had been some pupils attending school at Matopo Mission, from +Mtshabezi Valley, south of the hills, but about fifteen miles east of +Brother Doner's station. These had strongly urged that a mission be +planted in their midst. Brother Steigerwald promised them to consider +the matter, and at the opening of the dry season Brother Frey went to +see that part of the country. He was much pleased with the outlook and +felt led to open work there. This is the origin of Mtshabezi Mission +which was started in July, 1906. The phenomenal success attending that +work since helps to confirm the belief that it was a work of the Lord's +own planting. + + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN + +The Religion of the Matabele and Subject Tribes + + +In order to understand a people properly one must know something of +their religious beliefs; for all the important actions of their lives +rest upon their religion. Find out what a person believes and you have a +pretty good idea of his character. A native is loth to talk about his +religion, and will, unless he fully understands and trusts the +questioner, often evade answering directly questions asked upon this +subject. It is somewhat difficult to dissociate the religious beliefs of +the Matabele from those of the first inhabitants of the country, as the +two are so closely interwoven. + +It would seem that all the natives, with whom we have come into contact, +have some conception of a God, however vague that conception may be. +They do not as a rule discuss Him and His attributes among themselves, +and so differ greatly in the attributes ascribed to Him. They often +prefer to deal with and worship the lesser spirits, especially the +shades of their ancestors with whom they are somewhat familiar, than a +great God Whom they do not know and Whom they fear, for the shades they +think can intercede for them. The native is really very religious, but +prefers to take that religion found ready to hand rather than to make an +attempt to fathom that which he does not understand. + +The Matabele when asked who their god is will readily respond that it is +the King Umzilikazi. They say, "He gave us the country and everything we +have, and our customs and laws, and him we worship." This can be easily +understood from the belief of the Zulu tribe, of which this is a branch. +The Zulu will say that Umkulukulu (the oldest or first one) is the one +to be worshiped, as he gave all the rest their religion and customs. As +their ideas of worship were very elastic, there was no difficulty in +including other departed spirits in the list of those worshiped. All who +left them could intercede for them in the spirit world; hence, when the +old queen was buried, the woman who washed her face just before burial +said, "Go in peace and speak a good word for us to the king, and to +those who have gone before, so that we too may find a place and not be +found fault with." + +This very fact, that their religious beliefs are so elastic, makes +missionary work often the more difficult and discouraging among them. +They will quite readily accept the God one preaches, and Christ as the +Savior of men, but to their way of thinking this does not interfere with +their worship. This fact was forcibly thrust upon me one day in coming +to a kraal near the mission that had been frequently visited. The people +here had much light and often came to the services, and their son +Masikwa was a baptized member. On this occasion we found the older +people worshiping the spirits, and said to the woman, + +"How is this? We thought that you worshiped the Lord Jesus." + +"Oh! yes, we do," she replied, "He is the Big Spirit and we worship Him +too." + +It was not at all difficult for her to include Him among the number of +spirits to be worshiped. She was willing to accept all who might be able +to help them, and even give Him a large place alongside of the others. +The fact that He had been on earth and died only added to the conception +that He was like the rest. The force of the resurrection idea she had +not grasped. It will be readily seen how difficult it is to inculcate +the idea of one Supreme Being Who alone should be worshiped, and Who is +a jealous God and will brook no rivals. + +On the other hand, the belief in an intercessor has its useful side in +giving them the Gospel, for we endeavor to impress upon their minds that +Christ is the Great Intercessor, Who "ever liveth to make intercession +for them," a risen Savior, not a dead One. The great question here is, +"Intercede for what?" Sins they do not claim to have. To them religion +has nothing to do with morals, for neither if they live pure moral lives +are they the better, nor if they are base and licentious are they worse +when they come to die. The spirits whom they worship are of their own +conception and have the same loves and hates. As Mr. J. W. Jack says: +"Down all the ages to the present time so frightful have been the +abysses of depravity, the intolerable cruelty, the extravagances of +nameless lust associated with religion, that if the veil were lifted, +Christianity could not bear the story." The raw native will tell you +that lying, stealing, murder, and adultery are bad, but they do not +look upon these as having anything to do with their religion. + +Again, the very fact that they are so tolerant in their religious views, +and so ready to include all, led the Matabele early in their history to +adopt the religion of the conquered tribes. The oldest and, to them, the +most powerful and most widely-worshiped of these heathen deities was +Umlimo. This was the name of one worshiped by the Makalanga. He was +supposed to have his abode in the Matopo Hills, several of which places +are still pointed out. If one may judge from the information received +from the natives, the worship greatly resembled that of the ancient +Greek oracles. When any important question of the tribe was in need of +solution, or even when individual questions arose, they would go to the +hill or cave in which the Umlimo was supposed to have his dwelling +place, carry a present, perhaps of beer, meat, or other food, and, +placing it on the rock, remove to a respectful distance and then make +known their wants. They said the answer would come from the very depths +of the earth. + +It is said: "The answer was given by means of ventriloquism and, as the +speaker was inside the cave and invisible, the voice appeared to the +inquirer to issue from the very bowels of the earth. The extreme +ingenuity of the device will be better appreciated when it is known that +the spirits of the departed are universally believed by the natives to +dwell in an under world. For a ventriloquist to practice his calling as +a diviner in the foregoing manner is probably not unworthy of that +oracle which Socrates himself felt it necessary to consult at Delphi." + +In this way they would inquire as to the cause of drought, rinderpest +among the cattle, locusts, and the like, and they were told that these +came through the white man. In speaking of their worship some would +acknowledge that a priest dwelt in the cave and received their +offerings, and that he would consult Umlimo and give forth the answer in +sepulchral tones to the worshipers. This god was also worshiped at the +opening of every year by a great dance, so that he would send an +abundance of rain. One special place of worship was in a large cave in +the midst of the Makalanga country. As this was said to be only about +five or six miles from Mapani Mission, I had a desire to visit the spot +and see what it was like. Setyokupi, one of the first Christian girls at +Mapani, offered to accompany Ndhlamlabi and myself to the cave, as she +lived near the place but had never visited it. We started early one +morning to the home of Setyokupi, which was several miles from the +mission, and from there continued our journey to the cave. It was much +farther than we had anticipated, and we walked quite a distance before +reaching the immense kopje, or hill of stone, in which the cave was. +Then our way wound round and round among the rocks for a long distance. +Setyokupi saw that the task was greater than she had anticipated, and +fearful of losing ourselves, we asked a young lad, whom we met in the +neighborhood, to guide us. After reaching the cave we were obliged to +climb forty or fifty feet up the side of the rock before we could +enter. + +It was a large cave, extending back into the rocks, and would have +formed several good-sized rooms. We had understood that the worshipers +generally took a present and left it in the cave. This was frequently a +branch or twig of a tree; consequently there were to be seen in it many +dried leaves and branches of trees, the thought in their mind in this +connection being no doubt similar to that of the olive branch of peace. +There were also a few old ornaments and cloth, but nothing of value. +Here it was said the people came to have their yearly dance and pray for +rain. Everything on the inside was quite old, and it looked as if the +place had not been visited lately, but we were informed that there was +another and more important place of worship in the vicinity in which +there was a pool of water. This we did not see, nor did we learn of its +location. The day was fast passing and we were obliged to hasten back to +the mission. + +At this time, 1905, Europeans had already been fifteen years in some +parts of the country and the natives about Matopo Mission were always +quite willing for anyone to be present at their religious festivals. +Many were beginning to throw off some of their old superstitious ideas, +and some were accepting Christ; so there was no thought of impropriety +in our making this tour of investigation. The account of it no doubt +came out through the little boy who accompanied us, and although these +natives in Mapaniland were more raw than those about Matopo Mission, +perhaps nothing further would have been thought of the visit, had the +rains come on that year at the usual time. Unfortunately they were +exceptionally late, not really coming until the first of January, and +the people were becoming desperate. It is always necessary for the +heathen to let the blame rest somewhere, and as the witch doctors and +diviners generally hate the missionaries because of their loss of custom +and prestige, so they naturally put the blame upon our visit to the +cave. I never learned that they placed the blame upon myself, but they +did upon those who accompanied me. Ndhlalambi's life was really in +danger that year and his people were much concerned for his safety. He, +however, did not seem concerned about himself and continued to go back +and forth and see about the work at Mapani. Several years later +Setyokupi, who is a most devoted Christian, had to bear the blame from +the older people for a similar drought, the years of plenty intervening +being overlooked. We as missionaries, however, always try to be careful +not to stir up unecessarily the opposition of the natives. + +According to some of the older natives Umlimo is worshiped under various +names; in fact, there is a trinity. In the hills to the south is the +father, Shologulu. He is stern and unbending and is to be greatly +feared. In the east is the son, Lunzi, who is kind and easy to be +entreated. The mother, Banyanchaba, is in the north. Just how much +tradition, handed down from Christianity, is embodied in this idea +cannot be ascertained, but the belief is quite ancient. + +Again, some of the natives say that certain of the people at times +claimed to be Umlimo and to have the power ascribed to him. One of these +was a woman whom the king, in order to test her power, put in a hut +near him. He convinced himself of her false pretenses and punished her +accordingly. + +In a general way natives do not concern themselves about a Supreme God. +Some, of course, will readily say that He made everything. Again we have +inquired of others, + +"Who made the trees, the rocks, the grass?" + +They will answer, "We came here and found them already created, so we +did not concern ourselves to inquire who made them." + +This indifference or spiritual laziness had much to do with their +religion. On another occasion we were speaking with a native living near +Mapani Mission, and were telling him that he ought to repent and accept +Christ as his Savior. To excuse himself he said: + +"He made me. He brought me into the world and it is His business to boss +me up." + +He really meant to say, "I am here by no choice of my own. He made me. I +am His and He has a right to do as He pleases with me." + +This idea of fate runs through all their beliefs. They have no volition +of their own. Everything that comes to them, whether of accident, +sickness, ill luck, or whatever it may be, is the result of malevolent +spirits which are in league against them. In fact, all their worship is +one of the propitiation of the malevolent spirits. Good spirits will not +harm them. + +One day in the Sabbath-school class, where questions were freely asked, +one of the older men said, "Since I hear you tell who God is and what +He likes, and who Satan is and what he does, I see that our god, whom +we have been worshiping, is Satan himself." + +The _amadhlozi_ (spirits of the departed) are constantly besetting their +path, causing sickness or misfortune, or else helping them to do what +they desire. Their expression, for ill luck is _Angi ladhlozi_ (I do not +have any spirit). When sick they send for the witch doctor to tell where +the trouble is. He may say that one of the spirits thinks he had not +been properly treated and wishes a goat. The goat is brought and killed, +and a small portion of meat is used with medicine for the sick, but by +far the greater part of the meat is generally appropriated by the witch +doctor himself, who was no doubt more desirous of it than the shades. + +If health is not forthcoming for the sick, he is certainly bewitched. +This is generally the belief when one dies or is suffering from an +incurable disease. The witch doctor then takes his "bones" and "smells +out" the supposed witch, and he is very careful to select as his victim +one who is not very popular in the community by reason of his wealth or +other circumstances. This one is accused of bewitching, and is +ignominiously put to death, and all his property confiscated. + +Since the occupation of the country by the English much of this killing +of supposed witches is done away with, but there are still violent +deaths, which looks suspicious. Since our stay at Matopo there was an +instance of an old woman being drowned, which was traced directly to the +witch doctor and he was punished. There were also several instances of +supposed suicide by hanging, which looked as if there might have been +foul play, but which could not be ferreted. It is not unusual for the +old or infirm to be gotten rid of in this way, especially by the ordeal +of drinking poison. + +It would be unjust to say that their doctors never use remedies; in +fact, they have many herbs which they use and some of these are very +efficacious. In fever we have seen them administer a greenish-looking +powder of a native herb, which tasted much like quinine, and we were +surprised once to see a native physician pass through the mission +premises with a wallet full of various kinds of herbs. He had a pass +from the magistrate to practice among the natives, and he proudly opened +his wallet and displayed his drugs. Notwithstanding that they have these +remedies, yet, in practice, this is often so mixed with charms and other +superstitious ideas, that it is difficult to tell wherein the real +remedy lies. A witch doctor, who lived near us and who had much light, +exclaimed one day, "I can give medicine, and if the Lord says the sick +will recover, he will recover; if He says the sick one will die, he will +die; my medicine cannot save him." + +When one treats a native in his home for any disease, it is always +difficult to induce his people to follow the prescribed treatment; for +they desire often to use their arts as well. A case of scurvy was at one +of the villages, and they came to the mission for help. We went over. +The boy had been losing blood for several days and was very weak, +seemingly in the last stages of the disease. They had been using their +arts, but to no avail, and had come to the mission as a last resort. +Elder Steigerwald reproved them for waiting so long, and took hold of +the case, hoping still to save him. After looking to the Lord for +guidance, he managed to get the bleeding stopped, but to see that +everything was properly carried out one of us remained for a time at the +kraal. When he was thought to be out of danger he was left with his +people, with strict injunctions to do just as they were told. When the +patient was next visited it was found that the people had again brought +out their charms and put them about his head, and it was necessary to +frighten them thoroughly before they would follow instructions. + +Parents are always very anxious to have their children at home if they +become sick. This may partly be owing to natural solicitation on the +part of the parents, for they love their children as well as white +parents do, but it is also due to the fact that they cannot use their +divinations properly except at home. Then, too, if they die, they are +always anxious that their people die at home. In this way we often had +great difficulty in keeping at the mission some who were sick and needed +care. + +One of our boys was very sick and we had been unable to help him, and +both he and ourselves were looking to the Lord in his behalf. He was a +good Christian and perfectly conscious all the time, and quite ready and +willing to die if such was the Lord's will. His parents lived near and +had been trying to take him home, but he did not wish to go; and we too +thought it best for him to remain under our care. When he became very +low, it was necessary to inform his parents. The father, who was a very +violent and wrathy man, was determined to take the boy home, but we +felt sure that a move at that time would be fatal, and told the father +so. + +He replied, "I'll take him home if he dies on the way. I'll not have it +said that my child died and was buried away from home." And it was with +great difficulty that he could be prevailed upon to let the boy remain. +The Lord heard our prayer in his behalf and he recovered. + +From what has been written it may readily be seen that the African +believes in the immortality of the soul; that the souls of the departed +take cognizance of what is done on the earth by the survivors; and that +they have power over those who dwell on the earth to help, harm, or +intercede in their behalf. They also believe in transmigration of souls, +that the spirit of the departed often enters a snake, bird, lion, +rhinoceros, or other animals, each of these tribes having its own +especial animal. This does not necessarily imply that the soul remains +in these forms. Frequently they speak of the animals as only a medium +through which the spirit appears to its friends. + +The Matabele revere the snake and will not kill it. The first year of +the mission a long snake entered one of the huts, that was in process of +erection, and climbed up near the roof. I told one of the boys to knock +it down and kill it. He recoiled from the idea and refused. Thinking he +was afraid I took a hoe, knocked it down and killed it. When other +natives came to the mission the incident was related to them by the boys +and they expressed great surprise. I rather supposed that they were +surprised at my prowess, until one woman who knew me better than the +others exclaimed, "Were you not afraid to kill it? Perhaps it was one of +your friends." I then found out that the snake was an object of +reverence. + +Matshuba said that when his father was ill a snake entered his hut and +he exclaimed, "That looks like a child of mine, it is so pretty. It is +your brother, Matshuba." + +"Is that the reason," we inquired, "why so many people are afraid to +kill snakes?" + +"Yes," he replied, "they think their friends come to visit them in this +form." + +Again, once while out kraal-visiting we were speaking to some people who +were working in their garden. Some one came from their kraal with a +message of some kind, and soon all was commotion and hurry. + +I inquired, "What is the matter? Where are you going?" + +They answered, "Two snakes have entered our hut and we must go and see +them." + +"Will you kill them?" + +"No, they are probably some of our friends, who have come to visit us," +was the reply. + +The people were also accustomed to use a goat in their worship and then +drive it away on the veldt. I know very little of this ceremony, except +that when it was told to me, I was forcibly reminded of the "scapegoat" +of the Israelites. Each family also has a sacred ox or cow among the +herd. They do not worship images, and are surprised to find that there +are people on earth who do. Two of the boys in reading their Bibles one +day learned for the first time that some people worship images made by +men's hand, and they were as much surprised as any white child could +have been. + +"Do they answer their prayers?" inquired they. "Can they talk, or do +they know anything? Is it something like we make cattle out of mud to +play with?" + +We are accustomed to despise people who worship animals, and it is +certainly not very elevating; but they are God's handiwork, and are they +not superior to many of the hideous images of idolatrous nations? When +these people do worship, the object of their reverence is not the +animal, but the souls of their people who they think enter the animals. + +Spiritualism is a legitimate product of their beliefs. I can best +illustrate this feature of their worship by giving an instance which +came to our notice in the year 1900. It was a religious dance. The chief +actors had come from a distance and the worship was in honor of one of +their dead relatives, the aim being to bring back the soul and hold +conference with it through one who acted as medium. + +We felt to avail ourselves of this opportunity of seeing something of +their worship, that we might have a better understanding of the same. +The mother of Kelenki, one of our converts, participated and she, +heathenlike, was anxious to have her boy take part, but he of course +refused, as he had always done when urged to join with them. It was only +about two miles from the mission, so Brother and Sister Lehman and +myself went over for a short time. We entered the village at about 3 P. +M. and found about one hundred people assembled. They had just been +drinking beer and were feeling quite good. As many of them knew us, they +greeted us quite pleasantly, nothing loath to see us on this occasion, +provided we did not interfere in their worship. + +One of the most noticeable features at first was the evident attempt at +ornamentation on the part of the women, especially the older women who +were to take active part in the proceedings. We might add that only the +older people took part in this dance, and that the ornamentation of the +body is always a noticeable feature of their worship. Their dress, or +rather undress, consisted of a short skirt of dirty, greasy leather, +covered with a heavy embroidery of bright-colored beads. The rest of the +body was ornamented with beads and heavy brass rings, neck, waist, arms, +and ankles being heavily laden. The headdress consisted of a broad band +of beads artistically put together. + +Our attention was soon drawn to three women seated on the ground before +one of the huts, each with a large drum made from a hollowed log, over +one end of which was a skin tightly drawn. On this drum they were +beating with their hands and accompanying the sound with low, plaintive +singing. Presently a man, who proved to be the leader, or medium, +stepped out, beating at the same time on a drum made of a broad wooden +hoop, over which was stretched a piece of skin. He was a tall, +athletic-looking fellow, clothed in a short skirt similar to that worn +by the women. He had many yards of blue cloth wrapped about his body and +a yellow scarf thrown over one shoulder. The drum which was beaten with +a stick produced a sharp ringing sound, and he danced with a peculiar +backward step, keeping time to the beating of his drum, and sang, +calling upon the shades. To this the women, beating the drums or +tomtoms, would respond. A number of other men with similar drums joined +him in the dance, and the air was filled with their melody. + +This was continued for some time, when all suddenly ceased and +disappeared within a hut and continued their dance within. We were +invited to enter, and after creeping through the low doorway we found +ourselves in a hut about eighteen feet in diameter, with a somewhat +higher roof than is to be found in many native huts. The performance was +similar to that on the outside, except that others joined in the dance, +but all danced alone. The actions and contortions of the body became +more and more rapid and violent, and there was also leaping and jumping, +the heat and violent exertion of the body causing the perspiration to +flow freely. + +The medium finally worked himself up into sort of a frenzy and announced +that a spirit had entered the door. With this he pretended to enter into +conversation, but as he spoke in the Shuna language we did not +understand him. The dancers all finally rushed out on the rocks and the +leader fell down exhausted. After their return the same motions were +continued, but a new feature was added by women entering, having +native-made bells tied to their ankles, and these added to the general +din. The motions of all were more or less similar, and even when the +actions and contortions of the body were the most violent, they were +somewhat rhythmical. The noise was deafening in the extreme, and would +have surely waked the dead were such a thing possible. In addition to a +dozen drums and the bells, there were yelling, whistling, and singing. A +huge battle-axe was handed around from one to another, and part of the +time was dangling on the neck of the leader. Sad as one felt at the +delusion under which they labored, he could not but be impressed by +their evident earnestness, and only wished it might be expended in a +better cause. + +They did not forget our presence, and no doubt we did interfere with the +freedom of their actions. The medium came toward us several times, +beating his drum. Thinking he might be annoyed at our presence we spoke +to the headman, but he hastened to assure us that we were welcome to +remain. In fact, he as well as many others in the kraal, seemed to be +spectators rather than participants in the worship. + +They finally became quiet and the medium again claimed to converse with +the departed, and this time one of our boys interpreted. Of course both +questions and answers were given by the medium. Among other things he +said: "I see a spirit enter the door. It says, 'Who are these white +people? Are they the people who killed the Matabele?' No, they are +missionaries and like the black people." It seemed evident that not only +the spirit but some of the strangers present were somewhat afraid and +needed assurance that we were harmless. + +We returned home sad at heart for their heathendom. We were informed +that this worship continued until late in the night and two days +following. There was much beer drinking and immorality, so that even +some of the heathen in the kraal were thoroughly disgusted. + +The Matabele do not use drums in their religious dance like the Mashona. +Once when we were out kraal visiting we happened to come upon some of +these worshiping at Fusi's kraal. We stopped only a few minutes to see +what they were doing, and were greatly shocked by the hideousness of +their looks and actions. The very stamp of the bottomless pit seemed +impressed upon their features. + +Heathen worship, heathen dances, and hideous rites are becoming less and +less in the vicinity of the mission, for the natives are fast losing +faith in their old religion. The missionaries need a great deal of +patience, forbearance, and firmness in dealing with the perplexing +problems in reference to the natives' beliefs, but in the end God's +cause is sure to win. + + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN + +Some of the Customs + + +Custom is so interwoven with and dependent upon religion that it is +almost impossible to dissociate the two, so there is a difference of +opinion as to what constitutes custom and what religion. Whatever the +natives believe or practice has in their estimation been given them by +their god, even to the ornaments of their bodies. As Rev. W. Chapman +says, "The most satisfactory way of changing native customs is by +changing his religion." On the other hand, take away the native's +religion and the restraints which often accompany it, and place him in a +modern city, with its so-called modern civilization, without the +restraining influences of the Christian religion, and a monstrosity of +evil is often the result. + +From infancy this inexorable law, custom, assails him. He must not step +aside from the laws of his ancestors or he will suffer the consequences. +If twins are born, they must be put to death. If a child cuts his upper +front teeth first instead of the lower, again death is the penalty. Not +because the mother does not love her child. It is just as dear to her as +the child of Christian parents is to them, and generally no amount of +money will induce her to part with it, but this infant is departing from +the customs followed by its ancestors, and if its precocity leads it +thus early to change the customs, what will it not do as it becomes +older? It is a monstrosity and must be dealt with accordingly. + +If the child is a girl, it may at any time after birth be betrothed or +sold to a man for his wife, and a part or all of the pay be given to the +parents to bind the contract. This intended husband may be already +middle-aged or old, with several wives. That is to his credit, because +it frequently means that he is rich or a man of importance in the +community. An old, gray-haired man living near the mission had nine +wives when we arrived on the scene, some of whom were just young girls. +However, one frequently meets with heathen natives who have only one +wife. + +The would-be bridegroom sends some one to the father or guardian of the +girl to ask for her hand in marriage. He consults his relatives in +reference to the matter, but even if they disagree, he may give his +consent, for he alone receives the pay. This may be in the form of +cattle, sheep, or goats, or even money in later years, and the amount of +pay the man can or is willing to give had much to do with the father's +consent. Of course the girl has no say in the affair, and may not, until +she is older, know who her intended husband is. If she is small, he +waits until she is about grown before the actual marriage takes place, +but in the meantime she is looked upon as his prospective wife and is +often thoroughly demoralized before marriage. + +Before the missionaries or Europeans came to the country, it is doubtful +whether the girl rebelled much as to what disposition was made of her, +for one choice was about the same as another, only so that she might +become a married woman. In their eyes it was almost a disgrace to be +unmarried after they had reached the proper age. + +It is said that when the time came for her to be married she would say, +"I am grown and want to marry." At first her people refuse, but finally +they give her a hoe and showing her a piece of raw veldt say, "Show how +you can dig, so that we may see whether you have strength to perform the +work of a wife." She takes the hoe and shows her strength by vigorous +work; for is she not to take the place of oxen or donkeys for her +husband and plow and sow his gardens? This is no exaggeration, for more +than one native has been heard to exclaim, "These are my oxen," pointing +to his wives, the chief difference being that whereas the oxen get some +time to rest and eat, the wife gets little, as she must grind and +prepare the food in the interim of digging. + +When the day set for the wedding arrives, a number of girls of about her +own age are called and they have a feast, often of goat, after which +they accompany the bride to the home of the bridegroom, an old woman, +carrying a knife, leading the way. Here they are assigned their places +and various ceremonies. The wedding lasts several days and ends in a +feast, and very often much immorality is connected with it. During a +certain stage of the ceremony the bride runs and hides, not again making +her appearance until she is found by the others. + +So-called marriages sometimes take place without any pay being given for +the wife, but in such instances the children do not belong to or are +not under the control of their parents; they belong to the father or +guardian of the wife, as she has not been paid for. It may thus be seen +that the giving of pay is not an unmitigated evil, as it leaves the +children in the hands of their natural guardians, the parents. With the +wife the pay is merely changing her from the ownership of her father to +that of her husband, and if she should leave her husband, the pay or +part of it must be returned to him. + +It frequently happens that a man takes a wife according to native +marriage without paying for her, and afterwards, if he desires to retain +her or her children, he pays the father for her. A native in the +vicinity of Matopo had, in this manner, taken five wives, at various +times, without paying for any of them. When some of his children became +of an age that his wives' parents desired to take them, he took steps to +secure them by paying for his wives. One, however, whom he did not like, +he drove away without paying for her. These things show that the +marriage vow is exceedingly loose and leads to much immorality. Several +years after we came to Matopo Hills a law was passed by the British +Government, allowing the girls some freedom of choice in regard to the +marriage question, and it is now possible for Christian girls to choose +Christian husbands. + +A man will have a hut for himself and one for each of his wives, and the +more wives he has, the greater his importance in the community. I think +that it is safe to say that an old heathen's ambition is to have many +wives, each with her hut, about him, many sons, who too, with their +wives, add to the number of huts, and many daughters, that he may sell +them for cattle or sheep and thus increase his flocks and herds. He also +likes to have nephews, younger brothers, and other relatives with their +wives come to him and swell the number of huts. This makes a large +number of huts, large herds, and he becomes an important headman; or if +his followers increase sufficiently he may become a chief. These huts, +built near together and often enclosed with a fence, are what constitute +a kraal. This is a Dutch word and applies only to native villages, but +there may be only three or four huts and it still be called a kraal. + +Their huts are built of poles and mud, much as described in the making +of our own, except that the huts of the raw natives are much lower, +without windows and with a doorway only about three feet in height. +Sometimes no poles are used in the construction of the walls, but they +are moulded of earth from the bottom up and are well made. The floor is +made of ant-hill earth, well pounded. This is then covered with a thin +coat of black earth and polished with stones until it looks not unlike a +nicely-polished wooden floor. The Matabele build much better huts than +some of the subject tribes; these latter are good farmers, but often +have most miserable-looking huts. + +[Illustration: Matabele Kraal near Matopo Mission.] + +There is no furniture proper in the huts. The bed consists of a mat or +hide spread on the floor at night. During the day this, together with +the blankets, is rolled up and tied to the roof of the hut. The pillow +is made from a block of wood, and there are no chairs, a small mat +answering for this purpose. They have earthen pots for cooking and +brewing beer and for various purposes. They have many kinds of +nicely-woven baskets, and gourds for carrying and dipping water as well +as for drinking vessels. There are also the necessary stamping block and +a large flat stone on which the grain is ground. The wash basin is the +mouth. The mouth is filled with water, which is allowed to run in a thin +stream on the hands until they are washed, and then the hands are filled +in the same way to wash the face. I was greatly interested once in the +operation of bathing twins. This mother had sufficient light to keep her +from killing her babies because there were two of them. She spread a +blanket on a large rock in the sun. Then she took a gourd of water and +filled her mouth. (It is surprising how much water they can hold in the +mouth; practice aids greatly in this, no doubt.) She kept the water in +her mouth a short time to take off the chill, then picked up one child, +held it out and, with a thin stream of water pouring from her mouth, +washed the entire body of the child thoroughly. After this ablution she +laid it on the blanket in the sun to dry. She again filled her mouth and +taking the other baby repeated the process and also placed it on the +blanket. The children were evidently accustomed to such baths; for they +took it all quietly, and perhaps enjoyed it as much as a white child in +a bath tub of warm water. + +Polygamy is not necessarily opposed among some of the heathen women. +They will frequently tell you, "I like my husband to have more than one +wife; then I do not need to work so hard." It is, however, a source of +much dissension and rivalry among them and a cause of much favoritism +among the children. One day Gomo was reading the story of Joseph and +Benjamin. He exclaimed, "That is just like our people. The children of +the favorite wife are loved more by the father." Of course polygamy is +one great drawback to the introduction of christianity, but we believe +that it has had its day and that in many places it is becoming less in +practice. Each wife cooks of her own food for the husband and places it +before him. He, with older boys, eats what he desires and leaves the +balance, if there be any, for the wife and her children. If he has many +wives a number of dishes are often placed before him during the day, and +he can eat that which he prefers. Or, if there are several men in the +kraal, they often all eat from one dish, and from each dish as it is +brought to them by the various wives, while the mother and daughters eat +from a separate dish. + +Their chief occupation is farming, and they grow corn, kafir corn, +millet, sweet potatoes, peanuts, ground peas, melons, citrons, and +pumpkins. They generally hull the grain and then stamp or grind it into +a very fine meal or flour. This they put into boiling water and make a +very stiff porridge, or mush. Their favorite food seems to be this +porridge, eaten with meat into the broth of which ground peanuts have +been cooked. They generally have chickens, sheep, goats, or cattle, and +often hunt or trap game. Their usual way of eating is to allow the food +to cool a little and then dip the two front fingers into the porridge, +take a little and dip it into the gravy and then put it into their +mouth. They also greatly relish green corn, eaten from the cob or cut +off and ground on the millstones. This milky meal is then made into a +loaf and placed into a kettle and thoroughly steamed. This is their best +substitute for bread, and in its season it is considered their most +dainty dish, and with a little salt it is quite palatable, especially if +not much grit has combined with it in the process of preparation. + +The African is fond of his beer, which also is made by the wives. For +this purpose they use any of the grains grown by them, but they prefer +kafir corn or millet. This is moistened and put in a warm place until it +sprouts. It is then ground or stamped and the meal is cooked into a thin +porridge and put into large earthen pots, where more water is added, +also the yeast or dregs of a previous brewing. It is then allowed to +stand in a warm place and ferment, and before drinking it is usually +strained through a loose bag of their own weaving. The native will tell +you that their god showed them how to make the beer, and I have no doubt +but that he did. + +It is needless to say that it intoxicates and is the cause of frequent +brawls and fights among them, and it is not unusual for the missionaries +to be called upon to help settle some of these disturbances. It is less +difficult to convince the Africans of the evil effects of its use than +it is some Europeans. The latter will often tell you that the native +thrives and works better if allowed his beer. Missionaries are not +wanting who think it is best not to interfere with their native +Christians having their beer. Our missionaries, however, have no +difficulty in inducing the Christians to discard the use of it, and we +believe the sentiment against it is increasing among the missionaries in +general. In a native Conference held at Matopo Mission in February, +1914, the question of native beer came up. Of course all were opposed to +members drinking it, but the question was in regard to the Christian +girls, who were minors, assisting in the making of it, since they are +under the jurisdiction of their heathen parents. The older native +Christians were in favor of more stringent measures than even the +missionaries. + +In order to show what an enlightened Christian native can and will do if +he has the power we need only refer to the work of King Khama. He is the +King of Bechuanaland, the country just west of Southern Rhodesia. His +father was a heathen king and a sorcerer, but Khama embraced +Christianity in his youth, and in the midst of most bitter persecutions +from his own father and others, he stood true. The people finally +recognizing his ability chose him king in place of his father in 1872. +Then his difficulties began in another line. If he was to be the chief +of the country, it must be founded on the principles of the Gospel. All +imported liquor was prohibited from crossing the border, nor was native +beer allowed to be made. + +[Illustration: Matabele Women Stamping Grain.] + +It was a fierce battle with some of the natives themselves, for they +were not all Christians and did not readily yield. This domestic +trouble, however, was nothing compared with the battle he had to wage +with unprincipled white traders and even with government officials, for +the country was under the protection of England, and they had some voice +in the management of affairs. But Khama won the day in such a struggle +as would have dismayed many a stouter heart. According to Mr. J. H. +Hepburn, Khama wrote to the British Administration as follows: "I dread +the white man's drink more than the assegais of the Matabele which kill +men's bodies and is quickly over; but drink puts devils into men and +destroys their souls and bodies forever. Its wounds never heal. I pray +your Honor never to ask me to open even a little door to drink." Words +worthy of a native Christian hero, indeed; a hero that could not be +bought, that could not be bribed or frightened by the liquor men. + +The Government of Rhodesia is rather favorable toward native beer, yet +we owe it much for prohibiting imported liquor sold to natives within +its territory. Perhaps (who knows?) Khama's firm stand in his own +territory may have been an influence in keeping Rhodesian natives from +securing imported liquor. + +Mention was made before that the native way of getting work done is to +make a quantity of beer and invite their neighbors. They do this in +digging and preparing the ground for sowing, in weeding, in cultivating, +and in threshing. While a little beer is given during the work, the +greater part is kept back until the work is completed, perhaps as an +inducement for them to persevere unto the end. If then one, in +evangelistic work, comes upon such a company early in the day, they are +not much the worse for drink and will often listen attentively. + +Once Sister Steigerwald and I came to a place where a large company were +busy weeding. They had a large garden to weed and did not greatly +desire to stop for service, but we promised not to keep them long, so +they gathered under the shade of a tree. On opening our Bible our eye +fell on the "Parable of the Tares," which seemed quite suitable for the +occasion. They listened most attentively to the short talk, and as +illustrations taken from their gardens and work always seemed better +understood and appreciated, we made use of such entirely in the +application. After singing and prayer we told them they might return to +their work. We sat still and watched them awhile, and as they worked and +pulled out the weeds, we could hear them talking to one another and +saying, "Yes, the bad things Satan sows in our hearts are just like +these weeds, and they need to be rooted out or they will destroy us." + +On another occasion, one Sunday morning, there were no natives from one +of the large kraals present at the services, and we felt to pay them a +visit. Ganukisa and some of the boys accompanying, we went to the place +in the afternoon to hold service. We always tried to impress upon the +people that they should not work on Sunday, and many were heeding, so on +this occasion we were surprised to find about seventy-five of them +having a digging. As we drew near, they had just finished the work and +were about to surround the huge beer pots for a "good time." We knew by +the time they had consumed all that beer they would scarcely be in a +condition to receive the Gospel. What should we do? We never like to ask +the natives to do anything unless there is some probability of its +being carried out, for one is likely to lose influence over them. Could +they be persuaded to leave their beer pots and let us talk to them +first? We could not make them do it, but God could, so looking to Him we +said, + +"Leave the beer and come out under the shade of the trees while we talk +to you." + +"Oh, no," they replied, "let us drink the beer first and then we will +come." + +We knew that if they did their drinking first some of them would not +stay for the service, so again, with somewhat more authority, I repeated +the request, and at the same time, together with the Christian natives +who accompanied, moved toward the shade. It was almost more than we +expected, but the Lord moved upon their hearts to leave the beer +untouched, and come to listen. The Lord especially anointed some of our +native Christians for the service and they gave forth the Word with +power. One of them referred very strongly to their desecration of the +Sabbath. At first they sought to justify themselves, but as the truth +was pressed home to them they said they would never do it again. At the +close a number of the older men for the first time in their lives prayed +and pleaded for pardon. The old women who had invited them to work +seemed especially concerned and promised not to repeat it on Sunday. + +When they thresh they also invite a lot of their neighbors. They place +the grain on a large flat rock and then strike it with a straight stick. +Once I was present when a large number of the Amahole, or subject +tribes, were threshing. They were decked out with all their ornaments, +and being divided into two sides were placed opposite to one another, +like two opposing forces in battle array. Each being armed with his +threshing stick, they performed a mimic battle with the grain lying on +the rock between the two lines of battle, each one alternately driving +the other before it and at the same time beating the grain with their +sticks. They also sang their war song, of how the Matabele overcame them +and impaled them alive, and of the dire vengeance they would inflict in +return. The interlude would be occupied by a sort of ballet dancer among +them. The whole was exceedingly heathenish, but not uninteresting; and +as for the grain, a large amount of it was threshed. + +While much of the work falls to the women, some of the native men are +quite diligent in digging in their gardens; but they generally wish to +sell their grain and secure money to pay taxes for themselves and their +wives. The women, in addition to growing most of the food that is eaten, +often help to furnish the tax money. Of course to the raw native dress +is a negligible quantity. + +The people are always generous, and the food in the kraals is shared +with the strangers. No one needs to go through the country hungry unless +there is famine, and even then they will often divide the last morsel. +When the stranger comes among them, they always bid him welcome, and it +is etiquette to let him remain for at least one day without asking him +any questions as to his business among them. + +Even in respect to continually begging, which is so obnoxious to +Europeans, the native is not so rude as it would appear. They are not +slow to ask one another, and they have often surprised me by saying that +they felt flattered to be asked for articles, as it showed that they had +something which the other did not have and they had an opportunity to +help. A native likes to have plenty, but he does not want to have his +gardens surpass too much those of his neighbors, in productiveness; +neither does he want his herds to surpass others too much, for fear he +may be an object of envy to those around him and a victim of malice, or +be accused of witchcraft. + +There always seems to be a great attachment between the mother and her +children all through life. This does not hinder the big, stout boy, +however, from lying around and living on the bounty of his hard-working +mother, and on the other hand the heathen boy will often exert himself +to aid his mother and pay her hut tax, and she often lives with her son +when she becomes old. + +The native women generally shave their heads with a piece of sharp +glass. It is a laborious and painful process and needs to be done by an +expert, but in the end it is well done. The married woman always leaves +a small tuft of hair on the crown of her head. This is her sign of +wifehood. The raw native has no means of keeping record of his age, so +we must always guess at it. + +[Illustration: Matabele Women Digging.] + +The government is patriarchal and the younger are generally respectful +to the elders, and all are more or less polite to one another. Their +very name implies this. The surname is handed down from father to child, +even the wife retaining that of her father unless she is married by +Christian marriage. The surname is also the _isibongo_, or thank word. +By that I mean that it is what they say if they wish to thank for any +favor. Among themselves they do not say "I thank you" for any favor +received. Suppose Muza Sibanda would give another one something. The +recipient on receiving it would say "Sibanda" instead of "I thank you." +Again, in addressing another, if one wishes to be polite or respectful +he will use the last, not the first name, or he may say "Father," +"Mother," or the like. I at first thought them somewhat rude in not +thanking properly, but soon found that it was often the result of not +knowing what to say. One day I gave a piece of bread to a little fellow +about five years of age. He hesitated, then looking up into my face, +said, "_Isibongo sako sipi?_" ("What is your thank name?") If a native +is given anything, all the others present will join in thanking, for a +favor to one is a favor to all. The mother will often use the thank +name, or surname, as a term of endearment to her child. After she has a +child she is no longer known by her name, but if the child is Luju she +is known as the "mother of Luju." + +If one falls or meets with an accident, however slight, all the rest +will say "_Pepa_" ("Beg pardon"). If one enters the kraal of another, he +enters the hut and sits down near the door without saying anything. +Presently he says "_Eh! kuhle_" ("Peace"), about equivalent to saying, +"Peace be to this house." It is not a salutation, but a polite way of +announcing his presence. The occupant of the hut then responds by +saying, "_Eh! sa ku bona_" ("We see you"). In reality, however, it is +equivalent to saying "How do you do?" to which the other responds. + +It is a real treat to hear two old natives conversing together, +especially if they are unconscious of one's presence. Their gossip may +not be very elevating, but it is always carried on in a polite and +interesting manner. The Tebele language is most beautiful and +expressive, as its liquid syllables roll off the native tongue, and it +is always most correctly spoken--no errors in grammar among them. + +This would not be complete without mention being made of death and +burial. In burial the various tribes differ somewhat among themselves. +Among the Matabele, when one dies the friends come and prepare the body +for burial by placing it in a sitting posture with the knees brought up +near the face. They clothe it in the garments which it owned, and wrap +the blanket about it, tying the body firmly in this position with the +face exposed. It is then left sitting in the hut, together with some of +the women mourners, while the men go and select a place for burial, +generally at a little distance from the kraal, unless the deceased +should be headman. They make the grave more or less circular in form, +and near the bottom a slight excavation is made in the side for the +reception of the body. + +The body is then placed on a blanket or large hide and carried out to +the grave, the friends following and mourning. A gourd filled with fresh +water is brought, and with this a near friend or relative washes the +face of the dead, at the same time giving it a message to kindly +remember them to the king and to speak a good word for them. The two men +standing in the grave receive the body and place it in the excavation +with the face toward the east. They fasten it in position with stones +and then fill in the grave with earth. On top of the grave are placed +stones and the property of the deceased, together with branches of +trees, perhaps to protect it from the wild beasts, for the grave is +somewhat shallow. + +As children do not have any garments which they can call their own, they +are often buried without anything being wrapped about the body. Once, +when a little son of Mapita died, Sister Doner and I went over to the +burial. The little body was lowered into the grave quite bare and they +were about to put in the earth. Sister Doner could not stand that, so +she hastily removed a large apron which she had on and told them to +wrap that around the little body before throwing in the earth. They did +so, but no doubt would have preferred keeping it for themselves before +it had been defiled by coming into contact with the dead body. When +Kelenki, one of our Christian boys, died in his home, they wanted to +know what to do with his books, and one of the other Christian boys said +he thought they had better leave them for the living. + +After burial they all go to the river and wash, for death means +defilement. The women are the chief mourners, and they assemble early in +the morning, fill the air with their wailing and then return home until +the following morning. This is often done for four consecutive mornings. +In the interim the relatives sit about the kraal, quiet and with little +talking, except to answer the condolences of their friends, who come +from time to time to sympathize with them. There is no feast, as among +some natives. In fact, for a time little food is cooked or eaten except +that brought by neighbors. + +Some of the other tribes lay the body down in burial, and often place it +in the crevices of the rocks. If the deceased is headman of the kraal, +he is generally buried in the enclosure and often inside his own hut, +and the people usually remain there for a year and then, after a period +of worship, the kraal is abandoned. The wives go to be the wives of the +brother of the deceased, unless they be old, when they usually live with +a son or daughter. + +About fifteen miles from the mission, in the direction of Bulawayo, is +the grave of the first king, Umzilikazi. It is in a large kopje, between +some immense boulders. On the top of the grave, or in the immediate +vicinity--since one cannot point out the exact spot of the body--are +many wagon loads of rock thrown in to fill up the cavity between the +boulders. There are also wheels and the remains of broken wagons and +other property once owned by the king, and probably bought from the +white men in his emigration from Zululand to this country. I cannot give +the exact date of this king's death, but it was at least more than fifty +years ago. As he was considered the god of the Matabele, this grave was +often no doubt a place of worship by the tribe, but we have no knowledge +that it has been worshiped in late years. Perhaps it somewhat fell into +disuse after Umlimo, the god of the Makalanga, was considered so +powerful. + + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN + +Later Visits + +The missionary stands to the native for religion and education, for all +the help he may get to make his life cleaner, more moral, and more in +keeping with ideals of the white man at his best.--M. S. Evans. + + +In the year 1910 it was my privilege, on returning from a furlough to +Natal, to again visit Matopo, after an absence of nearly four years. +Bishop and Mrs. Steigerwald were at that time in America on furlough, +and Brother Doner and his wife, who was formerly Sister Sallie Kreider, +and Sister Mary Heise were in charge of Matopo Mission. When I reached +Bulawayo I found Brother Doner waiting to convey me to the mission. It +was indeed a pleasure again to visit the place and to look into the +faces of those natives who had grown very dear by reason of my long stay +among them. Here it was my privilege to come into contact, for the first +time, with raw heathendom, and to have the joy of seeing light enter +darkened minds and souls born into the Kingdom. So it occupies a tender +spot which later experiences cannot touch. + +There had been improvements made since I had left. Prominent among these +were two substantial brick buildings, a house for the boys and one for +the girls, and there were thirty-three boys occupying the one and three +girls the other. There is a nice little band of believers at this +place, some of whom I wish especially to mention. First is poor old +blind Ngiga. Shortly after Elder Engle's death we found him at a kraal, +destitute and afflicted, with no one seemingly to care for him and give +him food. We carried or sent food to him for a time, and gave him a +blanket, and he gradually gained strength. Thinking that exercise would +do him good, Brother Lehman encouraged him to come to the mission for +his food, as he was only a short distance away. He had lain for so long +without exercising his body that at first it was with great difficulty +that he reached the mission, but being supplied with food, he grew +stronger and was enabled to walk the distance easily and to help himself +a little. Some time after Elder Steigerwald came he treated him for his +disease and built a hut and brought him to the mission to stay, as the +loathsome disease with which he was afflicted had left him about blind. +He, however, was converted and has been received into the Church. It is +a pleasure to hear him now testify to Christ's saving power, and to +praise the Lord for bringing the missionaries. Truly, the Lord is no +Respecter of persons. + +Again, let us go to Buka's house. My readers will remember Buka, whom +Sister Heise and I found upon the rocks eleven years before when we went +in search of little Lomazwana. Yes, it is really he whose life and home +looked so black to us that day. He moved to within about three miles of +the mission, and his son Kolisa came to stay at the mission and go to +school. The father became sick and Brother and Sister Doner visited him +and ministered unto him. Then they built him a hut and made him more +comfortable. He finally became a paralytic and unable to help himself, +so Brother Steigerwald assisted them to get a home on the mission +premises, and gave them gardens, so that they are now quite comfortable. +The oldest daughter also accepted Christ, then the mother followed, and +these two with the son are now members of the Church. + +My first Sunday at Matopo, in company with Brother and Sister Doner, I +visited this home. A smile of recognition at once lighted up the face of +the invalid father; and though he could not speak, the family +interpreted the sounds he made. After he had expressed his welcome he +said that though his body and speech were paralyzed, yet his heart was +all right. During another visit he tried to explain how Jesus was +dwelling within, and how glad he was that when he got "over there" he +would not be sick. One could not help feeling that he had learned to +know the Lord. Truly, affliction had proved a blessing to him. + +[Illustration: Building the Boys' House at Matopo, M. S.] + +[Illustration: Boys' Brick House at Matopo Mission.] + +There was a good school at Matopo, with Sister Heise and Matshuba as +teachers. Brother Doners were very busy overseeing this work, as well as +their own station at Mapani Mission, and they kindly took me to that +place to see something of the work there. Nyamazana had had charge of +the mission at Mapani for about six months and was doing good work, +especially spiritually. He is Spirit-filled and alive to the +responsibility resting upon him. He had charge of the Inquirers' Class +and Sunday services, and the natives say that he preaches powerful +sermons. He has a nice Christian wife, who is a help to him. There is a +company of earnest believers at this place. Brother Doner erected a +large brick church and a brick dwelling-house, which added greatly to +the appearance and comfort of the work, and he deserves much credit for +the work accomplished alone and single-handed in building. + +The first Friday in each month has been set apart by the missionaries in +Africa as a day of prayer and fasting. On the Prayer Day in May of that +year we were permitted to meet with the believers at Mapani Mission. +Over seventy were assembled. They included the members of the Church +here and those of the Inquirers' Class. We had a most precious waiting +on the Lord and heard many soul-stirring prayers and testimonies. Many +seemed to be reaching out for a greater fulness of the Spirit, while +others were overflowing with the joy of the Lord. The work was most +encouraging and the members steadfast, and the Lord had been pouring out +His Spirit upon some of them in a marvelous manner, and our hearts were +made to rejoice with them. + +We also spent a few days visiting some of the people and the schools +taught by Brethren Nkwidini, Mlobeka, and Nyamazana. All three of these +teachers were our former pupils and had been converted at Matopo. + +Brother and Sister Doner then took me to Mtyabezi Mission, after which +they returned to Matopo. Mtyabezi is the mission station of Brother and +Sister Frey, and a little over a year after it was opened Miss +Elizabeth Engle also came to help in it. This was my first visit at the +station, and I was made to rejoice at what the Lord was doing at this +place. The buildings are pleasantly located at the foot of an immense +kopje, which towers high above them in the background. A neat-looking +brick church had been erected by Brother Frey, and well-built huts in +which they were living at the time. + +[Illustration: A Native Christian's Home. Matshuba's.] + +Sister Frey had been doing the teaching, but at the time of my visit, +Bunu, one of their pupils and converts, was teaching and doing excellent +work. On Thursday Sisters Frey and Engle and myself went in the wagon to +visit some members about eight miles distant, where we met with a warm +reception among those who were Christians. At one place there was a +Christian woman about sixty years of age, who seemed so happy in the +Lord and so eager to make us welcome and comfortable during our stay. +We were surprised to find in one of the kraals a native dressmaker who +owned a sewing machine and had all the sewing she could do for her +dark-skinned neighbors. The sisters have been teaching their girls and +women to sew. + +In the evening about thirty natives, most of whom were believers, +gathered around our campfire to hold service. We spoke for a time, and +then a number gave a clear testimony to the saving power of Christ. We +had to contrast this little company with some other gatherings which we +have seen and heard in the hours of night in darkest Africa, where beer, +the dance, licentiousness, and all forms of devil worship made night +hideous. One can best understand what the Gospel message is doing for +the people, if he first sees something of paganism. + +On Sunday at the mission there was a very impressive time, and when the +altar call was given a number came forward. There were truly penitent +hearts, among whom were a number of young men seeking to get right with +God; also some girls and married people. Here was a woman whose husband +had two wives, and she was much persecuted at home, but she wanted to +follow the Lord, and piteously, in the midst of her sobs, she inquired +what she should do. Then a Magdalene confessed that she had fallen into +grievous sin, and like the one of old came with bitter tears to the feet +of Jesus. Another's way was made hard on account of the unfaithfulness +of her husband, and so on. But the one whose experience seemed the most +touching was a woman of nearly sixty years. Her married daughter, who +is a Christian, had been much in prayer for her mother, and so the woman +came and with utter abandonment, seemingly, threw herself at the feet of +Jesus, weeping and confessing her sins and saying, "I am a dog. Pick me +up, Lord." + +At the opening of 1913 we were permitted to make another visit to the +missions in this vicinity. This vacation was to be only a month, and as +I had in the meantime been cut off from association with white people, +except those at the mission, I concluded to spend the first few days in +Bulawayo. The place had grown since we reached it, nearly fifteen years +before, and although the growth had not been so rapid it was of an +enduring, steady kind. The place is laid out on broad lines, with broad +streets and roomy dwellings--no need for skyscrapers here. There are +many fine, substantial-looking business blocks, and as one goes into the +suburbs he sees many elegant, well-built dwelling-houses. There are fine +churches, a good hospital, museum, and library, and two large government +school buildings, each with a good dormitory attached. One of these is +for boys and the other, which is on the opposite side of the town, is +for girls. Here, as in all parts of South Africa, there is some +industrial work in connection with the schools. Bulawayo has also many +excellent stores and shops, so that one may purchase almost anything +required, not only in the line of provisions, household goods, and +clothing, but all lines of farming implements and many kinds of +machinery. The heavy wagons, drawn by great rows of oxen, donkeys, and +mules, are still to be seen, but there are also many dainty one-horse +traps, as well as two-horse conveyances, and a large number of +automobiles and motorcycles. + +There is attached to the town a large native location, for the heavy +part of the work as well as the housework is about all done by native +boys. They are all called "boys." In the eyes of their white employers +the native seldom becomes a man. He may be an old boy or a young boy, a +little boy or a big boy, but he is always a boy. On the other hand, in +the eyes of many Europeans it is almost an insult to speak of their +children as boys. In the early days one of the missionaries, in speaking +to an old European lady, said something about her boy. She straightened +herself proudly and with emphasis said, "My son." At the mission one day +a native woman was begging very hard for a piece of cloth, and to +strengthen her request she said, "I am your boy," evidently meaning that +she belonged to me. + +[Illustration: Mtshabezi Church and School.] + +[Illustration: Mtshabezi Mission in 1910.] + +Although Bulawayo is the largest town in Southern Rhodesia, there are +others, such as Salisbury, Gwelo, Victoria, and Gwanda, which deserve +mention. Farmers are scattered throughout the country, especially along +the high, rolling plain between Bulawayo and Salisbury. There are many +valuable gold mines and many old gold workings to be found in various +places. The most noted is Great Zimbabwe, near Victoria. It is said: +"The ruins cover a large area, and on an eminence are the remains of a +fortress, the walls of which are thirty feet high and ten feet thick, +and built of cut stones put together without mortar, so closely-fitting +that a knife can hardly be inserted between them. Smelting crucibles, +with gold in them, ingot moulds, and spears have been found." Some think +that the Sabeans from Arabia worked these about 3,000 years ago. This is +thought by some to be the "gold of Ophir." Ruins on a smaller scale are +to be found in various places. Not far from Mapani Mission we saw a +circular wall made of wedge-shaped stones, nicely fitted together. The +country is also rich in iron ore, and at Wankie is the great coal-mining +district. All these places furnish abundant work for all the natives of +Rhodesia, and are also centers for mission work. + +January 1, I was again taken to Motopo Mission, not with the slow, +patient donkeys of fifteen years ago, but with the swifter mules. Many +changes have taken place among the natives surrounding the mission since +1898. On our first entering this valley the natives had just fled and +hid themselves away in these rocks at the close of the Rebellion. They +were then very poor, without flocks and herds, and had few gardens, and +very little of the land had ever been brought under cultivation. Since +then the natives have gradually come out of their hiding-places and +settled down to their work. Under the influence of peace and better +teaching their surroundings have greatly changed. There are more natives +near the mission than at first, and they have sheep, goats, and cattle, +and some of them have plows and oxen to draw them, so that they can plow +their large gardens. Every available place near the mission has been +brought under cultivation, but not in the old, laborious way with human +oxen, so that the wives are not the slaves they once were. Of course, +in the absence of the men at work the women often hold the plow, but +they have more time to keep house. One of the officials affirms that the +best way of doing away with polygamy is by introducing civilized ways of +farming. + +The people began by bringing their oxen to Brother Steigerwald to be +trained, and then he helped them to procure plows, and they still come +to him for help in trouble. The 3,000-acre farm is far too small for all +who desire to live near the mission. If he had twice the amount of land +it would soon become filled with natives, who would thus be near the +mission and under the influence of the Gospel. + +Let us visit some of the houses and see what changes have taken place. +Here first is the home of Matshuba. As he was first in the fold, he is +worthy of first notice. He lives in a small, neatly-built brick house, +with a well-swept yard inclosed by a fence. Inside the house are +homemade bedsteads, chairs and tables, and here is Matshuba the same as +of yore. He is older and has fought many battles since that first day +when, as a little boy, he came and watched the newcomers. He has found +the conflict severe and almost overpowering at times. It has left some +scars, but, praise God! he has come off victorious at last, and in a +more humble spirit he is following the meek and lowly Savior. He is +Elder Steigerwald's right-hand man and is capable of turning his hand to +almost any kind of work. He can take the blacksmith tools and mend the +large three-disc plow; he can make use of the small engine and grind the +meal for the native food, or do any other kind of work about the place. +Best of all, he can go out and tell the people about Jesus. He had hoped +that the elder's many-sided ability might be his, and he seems to have +had his wish. He could secure much larger pay as an engineer in the +mines, but he feels that his place is in the Lord's work. May he have +our prayers that he may always find God's grace sufficient. + +[Illustration: Mtshabezi--Baptismal Scene.] + +Here too is his wife, Makiwa. She was also educated at Matopo Mission, +where she learned not only in school, but also in the kitchen and +sewing-room, that she might know how to take care of her home and +family. A faithful helpmate she has been to her husband and a blessing +in the Church. Here are their little boy and girl, whom they are +bringing up in the fear of the Lord. This old woman, also neatly +dressed, is Matshuba's mother, long a slave to her old religion, her +superstitious ideas, her beer and her tobacco. Now she has accepted +Christ as her Savior and He has cleansed her and she is in the Church. +And this bright-looking girl is her daughter, Sixpence. She was only +about four or five years old when we came to Matopo. Now she is a tall, +fine-looking Christian woman and well taught. She has on a neat-looking +black dress which, Sister Steigerwald tells me, she cut and sewed +without any help from the missionaries. Yes, this is a Christian home, +from which we hope and pray that the evils of heathendom have flown +forever. + +There are others. First is Anyana, long a faithful helper of the +mission, and his wife, Citiwa, also one of our girls. Then comes Siyaya, +who had some falls, but he has at last got his feet on the Rock and is +helping to tell others of Christ. Mahlenhle is also here. He is the same +faithful boy as of old, one of those who never give their missionary any +uneasiness. He is always ready and willing to do what he can, which is +not a little. He teaches, he preaches, and interprets for others, or he +can go out and handle the oxen and see to the farming. There are also +many new ones in church and school, several of whom are assisting in +teaching. There are forty-two boys staying at the mission for school, +and a number coming to day-school. Sister Heise has plenty to do, for +she teaches both early morning and midday, and is doing excellent work. +There are about 150 regular attendants at the Sunday services. The +majority of them are young men and women and children. Almost all are +respectably clothed and are seeking to know the Lord. The girls who +desire to stay at the missionaries' and be trained are now sent to the +Girls' School at Mtyabezi Mission. There is a large sewing class at this +place for those who wish to learn. Two new missionaries, Brother Levi +Steckly and Sister Cora Alvis, are also assisting in the work at Matopo. + +I went out among the people, eager to secure a snapshot of a kraal, as +they formerly were, but I failed. They are all better built and more +cleanly than formerly. In every village there are some who wear European +clothing, for even if they have not accepted Christ as their Savior, +some have put on the garments of civilization. There are, of course, +many among the older ones who have not changed much, and who have always +hardened their hearts and stiffened their necks against the truth. This +has been the condition of the world ever since the Fall, and it will no +doubt continue until all sin and wickedness shall be put under foot and +He shall reign in righteousness. If the command had been "Go into all +the world and make disciples of every creature," missionaries would have +given up long ago in despair. Miss Carmichael, in her work, "Things as +They Are in Missionary Work in Southern India," says, "It is required in +a steward that a man be found faithful. Praise God! it does not say +'successful.'" The same will apply to missionary work in Africa. + +During the year of our visit the rains were unusually late, and, as the +harvest had been quite light the previous year, some of the people were +in great need of grain. Brother Steigerwald was doing all in his power +to get grain out from Bulawayo for them. The six mules were hauling out +every week to the extent of their strength, for farmers are not allowed +to take their oxen on the road, for fear disease may spread among the +cattle. As the wagon returned from Bulawayo with fifteen 200-pound bags +of grain on it, the people, who had been watching for its return, +hastened to come to the mission to purchase. Grain was expensive, about +seven or eight dollars a bag; but as soon as it was unloaded it was +sold. Their people must have food, and many of the able-bodied natives +had been away to work and thus procured money, and perhaps a month's +wages would buy one bag of grain. Others were trying to sell some of the +cattle and sheep for grain. Although many of these old people who were +buying had not accepted Christ as their Savior, yet they have absolute +confidence in His messenger, Elder Steigerwald, and they come to him in +their difficulties, knowing that he has a kind heart. He is their +father, as Sister Steigerwald is their mother. + +A love feast had been announced for Mtyabezi Mission the middle of +January, and arrangements had been made for all the white workers and as +many of the native converts as possible to attend. Mr. Steckly and Mr. +Hemming went across the hills, twenty-five miles, on foot, and the rest +of us went by wagon around on the road--a distance of about forty-five +miles. This road was down through the hills in the direction of Mapani +Mission. We started on Thursday morning, sleeping out on the veldt +during the night, and reached Mtyabezi on Friday afternoon. + +Brother Freys were at that time in America on furlough, but the work was +ably carried on by Brother Walter Winger and his wife, formerly Abbie +Bert, and Sister Elizabeth Engle. This is now known as our Girls' +School. Twenty-five girls were then staying at the mission, and they are +being trained in housework and sewing, in addition to school and outside +work. They are also supplying some of our Christian boys with Christian +wives, and Christian marriage is taking the place of heathen rites. In +addition to these there was a good-sized day-school, which was under the +excellent management of Miss Sadie Book. There were also several large +out-schools in connection with this mission. A large brick house was +nearly completed and they were at the same time living in it. This part +of the country south of the hills was especially suffering from drought +at this time. Although this was in the middle of what should have been +the rainy season, yet no rains had fallen, and the entire country was +bare, not a blade of grass was to be seen, and the grain sown had not +yet sprouted. Brother Winger was busy with his wagon, getting grain out +from the station ten miles away to help the people. + +This was the first love feast in Southern Rhodesia that I had been +permitted to attend for nearly seven years, and I had looked eagerly +forward to this gathering. The joy of seeing the natives assemble for +the occasion was too deep for words. First to come were some of the +communicants from Matopo Mission on Friday evening. The sisters were +walking in front, Indian file, with their blankets and Sunday clothing +tied up in a bundle and carried on their heads, and Sixpence leading the +way. Following these were the brethren, with Matshuba bringing up the +rear. It was now sundown and they had walked twenty-five miles and were +tired, so they were shown their places for the night, and after eating +their supper, and prayer, they retired. The next morning early a similar +crowd came from Mapani Station, fifteen miles distant. A number also +gathered from the vicinity of Mtyabezi and out-schools on Saturday +morning. The little church could not hold all and an overflow meeting +was held on the outside. There were also a number of members who could +not be present. + +Saturday morning was devoted to a short discourse and self-examination +meeting, followed by testimonies. It was an inspiration to look over the +crowded house and listen to the earnest testimonies following one after +another in rapid succession. Often four or five would be on their feet +at once, and yet there was no confusion or disorder, as each one quietly +waited for his time to speak. We had to say to ourselves, again and +again, "What hath God wrought!" We could not avoid contrasting the early +days of nakedness and midnight heathendom with this enlightened, +well-dressed company before us. In fact, the contrast was so marked that +one could scarcely bridge the chasm even in imagination. + +[Illustration: Girls at Mtshabezi Mission.] + +In the afternoon seventeen from Mtyabezi Mission and its out-schools +were received into the Church by the right hand of fellowship. On +account of the drought and lack of water in the streams, the baptism was +deferred until a later date. There were several others who made +application, but after examination it was thought that some were not +ready. On Saturday evening the natives had a meeting of their own and +were addressed by Myamazana, while the missionaries had an English +service and were addressed by Bishop Steigerwald. + +On Sunday morning we again gathered to observe the ordinance of +feet-washing and to commemorate the sufferings and death of our Savior. +There were over 300 natives gathered together, nearly all of whom were +either members or inquirers. The native communicants were 129 and the +white ones eleven, making 140 in all, and these assembled in the Church +while the rest were addressed by Mahlenhle and others on the outside. We +had now a better opportunity of looking into the faces of those who had +been received into Church fellowship. As our missionaries are in close +touch with their people and know pretty well their private lives, we +knew something of the company before us. + +It was indeed an intelligent and respectable-looking company of men and +women, one to be proud of, if I might use the term. Its respectability +did not depend so much on the fact that they had thrown off the undress +of paganism and had donned the garments of civilization. That is not +necessarily an adjunct of Christianity, nor is it all due to Christian +influence. While the missionaries have been laboring these years to win +souls to Christ, many civilizing influences have been at work throughout +the country, some of which have been previously mentioned. Stores with +European clothing are to be found everywhere, and many natives discard +their heathen garb for civilized clothing and yet know absolutely +nothing of Christ and His power to save. Some of these well-dressed +natives about the towns have learned far more of the evils of +civilization than of its virtues, and hide under their new dress an even +blacker heart than they did under their old pagan exterior. Then too we +are sorry to say that intelligence in the sense of having been at a +mission station and learning to read does not necessarily make them +Christians. Some of these also, to the great sorrow of their teachers, +have made poor use of their knowledge. + +It is because the missionary sees this, and knows only too well the many +pitfalls before their unwary feet; it is because he realizes, as +probably no one else does, what it means to these poor souls to be so +suddenly brought from the dense darkness of heathendom into the glaring +lights of modern civilization, and how unprepared they are for it all, +how little they know to shun the evil and choose the good; it is because +he knows how helpless these are who have suddenly broken loose from +their old tribal laws and customs--some of which were beneficial--and +have been cast on the untried sea of strange and bewildering +surroundings, without any anchor to hold or compass and chart to guide +them--I say it is because the missionary knows all this and much more +that he can rejoice over such a crowd of fine-looking, stalwart men and +women as were gathered there that day to commemorate the sufferings and +death of our Lord. + +He sees in the company before him Christian homes, free from ignorance +and superstition, free from witchcraft and pagan worship, free from the +beer, the filth, and degradation of their neighbors. He sees in this +company, homes free from the licentiousness and vice so common not only +among their heathen neighbors, but, sad to say, also among some of their +white ones. The missionary can rejoice that here are men and women who +have the Anchor in their souls and are standing as beacon lights to +their heathen neighbors and friends. It means much to them on the one +hand to break off from their old heathen lives; it means much on the +other not to be allured by the evils of the white man's civilization and +the inducements so often thrown out to lead lives of sin. To come out +from all these and accept Christ as Savior and be true to Him would seem +to be an almost Herculean task, and much greater than those in Christian +lands are called upon to perform. But we know that it has been and is +being accomplished. While one feels to rejoice over these sheep, at the +same time he bears a heavy heart for those other ones which have been +devoured by the grievous wolves. + +The missionary is about the only force that makes for righteousness +among the natives, and he would often feel that his task was an +impossible one did he not continually realize that he is only under +orders of Him Who is sure in the end to win. Lest some may think that I +am overestimating some of these things, let me again quote Mr. Evans, +who is an authority on native affairs from a governmental standpoint. He +says: + +"What is effecting the most profound change in the native is his contact +with the white man at all points, and this change is proceeding with +ever-accelerating speed. The fundamental difference between these +changes and those wrought by the missionaries is that, in the former +there is little building up of any salutary influence to take the place +of the old wholesome restraints, whilst in the latter religion and +morality are inculcated and replace the checks weakened or destroyed." + +The work in Southern Rhodesia is by no means completed; it is only +fairly begun. The natives are just beginning to see the advantages of +Christian teaching, and are calling more and more loudly for schools, +and they are eagerly availing themselves of the opportunities afforded. +There is a large field to work and the time is opportune. Let every one +of God's children ask himself what his duty and privileges are in taking +possession of the country for God. Our people should have at least one +more station of white missionaries here as well as others for native +workers. Shall we leave to themselves these people, who are emerging +from centuries of darkness, to the influence of a corrupt civilization? +Our missionaries are laboring to the extent of their ability and the +means at their disposal. The work can advance only as it is backed up by +the people of the homeland, together with their prayers and money. +Something depends upon you, my reader, whoever you may be. What part +have you had in the winning of these souls? What part are you going to +have in those yet unborn into the Kingdom? + + + + +PART TWO + + + + +MACHA MISSION + +"Lo, I am with you always, even unto the end of the world" + + --Matt. 28: 20 + + + + +CHAPTER ONE + +Bound for the Zambezi + + +Africa is a gigantic and dark continent. In fact, it is several +continents in one. Although nearly every one seems to know something of +its immensity, yet very few persons realize it unless they have resided +for a time in some portion of its vast interior; even then their +knowledge of it is likely to be quite vague. For centuries travelers of +various nationalities sought to penetrate it, many of whom perished in +the effort, while others brought back wonderful stories of peril and +adventure. + +It remained for David Livingstone, however, to unearth the secrets of +Central Africa and to expose to the gaze of Christendom something of its +condition and needs. He inspired missionaries to press into the narrow +opening thus made, and to carry the light of the Gospel to the millions +bound in chains of darkness and blackest midnight. Messengers have been +heeding the call and have been kindling fires, one here and another +there, in the darkness. + +In dealing with missionary work in Africa we must continually keep in +mind the fact that the natives are much scattered. The population cannot +definitely be ascertained, but it is variously estimated at from 130 to +150 millions of people. These are scattered over a territory equal in +area to the United States of America, Europe, India, and China +combined. In certain portions, such as the Sahara and Kalahari Deserts, +there are very few natives, while the lower plains and river valleys +support a large population. These alluvial plains, where nature affords +an abundance of food with a minimum of labor, offer great inducements to +the easy-going Africans. Here they settle in large numbers, not greatly +inconvenienced by the unhealthfulness of the locality. Pampered by the +amazing prodigality of nature on all sides, so that they need not exert +themselves much for food, and requiring little clothing in this mild +temperature, they settle themselves to the enjoyment of their animal +natures. + +The missionary, as he enters these swamps, which are reeking with +malaria and other death-breeding diseases, takes his life in his hand; +for Africa has the unenviable reputation of being the "white man's +graveyard." It is true the medical fraternity are fast solving some of +the problems which confront everyone entering the country, yet many +difficulties still lie in the path of the missionaries who desire to +settle in the more densely populated regions. + +In the old days of Dr. Livingstone and his immediate successors, it +required almost a small fortune to penetrate Central Africa. In addition +to this the way by wagon or by native carriers was long and tiresome, +and the traveler was subject to delays by swollen rivers, dying oxen, +and many other things. He was often in danger of his life by wild +animals or still wilder men, so that some never reached their desired +goal. Even after missionaries had succeeded in establishing mission +stations, they suffered much in health from exposure and lack of +comfortable homes, and they were obliged to live on the coarse native +food much of the time, on account of the difficulty in procuring +supplies, even though they might have had sufficient money to procure +better food. + +At the present day the railroads are eliminating much of this +difficulty. Their advance is accomplishing more than any other agency in +opening up the continent to the Gospel. They are extending right into +the heart of the country, making use of the plateaus on which to build, +and bringing the necessities of life and even many of its luxuries +within reach of the white inhabitants. + +In the year 1904 the Cape to Cairo Railroad was completed as far as the +Victoria Falls on the Zambezi River, a distance by rail of 1,642 miles +from Cape Town. This part of Africa as far as the Zambezi is generally +known as South Africa. If one examines a map, it is easy to be seen that +in size it is a very inconspicuous part of the African Continent; but in +point of modern civilization and twentieth-century methods of doing +things it compares very favorably with any other country. Especially can +this be said of the towns and vicinity, but there are yet many natives +who are without the Gospel. On my return to Africa, in 1905, the +railroad was being extended north of the Zambezi, the objective point at +that time being Broken Hill, making a total distance of 2,016 miles from +Cape Town. + +The facts just mentioned had nothing to do with our call to interior +Africa, for that came before we knew what the actual conditions were and +before the railroad north of Bulawayo was built. The opening made by +the railroad, however, had much to do in making the advance practicable +at this time. + +After our return from America we engaged in the work at Matopo and +Mapani for nearly a year, and continued looking to the Lord to ascertain +His will as to the time of opening the new work, for we were hoping that +there would be other missionaries ready to move out. Money was on hand +for the purpose. This meant something. While I was in America, as the +needs of pagan Africa were set forth, one after another would slip a +bill into my hand, saying, "I too want a share in pushing on that work +into the interior of Africa." What did it all mean--the lack of workers, +the ready money and the intense longing in my own soul to carry the +Light to those people? We had now waited a year with no prospects of +others being ready to go. + +[Illustration: Victoria Falls Bridge.] + +Brother Steigerwald was sending to America for a large Studebaker wagon, +and he advised that one also be ordered for the forward move, that both +might be sent out together. These arrived in May, 1906. Ndhlalambi had +felt called some time before to carry the Gospel beyond the Zambezi. +Although he was quite young, he was proving to be a very steadfast and +useful helper, both at Matopo and at Mapani Mission. When they were +opening the latter station, Sister Emma Doner wrote to me--as I was in +America at the time--and said, "Ndhlalambi is such a good helper in +erecting our buildings, as Levi has been quite sick. Perhaps the Lord is +preparing him so that he can build for you in Interior Africa." At that +time, however, I little thought that it would be necessary to rely +upon him for that work. + +The time drew near when a decision must be made, either to move out or +to postpone the opening of the work for another year, and much time was +spent out among the rocks alone with Him. From a human standpoint it +appeared to be a hazardous undertaking to enter such a new country, and +many obstacles were in the way. I had been invited to spend the year at +Mapani Mission, and was quite ready to do so, providing that was the +Lord's will for me. On the other hand, if He desired that the work +beyond the Zambezi be opened this year, all power is in His hands; it +would be a small affair for Him to go before and prepare the way. The +more we looked to Him to ascertain His will the stronger the conviction +became that the time was at hand. Sister Adda Engle also expressed +herself as being ready for the work. The rest of the missionaries were +requested to make the matter a special subject of prayer. They did so, +and a few felt that an onward move was to be made; but the majority said +they did not have a clear understanding of the Lord's will in reference +to it. + +It was hoped that Brother Steigerwald might be able to accompany us to +open up the work; but there were so many lines of work engaging his +attention at the time that it was impossible for him to leave. He, +however, fitted out the new wagon with a strong body and a fine large +tent, 6 x 13 feet over the whole, and as far as possible put everything +in readiness for the journey. + +Our company included, besides Sister Engle and myself, the two native +Christian boys, Ndhlalambi Moyo and Gomo Sibanda. The latter was going +chiefly for the manual labor. They were both trustworthy and we knew +they could be depended upon. It was again the 4th of July when we +started on this northern journey, just eight years from the day on which +we had left Bulawayo for Matopo. Brother and Sister Steigerwald and +Sister Frey accompanied us as far as Bulawayo, expecting to aid us in +purchasing supplies and to assist us in getting started north. Mr. +Jackson, the English magistrate at Fort Usher, gave us letters of +introduction to the Civil Commissioner and the Administrator of Northern +Rhodesia, as the country north of the Zambezi is called. + +Unfortunately it was found, on reaching Bulawayo, that much of the +business could not be attended to that week on account of holidays, so +that our friends were obliged to return to their station. The Monday +following was a busy and trying day on account of the many things to be +attended to and the long distances to be traversed. We wished to +purchase supplies for the greater part of the year, for we knew not what +awaited us and where the next would come from; and it was also necessary +that all the goods be sent on the same train on which we went. +Everything was finally accomplished, and July 10, 1906, found all our +supplies, about 2,800 pounds in weight, and the wagon, on the train +bound for Victoria Falls. + +As Sister Engle and I entered our compartment on the train and began to +move northward, many conflicting emotions stirred within us, and it was +with much trembling and looking to the Lord that we went forward. We +knew not what opposition confronted us; for we had been informed by +those who knew something of the country that the officials might not +allow us to proceed farther than the Zambezi River. Only the +consciousness that we were under Divine orders gave courage to proceed. +We had the promise, "Commit thy way unto the Lord; trust also in Him and +He shall bring it to pass," and we were resting in it. + +The journey of 280 miles to Victoria Falls is through new territory. +There were no towns--nothing but small station houses--and the country +is wild and in some places quite jungly-looking and infested by numerous +wild animals. At Wankie we passed through the region of the coal-mining +district, where there is a large vein of coal which is a most valuable +adjunct of the railroad. Victoria Falls was at that time the terminus of +the government-owned railroads, and the limit to which regular trains +ran; and we could not avoid wondering what was awaiting us beyond that. + +As we stepped off the train at Victoria Falls a gentleman approached us, +and introducing himself as a forwarding agent, inquired if he could be +of any assistance to us. He inquired if we were not from Matopo Mission, +and at the same time stated that he had met Mr. Steigerwald in Bulawayo. +What a surprise and relief it was to us, for he seemed to be God's +especial messenger, sent to help us on the way. When he learned of the +situation he at once set our minds at rest by the assurance that he +would attend to everything and see that the goods and wagon, as well as +ourselves, were safely taken across the Zambezi River to the town of +Livingstone, seven miles on the other side. The railroad at this time +was completed to Broken Hill, 374 miles farther north, but trains were +run only occasionally. We were obliged to wait at this place two days +before an engine could be procured to take us over to Livingstone. + +[Illustration: Main View of Victoria Falls, 1-1/4 Miles wide.] + +An opportunity was thus afforded of viewing that magnificent sight, +Victoria Falls, which was discovered by David Livingstone in 1855, but +of which little was known until comparatively late years. This +surpassingly grand bit of scenery is considered by some people to +outrival that pride of all Americans, Niagara Falls. In dimensions, at +least, it certainly does surpass the American wonder. The Zambezi is +1,936 yards wide where it takes its mighty plunge of 400 feet into a +vast chasm below, only to be turned into clouds of spray again and rise +perhaps a thousand feet into the air. Rainbows play about it, forming a +scene of wonderful beauty and grandeur. The rock over which the river +flows has a gigantic V-shaped crack about 300 feet wide, into which +chasm the water plunges. The opposite wall is unbroken, save at one +place where it forms a gorge 300 feet wide, through which narrow channel +all the water of the falls, over a mile wide, escapes. Along this +opposite wall of rock is "Rain Forest," so called because it is always +dripping and, needless to say, the vegetation here is most luxuriant. +Six hundred and sixty feet below the gorge is a railroad bridge, 650 +feet long and 420 feet above the water, the central span being 500 feet. +The view of these falls greatly changes at different seasons of the +year. To see them at the height of their magnificence, one should visit +them at the close of the rainy season in April, as at that time the +volume of water is much greater. At the close of the dry season, in +October or November, when the water is shallow, the Falls are often much +broken in some places. As this is one of the greatest of the sights of +South Africa, thousands of tourists visit the scene, and a hotel had +been erected near the railroad at this place. + +Our agent informed us that on July 13 an engine would come and transfer +ourselves, together with the goods and wagon, to the Livingstone station +on the north side. For this purpose the wagon and goods were loaded on +an open truck, and as there was no passenger car, we too climbed up into +the wagon, on the truck, and in this manner crossed the Zambezi on that +railroad bridge, 420 feet high. At Livingstone the car was met by +another agent who, with his boys, assisted by ours, unloaded the car and +placed the wagon under the shade of a tree. Here it was fitted up as a +dwelling-place for Sister Engle and myself for the remainder of the +journey. It was a home on wheels. We praised the Lord that He had cared +for us this far on our journey and permitted our feet to be planted on +the north side of the river. Oxen could not be taken beyond the Zambezi +for fear of carrying disease, so it was necessary that some be purchased +before we proceeded farther. + +This part of the country, like Southern Rhodesia, is under control of +the British Charter Company, but with a separate government. Unlike +that, it does not belong to the English by right of conquest, but +through concessions granted by Lewanika, the King of Barotseland, and +paramount chief of the country, for the purpose of exploration and +development. The country is occupied by three main tribes--the Barotse, +living along the Upper Zambezi and west of Victoria Falls; the Baila, or +Mashukulumbwe, as they are often called, living along the Kafue River +and north, and the Batonga, on the plateau between the Kafue and Zambezi +Rivers and east. + +Those familiar with his life will remember that this is part of the +country explored by Dr. Livingstone during his first and second great +missionary journeys through Central Africa, from 1853 to about 1860. The +Barotse at that time were subject to the Makololo, who had emigrated +from Basutoland and settled along the Upper Zambezi. The Makololo +warriors were also responsible for the death of the first party of +missionaries to this part of the country. I refer to the expedition +under Price and Helmore, sent out in 1859 in response to Dr. +Livingstone's urgent call. Nearly all of this party of missionaries died +from poison administered by these natives, to the great sorrow of the +African explorer. His memorable prophecy, "God will require the blood of +His servants at the hands of you Makololo," was soon fulfilled. It is +said that just four years afterwards the Barotse arose against their +rulers, the Makololo, and slew them and asserted their independence. + +It was in this part of Africa too that Livingstone first saw some of the +evils of the slave trade, and in 1873 he wrote to Mr. Gordon Bennett: +"When I dropped among the Makololo and others in this central region, I +saw a fair prospect for the regeneration of Africa. More could have been +done in the Makololo country [which is today known as Barotseland] than +was done by St. Patrick in Ireland, but I did not know that I was +surrounded by the Portuguese slave trade; a barrier to all +improvement.... All I can say in my loneliness is, may Heaven's richest +blessing come down on every one, American, Englishman, Turk, who will +help to heal this open sore of the world." A very remarkable +circumstance connected with this utterance is that he evidently did not +imagine at that time that the healing was to come first from yet another +country, France. Just six years (in 1879) after those memorable words +were uttered, Rev. F. Coillard settled in Barotseland. He and his heroic +wife deserve of all people in this part of the country to be called +Livingstone's successors. + +These natives could speak the Suto language, and as the Scriptures had +been translated into that language for years, those books could be used +here among the Barotse, just as Zulu could be used in Matabeleland. In +the opening up of that work, Christian natives from Basutoland, a +thousand miles farther south, volunteered to accompany Coillard. It is +said, "Just on the border of Barotseland one of these native +evangelists, Eleazer, died. 'God be blessed,' he exclaimed, when he knew +that he must give up his heart's desire of preaching Christ to the +Barotse, 'God be blessed! the door is open. My grave will be a finger +post of the mission,'" as quoted by James Steward. So that it may be +seen that consecrated Africans also did their part in helping to heal +this sore. Coillard and his successors have ever since carried on a most +far-reaching work in Barotseland. About twenty years after the work was +opened, Brother Engle had the great pleasure of accidentally meeting +this venerable messenger of the Cross, Mr. Coillard, in a store in +Bulawayo. His hair then was white, but he was as intensely interested as +ever in his work, and was in a hurry to be back to his field of labor. +As, at that time, there was no railroad farther than Bulawayo, he had to +travel about 300 miles by ox-wagon and then by boat on the river. The +labors of the missionaries and the advantages of good government have +accomplished marvelous results in bringing peace and safety to this +valley, yet even at this late date there are not wanting those who, if +they dared, would rejoice to resurrect the old slave trade. + +Among the Baila tribe the Primitive Methodists of England, after +encountering many difficulties along the way, had begun a work in 1893 +at Nkala, and a few years later at Nanzela. In 1905 they also opened one +at Nambala, about seventy-five miles north of the Kafue. Although they +were doing excellent work, they had as yet been able to reach only a +small portion of the Baila tribe when we appeared on the scene. There +were no missionaries among the Batonga tribe living on the plateau +between the Zambezi and Kafue Rivers, until 1915, when a mission was +opened about 175 miles northeast of Livingstone by Mr. Anderson, of the +Seventh Day Adventist Mission. This was just one year before we reached +the country. Livingstone in his journey had passed through much of this +country, including Kalomo, Monze Tete, and the Kafue River. + + + + +CHAPTER TWO + +From the Zambezi River to Macha + + +The town, Livingstone, was, in 1906, quite small, and consisted chiefly +of government buildings, postoffice, native stores, railway station, and +shops. Some of these buildings, especially those owned by the +government, were well made and ant-proof. The town was at a short +distance from the railway station and seemed to have been built on a +hill of yellow sand, which sand was so deep that walking seemed almost +impossible, and riding was very little improvement over walking. + +Our first step was to call on the Commissioner, Mr. Sykes, and present +the letter of introduction. He met us in a friendly and accommodating +spirit, but gave no encouragement to proceed on into the interior, owing +to the newness of the country and the unsettled condition of the natives +in some places. His version of the work accomplished by missionaries was +not very flattering, but that did not deter us in the least, as one +generally becomes accustomed to hearing such things. He, however, did +not offer to throw any obstacles in the way of our progress, but stated +that it would be necessary for us to have an interview with the +Administrator (governor) at Kalomo, the capital of North Rhodesia. He +expressed his willingness to do whatever lay in his power to aid us in +the undertaking, and advised that the purchasing of trained oxen for +drawing the wagon be left in his hands, and he would see to it that good +ones at a fair price were secured. This generous offer was most +gratefully accepted. We were also invited to his home, and were most +hospitably entertained by his estimable wife and his sister, and were +made to feel that as yet we were not beyond the reach of civilization. +They were living in a well-built mosquito-proof dwelling, which had been +made in England and sent out ready to be put together. + +The next day a European brought to our tent ten trained oxen, with a +note from Mr. Sykes, that he had proved these and found them +satisfactory. The price too was below what had been expected. Thus +equipped we were prepared to proceed to Kalomo, a distance by wagon road +of nearly one hundred miles. A boy was employed to lead the oxen and a +native government messenger was also sent along as guide. Gomo was to do +the driving, but the man of whom the oxen had been purchased said he did +not think the boy knew much about driving oxen, and so it proved later. +There were occasional passenger trains running north through Kalomo, and +some of the people at Livingstone had advised us to take the train that +far and let the boys bring the wagon. Others, however, thought it best +for us to stay by the wagon and supplies, as there was no suitable hotel +at Kalomo, and it would be over a week before the wagon could reach that +place, so we decided to remain with our supplies. + +The wagon was heavily laden, the roads were rough, and rivers +bridgeless. About ten miles out from Livingstone, in going over a piece +of rocky road, the reach of the wagon broke and further progress was +impossible. Had the drivers been accustomed to this wild country, and +the accidents incidental to it, they might soon have made another reach +with timber from the forest surrounding us, as they often did in later +years. At that time, however, we were helpless. What was to be done? +There was only one course open, and that was to take the wagon back to +Livingstone and have it mended. Some of the party remained with the +wagon and supplies and the rest of us walked back to Livingstone to see +what could be done. The question wanted to force itself upon us, Were we +after all mistaken as to the Lord's leadings? + +Mr. Sykes was again the Good Samaritan, when he heard our story. The +next morning he sent out conveyances to bring all back to Livingstone, +and he and Mrs. Sykes insisted on our occupying the guest house until +our wagon was repaired. There were no hotels in the place, and we were +informed that prospectors and others often made use of the government +house for an indefinite length of time. They said they were glad the +accident had not occurred forty or fifty miles out, beyond the reach of +help. We too felt deeply thankful that it had been no worse, and in a +short time we were made to rejoice that there had been an accident; for +it was soon evident that it was a blessing in disguise, and God had +permitted it for a purpose. There were two roads to Kalomo, and neither +was much traveled at the time. We learned that the one on which our +guide was taking us was not well supplied with water, was infested with +many savage beasts and the tsetse fly, which kills oxen, so that it was +altogether unsafe for the journey. + +While we were waiting at Livingstone this second time, a great deal of +information was gleaned in reference to the people and country north of +Kalomo, called the Mapanza Sub-district. We learned that the people +there were quiet and peaceable and that there were no missionaries in +that section of the country. We also met a gentleman from Kalomo, who +proved of assistance when we at last reached that place. Again +information was received that a number of wagons under Mr. King were +proceeding north to within a short distance of Kalomo, and if we could +travel in their company, all difficulties in regard to the route, the +finding of water for the oxen, and dangers along the way would be at an +end. A driver accustomed to the country was also secured to take the +wagon as far as Kalomo. Thus equipped we again started. As we left +Livingstone, Mr. Sykes exclaimed, "I feel more in favor now of your +going on than I did the first time." + +On the first day out our wagon came up with Mr. King's company, which +consisted of five large wagons, all heavily laden with goods and each +drawn by eighteen oxen. They were traveling north to within twenty-five +miles of Kalomo, and thence west and north to Tanganyika. We might have +delayed a year and not have found so good an opportunity of traveling by +wagon to Kalomo. We followed this train of wagons and had no anxious +thought in reference to the journey. Traveling by ox-wagons is done +chiefly at night, or from very early morning until 9 A. M. Then the oxen +are outspanned and allowed to graze and rest during the heat of the day, +while the travelers cook, eat, and rest. Late in the afternoon the oxen +are again inspanned and they travel until about 9 or 10 P. M., when they +stop for the night. One or two large fires of logs are built at each +wagon and kept burning through the night to ward off wild beasts from +the oxen. Animals are afraid of the fire; especially do lions love +darkness rather than light, their favorite nights for prowling being the +dark, rainy ones. This king of beasts, although the strongest, is by no +means the bravest. He does his loudest roaring in the midst of his +native haunts, far away from harm, and when near his prey, human or +otherwise, his tread is most stealthy and catlike. + +Before retiring for the night the natives, especially, cook and eat. +They often do with a small portion of food during the day, but before +retiring they like an abundance of good porridge and meat. They then +retire to rest, their favorite place being around the huge campfires. +Sister Engle and I were very comfortably situated in the tent of the +wagon. Two other difficulties likely to meet travelers in this part of +the country are scarcity of water and the tsetse fly. If the latter is +met with it is necessary to make the journey through the infested +district entirely by night. Since the uninitiated are not familiar with +the location of these districts, the oxen are often bitten without their +knowledge, and death is certain, for as yet no remedy for the bite has +been discovered. As for water, that is one of the great difficulties on +these African plateaus, and at one time we were obliged to travel +seventeen miles without seeing any. Since oxen, with heavily-laden +wagons, travel slowly, this required the oxen to be inspanned three +times before water was reached. Mr. King rode a horse and went in +advance to look for water and camping places, and also for game, which +generally furnishes a large proportion of the food, both for white +people and black ones on such trips. We ourselves would be favored with +a piece of delicious venison after such excursions. Water in casks was +carried along from one watering place to another for cooking and +drinking purposes, but it is never drunk without being boiled or made +into tea, and even then it is often very muddy-looking. + +Mr. King was familiar with the country, and had formerly traded with the +people in the vicinity of Macha, north of Kalomo, so that he could +furnish all necessary information about the Mapanza district, to which +we desired to go. This was the first time we heard the name of the place +which was destined to be the future mission station. The information +received from him proved invaluable later on, when the question of +location was being considered. As the way thus opened, step by step, we +were continually made to feel that the Lord was guiding and causing all +things to work together for good toward the opening of the work, and our +hearts were filled with gratitude for His many favors. + +The last forty miles of the journey were made alone, as we did not care +to travel on Sunday, and the other wagons were soon to leave and +proceed westward. We reached Kalomo August 1, after a journey of nine +days. This place, although the chief seat of government, could not be +designated a town. It was rather a scattered camp, containing two small +stores, a postoffice, and the dwellings and offices of the government +officials. The railway station was about three miles distant. Here the +fate of the undertaking was to be decided, as to whether we should be +permitted to proceed or be turned back. That morning in worship the Lord +gave us Isaiah 41: 10 for a promise, which greatly encouraged our +trembling hearts. We had now been absent from Bulawayo four weeks and +had received no mail, as it had been ordered sent to this place; so the +first journey was to the postoffice. I went for the mail alone, and +inquired first for myself. The clerk exclaimed, "And Miss Engle, too?" +and handed out a bundle of letters, all carefully laid together in a +place by themselves. Evidently we were expected, and visitors were not +common, especially women. + +It was necessary first to meet the secretary of the Lands' Department, +so in the afternoon Sister Engle and I proceeded to his office. He had +heard of our coming and absolutely refused a place in Mapanza district +on which we might locate. His reasons were more or less plausible, and +we were not wholly unprepared for his answer. We learned afterwards that +we were not the only persons who had failed to receive encouragement +from this gentleman. He added, however, that they could not hinder our +proceeding farther if we felt so inclined. He suggested our going to +Broken Hill, the terminus of the railroad, 280 miles northeast, as +there were some white inhabitants there. That no doubt would have been a +good opening for a mission station, as there were no missionaries there +at this time, and only one between Kalomo and that place. It did not, +however, seem to be the Lord's will for us to proceed that far, and +since there would be a new set of officials there to deal with, our +reception might not be any better. After sending our letter of +introduction to the Administrator, we turned toward the wagon to +consider and pray over the affair, realizing that a more perplexing +problem than a broken wagon was facing us. + +We had not proceeded far when a gentleman came to inform us that the +Administrator, who is the highest official in the country, requested an +interview. We were kindly received by the honorable gentleman and given +an opportunity of explaining in what part of the country we desired to +open a mission station, and the condition of the natives in that +section. He said that he saw no serious difficulty in the way, and that +he was in favor of allowing us to proceed and select a mission site. He +affirmed, however, that the unhealthfulness of the climate was the most +serious obstacle; and, since it was late in the season for us to put up +a mosquito-proof dwelling before the rainy and unhealthy season came, he +thought it best for us to select a place and then go south until the +rains were over. Otherwise we might be stricken with fever, a deadly +type of which, known as black water fever, is common in this section of +the country. We promised to consider seriously his advice, if a proper +dwelling could not be secured before the rains came. He then directed +us to the civil commissioner of that district, who especially encouraged +the undertaking, expressing his belief that we would encounter no +difficulty among the natives, since he was familiar with and had +jurisdiction of Mapanza district. He said, "The field is before you, and +as there are no other missionaries there, it is yours to occupy." He +also gave a letter to the magistrate at Mapanza and a native messenger +to show us the way. + +It was with thankfulness too deep for words that we returned to the +wagon. God was again verifying His wonderful promises. Praise His Holy +Name! Part of our freight had been sent to Kalomo by train, so after +procuring that from the station, we proceeded north about sixty miles +through Macha and other places to the camp of the official at Mapanza. +When about half the distance was traversed we unexpectedly came upon a +Dutch family living there all alone in the wilds. They had not been +there long and were not permanent settlers, but we managed to purchase +from them some fine imported chickens and some banana sprouts, all of +which have proved to be a most useful addition to our mission property. + +The natives were much scattered in a portion of the country through +which we passed until we approached the vicinity of Macha. Here they +were much more thickly settled, and also from this on to the camp at +Mapanza. At the latter place the official was not at home. While waiting +for him we concluded to visit some of the natives and went to the +village of one of the most prominent chiefs of this district, Mapanza +by name. There were thirty-five huts in the village. In the center of +this was a large cattle pen, and around it and the outside of the +palisade the huts were built in a circle, all opening toward the center. +As we entered this enclosure we were greeted with clapping of hands on +all sides. This is the native way of saluting their king and government +officials and sometimes other white people. In this instance the +uniformed government messenger accompanied us, and no doubt gave +prestige to our visit. The people of the village received us in a +friendly manner, but since their language was unintelligible to us we +soon returned to the wagon. + +The time of the official's return was uncertain and we preferred not to +locate in the immediate vicinity of the camp, so it was thought +advisable to return a short distance and select a mission site. Some of +the rivers through which we had safely come proved more difficult on the +return journey. Gomo had been driving since we left Kalomo and did +excellent work; but he found the Myeki River here at the camp very +difficult to cross. There are long, steep hills on either side of the +river, and in addition to this the bed of the bridgeless stream is quite +deep. Our oxen had done splendid work on the long journey from +Livingstone, but in recrossing this river they seemed unequal to the +effort. After struggling awhile one finally lay down and refused to +move. This was a new experience for us, but perhaps not for the boys. +Gomo used every inducement to make it rise, but to no avail. To our +amusement he finally, as a last resort, bit its tail. It was up in an +instant and the wagon moved on. We have since learned that oxen are +often more stubborn than that one, especially new ones. They sometimes +lie down and nothing will induce them to move. They will endure fire and +even death itself. + +We drove back and carefully looked over the various locations, and after +asking the Lord for direction, we finally decided upon our present site +on the bank of the Macha River, or rather on the hill above it. The tent +was removed from the wagon and placed on poles and prepared for +occupancy. This place is about fourteen miles from the camp at Mapanza, +and was reached August 17, a little over six weeks from the time we left +Matopo Mission. We had traveled in all about 485 miles, about 170 of +which was by ox-wagon. Our journal of the time records: + +"In all the Lord has wonderfully given us health and strength, and no +harm of wild beasts or wilder men has befallen us. The journey had been +far more successful in every way than we had anticipated, and we praise +the Lord that at last we are settled." + + + + +CHAPTER THREE + +The Opening of the Work at Macha + + +In selecting a location for the mission, the desire was to secure a +place sufficiently high so as to be at a distance from the low swamps, +breeding malaria and other deadly diseases, and yet near enough to the +river so as to have access to water. We desired also to have land in the +vicinity suitable for agriculture and industrial purposes in general, +and for the growing of fruit and vegetables. Then again, in addition to +the above requirements, the object of our coming to the country was not +to be lost sight of; _i. e._, the natives themselves. We desired to have +easy access to them so that they might receive the Gospel. All of these +requirements were prayerfully considered and we believe met in the +location of Macha. As eight years have passed since then, our +convictions have only been strengthened that it was the Lord's choice +for the work. + +As near as can be estimated the location is about 16-1/2 deg. south latitude +and 27 deg. east longitude, and is about 4,500 feet above sea level, so +that, although it is within the tropics, the altitude causes the climate +to be pleasant the greater portion of the year and as healthful a site +as can be secured in that section of the country. Along one side of the +3,000-acre mission farm is a small river, which gives name to the +locality, and the tent was pitched over half a mile from this river. +The place afforded excellent facilities for agriculture and fruit +growing. Especially can bananas and citrus trees be grown without +irrigation. The country is rolling and there are numerous rich valleys +capable of supporting many natives. There are wagon roads which have +been made by traders who go through the country and buy grain of the +natives in exchange for cloth, ornaments, blankets, and clothing. There +were no surveyed farms in this vicinity, and the only farmers near lived +over twenty miles from Macha, but numerous villages of natives are +within walking distance and wagon road. + +At the opening of Macha Mission there was a station of Primitive +Methodists northwest at a distance of at least sixty miles, and the one +of the Seventh Day Adventist Mission at about the same distance +northeast. With the exception of these two places one might go a hundred +miles in any other direction and not find a mission station, so that we +could certainly feel that we were not intruding into the territory of +any other missionaries. The natives in this part of the country had +heard absolutely nothing of Christ, and they knew not what missionaries +were or how they differed from other people. + +Our little tent, 6 x 13 feet, was sufficiently commodious for eating and +sleeping, but all the work had to be performed on the outside in the +shade of a large tree, near which the tent had been placed. Beneath this +tree also our supplies were piled off the ground and away from the +destructive white ants, of which the ground was everywhere full. We had +no cookstove then, and all our cooking was done over an open fire, +while bread was baked in a large, flat-bottomed iron pot with long legs. +This was placed over a bed of live coals, while coals were also placed +on the iron cover. Some very good yeast bread came from that iron pot, +novel perhaps to Americans, but familiar to Africanders. Many people +traveling through the country made use of the ant hills as bake-ovens. + +The Christian boys who accompanied us, as well as some younger ones who +came for work, camped at a short distance from the tent, and at night +slept around the fire until huts could be built for them. Before the +mission site had been agreed upon two young boys came and asked for +work. We took them, and one of these has been one of our most faithful +helpers. As grain was plentiful in the neighborhood there was no +difficulty in securing food for the natives. Many of the older people, +men and women, came to see and welcome us. Every effort was put forth +toward erecting buildings before the rains came on, but as fires had +swept over the country and destroyed most of the grass, it was evident +that our chief difficulty would be in procuring thatching grass. This +difficulty was obviated by a man at Mapanza, who was erecting a house +for the commissioner, offering us for a small sum a lot of grass that he +had on hand. Some time later our journal is as follows: + + These have been busy days; much work has been crowded into them. + Building and making furniture have occupied the attention of all of + us, and everything has had to be done with native material and few + tools, which have increased the amount of labor. The poles had to + be hauled + five or six miles and some of the grass for thatching was brought + fourteen miles. Ndhlalambi has been a faithful and excellent + workman. He is not as quick as some, but few natives would have + succeeded in making better buildings, as he is careful and + painstaking in all he does. Gomo is just the opposite; he is just + as willing, but is no builder. He has, however, been very useful in + hauling poles and grass, and mud for plastering, and he performed a + splendid service in venturing among the Baila (a warlike tribe + north of us) and purchasing for us two cows. Sister Engle and I + have been bending all our energies toward helping with the building + in the more technical parts, so that the work might be accomplished + as soon as possible, and we have been spending some of our time in + making furniture. There has been no difficulty in securing natives + to work for us, and they have all worked faithfully under + Ndhlalambi's supervision. + + There seems to be nothing to mar the work and location thus far, + except the savage beasts, which prowl around at night, a terror to the + domestic animals and to ourselves. When we pray, "Keep us from harm + and danger," it is a more genuine prayer than formerly. Many nights + the howls of the wolves and hyenas are to be heard, and one night some + of the boys awoke to see in the firelight the eyes of a hyena glaring + at them. Some of the natives built a high, strong pen for our cattle, + and the first night they were enclosed in it a lion tried to force its + way in, as indicated by the spoors the next morning. Leopards have + also been seen. These evidences, as well as the stories told by + others, convince us that there are wild beasts in the neighborhood, + yet the Lord is able to keep and has thus far kept us from harm. + +The 91st Psalm was very precious in those days. + +These first buildings were constructed in a manner very similar to those +at Matopo Mission, except that it was thought advisable to build the +main part of the house all in one, so as to obviate the necessity of +going outside in passing from one room to another--a very important +consideration in such a wild country. The scarcity of grass limited the +size of the house to a certain extent. It was 26 x 14 feet, with a +veranda around three sides to protect from the sun and rain, and was +divided into three small compartments opening into one another, the +small doorways being closed by curtains. As there was no seasoned lumber +to be had, there was only one outside door, and this was made from one +of the boxes in which the goods had been packed. A table was +manufactured from another box, and the bedsteads, as well as nearly all +the rest of the furniture, were manufactured from native unseasoned +timber and draped with calico. A muslin ceiling was a necessity to +prevent the sawdust from falling from the rafters. + +On the inside of the house the walls were carefully plastered up against +the thatched roof, and the openings for windows were closed by fine wire +gauze netting to exclude mosquitoes. An important question was how to +make a screen door for the only outside door of the building, as +unseasoned timber would not answer the purpose. The pole of the wagon +had been broken soon after our arrival at Macha, and one from the forest +put in its place; and since this broken piece of timber was of hardwood +and sufficiently long for a door frame, we decided to make use of it for +that purpose. It was sawed and with considerable labor made into a frame +and proved quite satisfactory. Sister Engle, who was always patient and +painstaking in her work and full of resources, deserves much credit for +this and many other things with which the house was equipped. That +screen door is still doing excellent service after a lapse of eight +years. After it was finished it was found that to fit it into the door +frame so as to make it mosquito proof was no small task. The door frame +had been manufactured from unseasoned native timber and was greatly +warped. After much chiseling and shaping even this feat was +accomplished, and the result was a mosquito-proof house, for that season +at least. Mosquito nets for the beds had also been brought along. + +A small kitchen was also built and a hut for the native brethren before +the rains came. The grass, stumps, and underbrush were cleared off all +around the buildings and at some distance from them. This is customary +in this part of the country, and it is done for the purpose of removing +the hiding places of mosquitoes, snakes, and the like. Although more +natives were employed the first few months at Macha than at Matopo, we +experienced no difficulty in dealing with them; perhaps because we were +more familiar with their character, and our native Christians too were +quite capable of understanding them. + +During the progress of the work, the advice of the Administrator had not +been forgotten, as it was our earnest desire to do that which was best, +and we looked to the Lord for guidance. It seemed advisable to remain. +Contrary to his expectations, a mosquito-proof dwelling-house had been +constructed, and the work which was started would certainly have +suffered if we had gone away. The boys who had accompanied us were in +every respect proving themselves capable and reliant; the natives were +quiet and respectful; and not the least difficulty in the way of our +return was the long, dangerous trip to Kalomo to reach the railroad. We +had safely come that way once, yet we dreaded the long trip back, +perhaps because we did not believe that it was the Lord's will for us to +make it. The post was brought to our door by the government messenger as +he passed on his way to Mapanza, and a trader near offered to bring out +from Kalomo any needed supplies. + +All our needs thus far were abundantly supplied by a loving Father. All +praise to Him Who "is able to do exceeding abundantly above all that we +ask or think." Even in our most sanguine expectations before coming to +the country we had not thought to be so well provided for. He in His +infinite wisdom and forethought had gone before and prepared every step +of the way; He had opened every door and enabled the mission to be thus +planted in raw heathendom where Christ had not been named. The location +proven by years of trial could not have been improved, for He makes no +mistakes. The call and the desire for the extension of His Kingdom, +which He had put into our hearts before ever Africa was reached, was +thus being fulfilled. He had done and was doing His part; what more +could we ask? Yea, we were weighted down and humbled by the multitude of +favors which He was showering upon us. The only thing to mar our peace +at this time was the consciousness that our friends and some of the +government officials were uneasy on our account. We saw no cause for +fear, and were conscious that the continued prayers ascending in behalf +of ourselves and the work were availing before God, and that we were at +the place where He desired us to be. + +After the buildings were completed and the rains came the boys put forth +every effort to dig some of the ground and plant grain and vegetables. +This had to be done by hand, as the plow had not yet arrived. + +In the many duties incident to starting a new station, the spiritual +part of the work was not neglected. A little visiting among the people +was done both by Sister Engle and myself and by the native brethren. An +attempt was also made each Sunday to instill into the minds of the +people something of the sacredness of the day. Since a number of natives +came daily to work at the mission, they were informed that we did not +work on Sunday, but worshiped God instead. It was thus not difficult to +assemble twenty-five or thirty on Sunday for services. These were always +married people, with the exception of the few boys who were staying at +the mission to work. The younger people, and especially the girls and +children, were conspicuous only by their absence. It was the same at the +village; none except men and women were to be seen, so that at first we +all concluded that there were no children in the neighborhood. Later it +was learned that these and all the unmarried girls ran and hid when we +approached a village. + +We could invite the people on Sunday, or we could go to see them in +their homes, but to speak to them was a more difficult affair. There was +the same difficulty in the language as at Matopo, but with a +difference. There we had a translation of the Bible, dictionaries and +grammars, and could at least read the Word to them. Here we were among +the Batonga, and their language, although belonging to the same great +Bantu family of languages, was quite distinct from that of Southern +Rhodesia. There were no translations, no dictionaries, at the time the +mission opened, so that the task of acquiring it was no small one. We +soon realized that we had not sufficiently appreciated our blessings in +Southern Rhodesia. Here it was necessary to have notebook and pencil +continually on hand and write down the words as they fell from the lips +of the natives; nor was it an easy task to decide upon the spelling of +the words; especially was there difficulty in distinguishing the letters +_l_ and _r_. The same word as it fell from the lips of one native would +seem to have an _l_, and as spoken by another it would be _r_. Of course +there were many similar difficulties. + +One of our first aims was to secure the expression for "What is that?" +"_Chi nzi echo?_" and with that as a basis the names at least of many +things could be learned. Then too it is not so difficult to learn to use +expressions common in everyday duties and the material things about one; +but to secure a suitable vocabulary for instruction in the Gospel is +generally a difficult task, and missionaries differ widely in reference +to terms for spiritual things. + +The native vocabulary is by no means meager, and one is often surprised +that people living such seemingly narrow lives as they do have in +constant use such a copious vocabulary. Their thoughts as a rule can be +expressed in fewer words than in English. For instance, they will say +bona, to see; _bonwa_, to be seen; _bwene_, to have seen; _bonana_, to +see each other; _boneka_, to be visible; _bonela_, to see for; and +_bonesha_, to see clearly, and some verbs have additional forms. Again, +in the use of verbs, such as _go_, they will have different words to +express various phases of it: _Ya_, to go; _benda_, to go stooping, as +after game; _fwamba_, to go quickly; _endenda_, to go for a walk; +_ambuka_, to go aside, or astray; and so on for eighteen different +words. + +The especial difficulty of the missionary is to secure the proper words +to convey spiritual conceptions not generally met with in their +comprehension; such as, _faith_, _holy_, _save_, _cross_, _heaven_, and +even in the word for God there is often a difference of opinion among +missionaries as to the word to be used. Among all tribes there seems to +be a word for God, but the conception upon which it is based is so +degrading that one often hesitates to make use of it in referring to the +Holy and Omnipotent One Whom we have learned to revere. Two opinions are +prevalent among missionaries in reference to some of the words. One is +to make use of the words already found in a language and to seek to +build up upon those words a new conception altogether foreign to the +native line of thought. Others think that it is better to introduce a +new word and attach the desired meaning to it. I think it is safe to say +that the former is the method generally employed among translators, but +whether it is in all instances the best method is open to question. + +Natives very quickly learn the language of other tribes, and so it was +in this instance. Our native Christians soon acquired this language. A +few of those working for us could after a manner speak that "Esperanto +of South Africa," "Kitchen Kafir," and this enabled them from the first +to understand one another, in a slight degree at least, and gave them a +common basis from which to pass to the Tonga language proper, spoken by +the people about us. As Ndhlalambi, who took the name of David, had felt +the call definitely to give the Gospel to these people, and had had +experience in evangelistic work, both at Mapani and at Matopo Mission, +he was able in a comparatively short time to give the Gospel +intelligently to the people, and also to assist us in acquiring the +language. Of course this was by no means accomplished in a few months, +or even in a year, for it was often difficult for even him to secure the +proper words in spiritual language. These helpers too had their +difficulties in the work, and had their misunderstandings with the +natives. One day one of them was quite discouraged in an attempt to make +some natives understand properly, and he exclaimed, "I have a great deal +more sympathy with the white man now in his endeavors to make the people +understand, and to teach them how to work. These people seem so dull to +me, and I know why our masters became so out of patience with us." + +There was at first no attempt at opening school; but stencils and +cardboard had been brought along, and with these charts were printed in +the syllables and sentences of the language as nearly as we understood +it. Sister Engle made use of these charts in teaching, by the light of +the campfire in the evenings, the young boys who had come to work for +us. Our two native helpers also continued their studies and were +instructed whenever there was time for it after the buildings were +completed. + +As the first Christmas drew near, a query arose as to how it should be +observed, and whether services should be held, since no one could yet +speak very well the language. David and Gomo were eager for services, +saying that they would put forth every effort to speak to the people +about Christ. We longed to give the people something on that day as an +expression of our good will, but could not see the way open to do so. At +Matopo Mission salt was always given, but in this part of the country +salt was very expensive and there was only a little on hand, and we were +not prepared to give them meat, as we had little opportunity of +procuring game for ourselves. Services, however, were announced for the +day, and early in the morning some natives began to arrive, curious to +know what the day was like. + +In the morning Sister Engle and I were sitting at the table on the +veranda, eating our breakfast, speaking of the plans for the day, and +expressing a wish that there was some food to set before the people. +While speaking, we heard a goat bleat, and presently two natives, one of +whom was carrying a goat on his shoulders, came toward us. They put the +goat down on the ground before us, saying as they did so, "The Chief, +Macha, sent you this as a present." Here was the answer to our wish and +unuttered prayer. Another native headman a short time previously had +also presented a goat, and we had bought one, and these three would be +sufficient for the dinner. Our praises ascended simultaneously, and we +realized that the promise was again verified, "Before they call, I will +answer; and while they are yet speaking I will hear." + +The native brethren entered heartily into the preparations, and with the +assistance of the others, they soon had the animals killed and dressed, +and in the cooking kettles. Fortunately there was cornmeal on hand which +also furnished sufficient porridge. We rejoiced as we saw the people +coming that there was food to set before them, even though the Gospel +messenger could not be given satisfactorily; but there was still a +greater and more blessed surprise in store. + +There were ninety-six grown people assembled, chiefly fathers and +mothers, heads of families, and these were all seated along the veranda +and in the shade of the tent. David took up the subject of Christmas and +its origin by first reading it from the Zulu Testament, which, of +course, they did not understand. Before he had read much the Lord sent a +first-class interpreter, in the person of a Mutonga native who had +worked for some time in Bulawayo, and there learned to read and speak +the Zulu language and to understand the Gospel. He was not, however, a +Christian, as we learned, but he proved a most ready and excellent +interpreter for the day; and as the message was given in Zulu, he as +readily interpreted it into the vernacular of the people. + +The Lord especially anointed our brother David for the message that day, +and he most ably and feelingly presented the wonderful story of the +birth and life of our Savior and His great mission in the redemption of +the world. Perhaps the unique opportunity had some effect upon my +feelings, but it seemed to me that I never at any other time heard the +subject so well handled before a congregation of natives as it was on +that day. The native men, especially, listened most attentively +throughout that long discourse. Tears came into my eyes as I looked upon +those seamed faces before me, those middle-aged and elderly men who, for +the first time in their lives, had an opportunity of hearing of Him Who +had come to earth nineteen hundred years before to redeem them. How much +of the _makani mabotu_ (glad tidings) they grasped at the time it is +difficult to ascertain. + +At the close of the discourse some of the rest of us spoke for a short +time on the same theme, and also explained the cause of our being among +them. Then after a hymn and prayer they were given their food. A +bountiful dinner had also been prepared for ourselves, a portion of +which we handed over to the two helpers who had so faithfully labored to +make the day a success. It is needless to say that they too thoroughly +enjoyed their dinner. In every way this first Christmas was one long to +be remembered, with nothing to mar the perfect harmony of the occasion. + + + + +CHAPTER FOUR + +School Work. Reinforcements + + +Up to this time nothing had been said about school, except that a few +boys had been taught in the evenings. There was no word for it in their +language, and learning had no meaning or attraction for them. They only +desired to work and earn money. + +The first herdboy came before the mission was located, and to him we +gave the name "Jim," as we did not fancy his native name. He remained +with us three months and then returned home and his cousin Tom came to +herd. Both of these boys manifested a great interest in what they heard, +and Tom was the first one to express a desire to be a Christian. Another +little boy ran off from home one day and begged permission to remain at +the mission. His mother immediately followed him and told him to go +home. He refused, and sitting down by a tree he put his arms around it +and clung to it; but the mother tore the poor little fellow from the +tree and dragged him away. Aside from these, very few children made +their appearance during the first five or six months of the mission, and +no girls came for a much longer period of time. The older people were +friendly from the first, but we often felt that some of them inspired +their children with a certain amount of fear of the newcomers. + +January 1, 1907, the people were informed that we wished to open a +school and that they should come to learn. By this we had in mind a +day-school, where the pupils would come in the morning and return home +at the close of the session. It had been impossible to build a +schoolhouse, since nearly all the grass had been burnt off before our +appearance on the scene. We, however, set up the little tent and built a +straw shed at one end of it for a temporary schoolhouse. + +As school and its advantages had no meaning to the people, no one came. +Then too it was the busiest season of the year. One, two, three weeks +passed, and still no one desired to learn. January passed and half of +February; still no scholars. This was a new experience. At Matopo the +children could scarcely wait until school opened, and they were the +pioneers there and gradually drew the older people to take an interest. +Here it was quite the reverse; the children were afraid of us, and would +run away, screaming, to hide in the tall grass when we approached their +villages. What was to be done? As usual we began to look to the Source +that never fails. + +The middle of February it was thought advisable to have a week of +prayer. All work was laid aside and the time was spent by the Christians +in interceding at a Throne of Grace, for we felt that perhaps we had +been too much occupied in temporal affairs. In the midst of this week of +prayer, on February 19, Macha, the chief, came, bringing his little boy, +about twelve years of age, and said, "Here is my son. I should like to +have him stay with the missionaries and learn to read and to work." +Here then was a direct answer to prayer. The chief of the district had +set an example to his people by thus bringing his child. This was a +signal for others, Apuleni, another boy of about the same age, came the +next week, and Mafulo and Kajiga followed; also others. Jim and Tom came +to remain and attend school, and by the end of the year there were +seventeen boys in all staying at the mission. + +These were nearly all boys from ten to sixteen years of age; a few were +older. None who applied were refused if they were willing to abide by +the regulations; and industrial work was at once inaugurated in +connection with the school. They were to be taught in school three and +one-half hours, and work early morning and afternoon, receiving, in +addition to their food and instruction, some clothing, and blankets for +the night. They were to remain at least a year before they could take +the clothing home with them. This stipulation was made to teach them +stability and prevent them from coming sufficiently long to secure +clothing and then leaving before they had properly earned it. The +arrangement proved very satisfactory. The few taxpayers who entered the +industrial school were given a small sum of money, provided they +completed the time agreed upon. They always had Saturday afternoon as a +half holiday, when they were to wash and mend their clothing and have +the remainder of the time for recreation. + +It was always our aim to make them understand that they were expected to +earn what they received by giving labor in return. We had no sympathy +with pupils who desired to learn and lie about and be idle the rest of +the time. Several who desired to bring their food and remain at the +mission without working were not allowed to do so, as we thought it +would prove detrimental, both to themselves and to the rest. We +preferred a dozen industrious and stable boys to many times that number +who were lazy and indifferent. It is true some of the smallest could +scarcely be said to earn their way at first, but they were at least +taught habits of industry. In their homes many of them spent their time +in an indolent fashion, their muscles being flabby and unused to +exercise; and often, when they came to us, they were too lazy even to +play at recess. Gradually they brightened up and took hold of the tasks +assigned them. One day one of the mothers came and inquired about her +son, a boy about thirteen years of age, and she was told that he was +digging in the garden. + +"Kanyama digging?" she asked, in great surprise. "Why, he does not know +how to work." + +The first rainy season was quite pleasant, and it passed with very +little sickness among our workers. It gave us an opportunity also of +learning something of the fertility of the soil on the mission farm. +Much of the land, and especially that in the valleys, was unusually +productive, and the grass grew to the height of ten feet. Our aim was to +make use of the rainy season to instruct the boys in agriculture and +horticulture and to raise sufficient grain and other food at least for +their consumption; and more than that, if possible, so that the expense +of keeping a number of boys would not rest so heavily on the mission. +This first season very little food was grown, because there had been no +land ready for sowing, but the plow came in January, and Gomo was +enabled to break two large gardens ready for sowing the following year. + +[Illustration: Macha Mission Huts, 1907.] + +As soon as the rainy season was at an end, building was again undertaken +by David and Gomo, together with the assistance of the native men and +schoolboys. Thatch grass had to be cut and poles hauled and seasoned. +The Matabele women were always eager to work for cloth, salt, or money, +but the Batonga women were not. It was impossible to make satisfactory +arrangements with them, either to cut grass or plaster, so that the men +and boys were obliged to do this also in connection with the rest of the +building, and they performed the work very satisfactorily. + +As there was only one small hut for the schoolboys, the first building +this second year was a hut, 13 x 16 feet, for their occupancy. Then a +building answering for church and school purposes was erected. This was +16 x 30 feet, with a large veranda in front, and was an excellent +building of the kind. The seats were made of bricks, built up in rows +and plastered over, and the floor was made of earth, pounded hard and +plastered. Another building, 14 x 20 feet, of poles and mud was also +built, and was divided into two rooms. It had a veranda all around it. +We were expecting missionaries out from America, and this last hut was +for their accommodation. These three buildings were all +respectable-looking ones and required a great deal of time and labor, so +that David and Gomo were very busy and deserved much credit for their +efficiency and perseverance. In addition to the outside work the +schoolboys were instructed in sewing, and two of them in housework. + +The school at first was very poorly equipped, as we had nothing but the +homemade charts and a few slates, and knew not where our books were to +come from, since we did not know the language sufficiently to make any. +Some of our needs in this respect were also supplied later. In the +latter part of 1907 Rev. E. W. Smith, a missionary at Nanzela, published +an excellent "Handbook of the Ila Language." This was a grammar and +dictionary combined, and the language was closely allied to that of the +Tonga. We secured this book about a year after we had reached Macha and +found it very helpful in acquiring the language, since the grammar and +many of the words of the two languages were similar. He also published +in that language an excellent first reader and a book of over one +hundred pages of Bible stories. This latter book is a very faithful +account of Genesis and Exodus, and contains some of the more interesting +parts of later Old Testament history. Not long after, there was also +published a book of questions containing the essentials of Christian +belief, and also many quotations from the Scriptures. With the exception +of the mode of baptism this was so essentially like our own faith that +it could be used to excellent advantage in Inquirers' Classes. + +All of these books proved of inestimable value to us in school and +church work. The pupils in the school proved bright and studious, and +before the end of this year some had started in the service of the Lord. + +It was almost impossible for us to spend much time out among the natives +during the rainy season, since the rivers were often swollen and +difficult to cross, and the grass was high, rendering walking difficult +and even dangerous on account of savage beasts lurking about. It is true +we seldom saw any of these animals, but that they were in the vicinity +we had no reason to doubt. Once when David was on top of the church, +putting on the rafters, a native from a neighboring kraal called to say +that three leopards were after his sheep. Our boys all ran to hunt with +spears and clubs, and some of them had a glimpse of the animals as they +disappeared in the tall grass. Another morning some of the men on coming +to work reported that they saw four lions crossing one of our plowed +fields. Occasionally we would hear a lion roaring on the opposite side +of the river, so that there was no reason to doubt the presence of +danger. + +Northwestern Rhodesia, where we found ourselves, is essentially the home +of wild and savage beasts and game of all kinds. In addition to smaller +animals there are the duiker, reedbuck, hartebeest, sable antelope, +eland, kudu, and many other varieties of game. The forests are full of +apes and baboons, and the gnu, the zebra, and the buffalo are to be +found. The mammoth elephant roams at will in herds or singly, the rivers +are full of crocodiles, and the larger ones abound in the ungainly +hippopotamuses. It is the paradise of hunters, and many avail themselves +of the opportunity for sport thus afforded; others for the gain to be +had from ivory and hides. + +The fact that there was not only game, but that there were also +dangerous animals lurking about, may have been the chief reason why we +never succeeded in starting a day-school at Macha. It was scarcely safe +for children to go alone back and forth to school. Even men seldom +traveled far alone, and they always went armed. A native would carry +three or four assegais, and many were supplied with guns. It is +surprising how much game they managed to kill with those old +blunderbusses. + +As stated previously, the presence of animals had much to do with the +amount of kraal visiting carried on. Sister Engle and I went, however, +quite frequently after the grass was burnt off in June, accompanied by +some of the schoolboys. As we neared a village, our approach was always +heralded by the barking of dogs and the screaming of children as they +ran away to be out of reach of the _mukua_ (white person). Every village +is supplied with its quota of dogs. One day I counted twenty-four in one +small village. Nor is their presence unnecessary in this animal-ridden +country, as they often succeed in driving off ferocious animals from the +herds, and they help supply their master with game. They are, however, +generally so lean and starved looking that one would like to see a +"Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals" among the natives. + +It was a long time before we could get a sight of the girls in the +kraals around us. Once, in company with Apuleni, we went to his home, +and here as everywhere we were warmly welcomed by the older people and +given an opportunity of telling them of the Savior, as well as our +limited vocabulary would allow. While we were sitting there talking to +some of the older people, Sister Engle said she thought there were some +girls in a hut near by. I arose to investigate. The older people saw the +move and laughingly told the girls of my approach; but it was too late +for them to escape. As I reached the door I saw five girls in the hut, +some of whom were nearly grown. Some began to scream and hide their +faces, and others sat trembling, not daring to look up. They appeared as +if they were afraid of being torn from their home by violence. Two of +these were sisters of the boy who accompanied us. It required much tact +and patience to finally gain the confidence of these wild children +surrounding us, and to help them realize that we would do them no harm, +but we at last won the day. + +During this dry season of 1907 word was also received of a threatened +native uprising. Our first information of this condition of affairs was +received from some officers who had come from the Transvaal and were +passing through on their way north on a hunting expedition. They said +that they did not know how serious the difficulty was, except that some +of the Europeans northeast had been ordered into the government camp. +The natives around us were quiet and law-abiding and gave no indication +that they were dissatisfied. They themselves were not of a warlike +nature, and they had in the past been harrowed and many of them +ruthlessly killed by the Matabele, the Barotse, and the Baila, each in +their turn, and they were now enjoying peace and quiet under the +beneficent rule of the English. They knew that they would gain nothing +by rebelling against the English, and the only condition that would +cause them to rise would be fear of their powerful neighbors. For this +reason we could see no cause for fear. They were, however, not ignorant +of the trouble in the country, and confided to David that Lewanika +wanted to fight. The powerful tribe north of us, the Baila, were +probably as dissatisfied as any. David at first did not tell us what he +had heard, for fear of alarming us, and we too said nothing to him at +once. Later, however, he told us and we gave him our information. The +danger at that time seemed past, and we would have allowed the affair to +rest; but it was learned that our fellow missionaries were uneasy on +our account. So we wrote to an official at Kalomo to inquire if they +anticipated a native uprising. He wrote, assuring us that whatever +danger there might have been, there was no more serious cause for alarm. + +[Illustration: Macha Boys and Schoolhouse.] + +In September of this year a young man from Cape Town came to assist in +the work. He was a nephew of our friend and benefactress, Mrs. Lewis, +and had been impressed with the importance of pressing on the work into +the interior; hence his presence at Macha. He suffered so much with +fever, however, that he concluded it was best to return south after a +stay of only a few weeks at the mission. + +On November 10 our long-looked-for colaborer, Mr. Myron Taylor, reached +Macha. This was a welcome and much-needed addition to our number. The +new building was ready for occupancy, and Brother Taylor entered +enthusiastically into the work before him. He came just at the opening +of the rainy season, and perhaps entered on the work with too much +vigor; for in the latter part of December he was laid low with the dread +African fever, and for a time his life was despaired of; but the Lord +raised him up. During that, his first rainy season, he had frequent +relapses of the fever and saw very few well days until the season was at +an end. He was not, however, discouraged, but continued at the work +whenever his health permitted. + +The boys who came to attend school remained, and others also applied for +admission, so that by the end of this second year there were thirty-two +staying with us, and they were becoming quite useful in the work, and +best of all were going on to know the Lord, and were formed into an +Inquirers' Class. + +This second rainy season was in some respects a repetition of the first, +except that there was more land under cultivation, and we ourselves were +better supplied with fresh vegetables and more nourishing food, and +Brother Taylor with his rifle could furnish us with game. We were at +this time becoming more familiar with the pests with which we had to +contend in this tropical Africa. We thought we had learned something of +the ravages of the white ants, or termites, while at Matopo, but the +experience there was nothing compared to that at Macha. This is not in +any sense intended as a scientific treatise; yet even from a missionary +point of view one needs to know something of the difficulties in the +way. One cannot be long in America without realizing that the ordinary +reader is woefully ignorant of some of the most common experiences of +the Africander, and in nothing is this more noticeable than in the +ravages produced by the white ants. The species to be found in Africa is +unlike that found elsewhere and is much more destructive. A knowledge of +the presence of these pests also seems to help solve some of the +characteristics of the natives in this section of the country. + +These white ants are of various kinds and sizes, but they are similar, +in that they build great nests of clay which extend above the ground +from one or two to twenty or more feet. These nests are known as ant +hills, and in this part of the country some of them are not unlike +hillocks. They are all honeycombed within and down deep into the earth, +and are the homes of the various members of the community, consisting of +the large, bulky, wormlike white queen, an inch or two in length, the +savage, warlike soldiers, and the small, inoffensive-looking workers. +There are also winged ones which leave the earth in great numbers at the +opening of the season after the ground has been softened by the rain. +These soon lose their wings and again enter the ground at various places +to form new colonies. + +The white ants can work only under cover, and exposure to light and the +sun is generally fatal to them, so they build small clay tunnels +underneath the ground or on top where they desire to work, and through +these they pass to and fro, carrying particles of food to store it away. +They prefer dry food, such as wood, leather, paper, clothing, straw, and +vegetation as it is becoming dry, although if these articles are not to +be had they have no objections to attacking growing trees or plants. +Many trees in our young orchard have been destroyed by their ravages. +These ants are to be found all over South Africa, but as one approaches +the equator they are more numerous and destructive and the hills are +larger. + +At Macha, boxes, shoes, clothing, everything had to be kept off the +ground floor. If this precaution was not observed, perhaps in a single +night a clay coating would be formed around the sole of a shoe and it +would be greatly damaged. Sometimes they would find their way up the leg +of a box and begin destroying the clothing or articles within. As I came +out of my room one morning, the noise of the sentinels of the ants gave +signal to the workers of the approach of danger. This led to an +examination of some bookshelves which were supposed to be safe out of +the reach of the pests. Wet clay was found to be all along the end of +the bookcase, and the end books on each shelf were partly eaten, all the +work of one night. Our bedposts had to be put on zinc or into old tin +cans to keep the ants from making their way to the top and soiling the +bedclothes. Several times they started to build an ant hill on the floor +of the hut, and one morning a small hill of wet clay nearly a foot in +height was to be seen, the result of one night's labors. + +Nor did they confine their ravages to the floor and the articles placed +on the floor; walls and grass roof were full of them. No article could +be hung on the wall with safety. There was a ceiling of muslin in the +house, yet one day Sister Engle, on going into her room, found an army +of white ants marching around on the counterpane of her bed, having +fallen from a broken clay tunnel in the roof. In addition to these +pests, we were greatly annoyed by insects boring into the soft wood +which formed the rafters. During this season the sound made in the quiet +hours of the night by these insects sawing caused one to think the +entire hut was alive. The ants would carry their clay tunnels into the +opening made by the borers and complete the work of destruction. For a +time the ceiling became so heavy with falling sawdust and clay, that it +was necessary to open it about every two weeks and remove the dust, +which almost filled a small tub each time. Many more incidents might be +cited. We were forced to admit that, at least during the rainy season, a +large portion of our time was occupied in protecting our huts and goods +from the ravages of the ants. + +[Illustration: The Last Invitation.] + +Their work did not stop with the house. We would think that the grain +and meal were placed high and secure out of their reach, only to find +that they had formed a channel and destroyed a lot of grain. At first +when some boys came for school there was no suitable place prepared for +their accommodation, and they were obliged to lie on the floor. They +would occasionally come and show where the cuticle had been removed from +some portion of the body during the night. In the garden there was also +difficulty in protecting the growing crops. The cornstalk would be eaten +off and fall to the ground, where the ants would complete the work of +destruction; so that from the time corn began to be filled until it was +ripe, it was generally necessary to keep several boys most of the time +gathering the fallen corn. Continual vigilance was needful, or in an +unguarded moment something about the place would be destroyed. + +The varieties of ants in the country are many and diverse, but we will +mention only one other kind, to which we were introduced during the +early days of the mission. One night some of the boys said they could +not sleep on account of ants coming into their hut. We supposed they +referred to large black ants, which often came in armies and made a raid +on white ants to carry them off for food. These black ones are very +troublesome when disturbed, and the boys were told to occupy another hut +for the remainder of the night. Again the boys spoke of being disturbed +and showed some small, reddish ants with vicious-looking heads, which +were marching in a straight line through the yard. But these looked +innocent and little attention was paid to the matter. Then one morning a +hen and two young guinea fowls, confined in a pen, were found to be +dead and covered with these insects. We concluded that they had died and +the ants were eating the carcass, but the boys assured us that the ants +had killed them. The pen was immediately burnt, together with as many of +the ants as possible. Another night the sheep began to bleat most +piteously. The lantern was lighted and the boys called to see what was +the difficulty, and while waiting for the boys I approached the pen. +Almost instantly needles seemed to penetrate my body in various places. +I gave the lantern to the boys to let out the sheep, while Sister Engle +and I hastened to the house, where she helped to remove the vicious +little insects. After that experience there was no further question in +my mind as to whether those ants could kill fowls or other animals. + +These are called the army ants. Once it required two days for an army of +them continually on the march to pass through our yard. Fortunately we +have not been troubled much with this variety since that time, but in +some parts of Africa they are very numerous. Human bodies are sometimes +thrown to them, and even live ones, as a punishment in supposed +witchcraft. + +We had been in correspondence with some of the Primitive Methodist +missionaries at Nanzela, from whom we had purchased books for the school +and ourselves; and we were eager to visit them and learn something of +their work. About the 1st of May we arranged to make the journey of +sixty miles and pay them a visit. Brother Taylor was here to take charge +of the journey, so we took the wagon with the ten oxen and a number of +schoolboys, as well as David, leaving Gomo in charge of the mission +during our absence. This was a new and untried road in a northwesternly +direction, and required four day of hard traveling to make it. On the +way we occasionally had an opportunity of preaching Christ to the +natives. + +The kindly welcome received from Rev. and Mrs. Price, who were then at +Nanzela, more than repaid us for the tediousness of the journey. We +spent a most delightful four days at their mission and learned to know +something of our neighbors and of the work being accomplished at this +oldest station in this part of the country. They were working among the +Baila, and also some Barotse who were living in that section of the +country. The trip, however, proved a most unfortunate one for us, as we +were informed that we had passed through a small district of the tsetse +fly on the way. The result of this will be given in another chapter. + +On account of the presence of these pests, as well as for other reasons, +a very common method of travel and transportation in this part of the +country is by native carriers. A native will carry fifty pounds of +goods, so that it requires forty persons to transport a ton of goods. +This means is employed by officials, and it is somewhat more expeditious +than by wagon. It is often not very satisfactory, however, and it is +difficult to secure natives who are willing to carry, unless they are +almost forced into service. The wages too, eight cents a day, is small, +but where the tsetse fly abounds this is the only safe method of +transportation. + + + + +CHAPTER FIVE + +Additional Reinforcements. Preparing to Build + + +In June, 1908, we were pleased to receive additional reinforcements in +the persons of Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger, who had lately arrived from +America and felt called to the work at Macha. Accompanying them were +Elder and Mrs. Steigerwald, who came to pay us a visit and to see about +the work. + +There was now a strong force of missionaries at the place, and it was +thought that better and more permanent buildings should be erected. The +mission had been in progress nearly two years, and David and Gomo had +been active both dry seasons in erecting buildings--and they were good +buildings of their kind. From what has already been given, however, of +the ravages of the white ants, it can easily be seen that such buildings +were very unsatisfactory and of short duration. To make others of the +same kind would require the missionaries to be continually building. + +My opinion in reference to missionaries' houses and surroundings had +gradually and materially undergone a change since I first entered the +mission field. My firm conviction on entering had been that missionaries +should be as approachable as possible, and that they should endeavor to +get on a level with their people; not in their dirt and filth, not in +their ignorance and degradation, but, leaving out these essentially +objectionable features, they should seek to imitate as much as possible +Him Who had no certain dwelling-place and went about doing good. He +became one with the people wherever He went, "Made Himself of no +reputation, and took upon Him the form of a servant." He of course is +the Great Exemplar, after Whom the missionaries, His messengers, are to +pattern. The true missionary should and does esteem it a privilege to +endure any necessary privation and hardship in the cause of the Master +Whom he loves and seeks to imitate. Otherwise it would be impossible to +carry the Gospel to the heathen. But our God is a wise God, and has +promised wisdom to His children and to His messengers, which He expects +them to use on the mission field as well as elsewhere; so that they may +adapt themselves to their surroundings and do that which will best +advance His Kingdom. + +The missionary goes to his field of labor. He builds himself huts of +poles, mud, and grass. He does this carefully, that he may protect +himself from the weather, the wild animals, and from the mosquitoes +which bring fever. He provides his hut with furniture, manufactured by +his own hand, so that it looks quite cozy and comfortable, and the poor +natives as they look inside may conclude that if heaven is no better +than this, it is at least worth striving for. The missionary himself for +the time feels quite satisfied and happy in his surroundings and +concludes that the place is good enough for anyone. + +He opens his door and invites his dear dark friends to enter and sit and +talk with him--a privilege which they greatly appreciate and the +missionary also enjoys. Are not these the people for whom Christ died? +Are not these the poor people to whom he is bringing the privileges of +the Gospel? He loves to embrace every opportunity of getting into their +hearts, and he feels keenly everything which separates and tends to form +a barrier between them. + +Time passes, and the rainy season comes. Perhaps the huts become damp +and even mouldy in places, and gradually, as the ants continue their +ravages, the walls crack and other difficulties arise. He is forced to +be continually on his guard to protect himself. Mosquitoes enter, and he +is incapacitated for work, by fever and other sickness. His health +becomes undermined and his appetite gives way. The coarse food of the +natives, if he has been using it, becomes distasteful and hurtful. +Perhaps, if there is no way out of the difficulty, his life pays the +penalty and his work on earth for God and the natives is stopped. This +is no fancy picture. It has been repeated over and over again in this +great "White Man's Graveyard." + +Suppose, however, that by taking plenty of quinine and having +considerable vitality to start with, he survives and continues +successfully to combat disease; he soon finds that he must build a +separate hut in which to meet the natives, or his house will be overrun +with vermin and he cannot live in it. His hut, too, soon becomes a +hiding place for snakes, rats, and lizards. He may pick up a piece of +furniture and find a cobra lying beneath it, or go into the little +kitchen and find a deadly puff adder beneath the cooking kettle. Even if +he has in building kept as near to the natives as possible, they are in +no haste to get rid of their filth and improve their manner of living. +They have not yet seen the advantages of exerting themselves to that +extent, unless they are members of the mission family and compelled to +wash. Even then they may have conscientious scruples in reference to the +matter, as one of our best boys at Matopo did. He was frequently +remonstrated with for not keeping his clothing clean. He said that clean +clothing made him feel proud. + +Again, the missionary soon sees that his hut is going to pieces, and he +must go over the laborious task every two or three years of building +another, and at the same time constantly fight the ants, so that his +life is one of long struggle with disease, pests, and building. When and +how is he to give the Gospel? He concludes that he must make brick, +build a house, and put on an iron roof, that it may be better protected +from the mosquitoes and furnish good rain water. He makes a tank, so +that he may have good drinking water instead of the muddy, disease-laden +stuff which comes from the river. It will make more work for a time, but +when completed he sees some result of his labor. + +These reasons, any or all of them, are sufficient in the eyes of the +missionary for building a good, substantial house, but there are other +reasons, quite as patent to him, but they may not be to one who has +never been in his place. The natives like to see their missionary build +good dwellings, for then they think he has come to stay, and because he +has come to stay and is willing to work and to train the natives, he +sometimes has a better house than some of his white neighbors. And we +are loath to think, as some affirm, that it is a reproach to be better +housed, if he himself builds it. + +There is another and more subtle reason for a good house, and one which +the writer could not enter into until the last few years. If one has +access to a town he has an opportunity to see other civilized places and +has a change of scenery and companionship, which is both interesting and +beneficial. Especially is this so to one who is continually surrounded +with uncouth barbarism in its many forms. When, however, one is far +removed from all civilized associations and sees nothing that is +beautiful and uplifting, week after week, month after month, year after +year; when all this time only dirt and squalor meet the eye as he steps +off his own premises, his range of vision becomes so narrowed, his brain +so benumbed by the monotony, that he feels he can endure it no longer. +He is not tired of his services for the Master; he is not tired of the +dark faces surrounding him; but his spiritual vision has become so +befogged that, as he rises before the people to give them the message, +he feels that he cannot give what he longs to. He cannot even take hold +of God by faith in prayer as he did, and he must get away for a change. + +But what has this to do with a good house? Just this: If one has a good +home and pleasant surroundings, good and helpful literature and a few of +the things which minister to the aesthetic as well as to the spiritual +part of his nature, he has a change, at least, in his own home, and when +he can snatch time, from the many duties which continually confront him, +for a little quiet, the surroundings are pleasing and restful. He is +then just that much better fitted to cope with the opposite conditions, +and he can cope with them for a longer time and do better work for the +Master. On the other hand, missionaries are human and make many +mistakes, and we in the mission field need also to guard against the +other extreme of spending too much time in beautifying our surroundings +and making ourselves comfortable, to the neglect of that God-given +message. + +Even under the best of surroundings, physically, the missionary has +enough to contend with. Circumstances over which he has no control, +difficulties which far outweigh any already mentioned, meet him on every +hand. As Rev. Stewart, of China, says, "'Agonia,' that word so often on +St. Paul's lips--what did it mean? Did it not just mean the thousand +wearinesses, and deeper, the stirrings, the travailings, the bitter +disappointments, the deaths oft of a missionary's life?" + +The natives often are so indifferent, so disinclined to exert +themselves, that, after months and years of weary, persistent labor +among them, the missionary often feels that little is accomplished. He +dare build hopes on none but God, and must accept seeming success or +defeat as alike from Him. This continual drain on his system is quite +sufficient, without having to combat with poor dwellings, poor food, and +unhealthful surroundings. + +After the Brethren came, they concluded to start at once to make the +preparations for building. Elder Steigerwald had had experience in this +line of work, so he generously offered to start the rest in brickmaking. +After a few weeks' visit he and Sister Steigerwald returned home and +Sister Engle decided to accompany them for a change. David and Gomo also +had been absent from their people for two years and wished to return, +the former for a visit and the latter, perhaps permanently. We were very +sorry to see all these leave at once, even for a few months, and +especially David, whose assistance in the language and in interpretation +was greatly needed. + +[Illustration: Making Brick at Macha.] + +[Illustration: Brick Kiln. Mr. Jesse Wenger and Helpers.] + +The Brethren Taylor and Wenger, with the assistance of the schoolboys +and some other natives, moulded and burnt a large kiln of brick. Brother +Taylor attended to the moulding and Brother Wenger to building the kiln. +This gave the boys training in another line of industrial work, and at +the end of about six weeks a lot of excellent brick were ready for +building. Unfortunately there was no money on hand to build a house, for +the Board had not been informed of our needs in this respect, since +brickmaking had been undertaken rather suddenly. It was therefore +necessary to postpone building a house until the next dry season. +Brother Wenger, however, erected two small brick buildings, with +thatched roofs. One was for grinding and storing grain, and the other a +two-roomed cottage. In the latter a room was fitted up for the +occupancy of himself and wife, so that we were prepared for another +rainy season. + +One thing which was a serious handicap in the building and work that +season was the condition of the oxen. After our return from Nanzela, in +May, the oxen gave no indication of being bitten by the tsetse fly. +Nearly a month later they were driven to Kalomo, a distance of about +forty-five miles, and brought out a heavy load of goods on the arrival +of our colaborers. They were also made use of in hauling sand for +brickmaking; and in July, when Brother Steigerwalds returned home, they +were again driven to the station. This time they made use of a new road +and went east to Choma Station, a distance of only about thirty-six +miles. By this time the oxen were showing signs of being bitten, and as +there was no cure for them, they gradually became weaker and died, one +by one, until we had lost nine, the last ones not dying until about six +months after they were bitten. The fly injects a parasite into the +blood, which gradually absorbs the red corpuscles, hence the lingering +death. + +It was a serious loss to the mission at the time, as they had been in +use almost constantly in farming, hauling, and bringing out supplies. In +the Syracuse plow it was necessary to use all ten of the oxen in this +heavy clay soil, and also in hauling the wagon. + +We still had a few, but there was not sufficient money on hand to +purchase others at once. With eight ill-matched oxen, Brother Taylor +undertook to go to Choma in November for the purpose of bringing out a +six months' supply of goods and provisions, which had been sent up from +Bulawayo. He took along five of the largest schoolboys to assist in +carrying the goods across the bridgeless rivers. To add to the +difficulty of the trip, grass was scarce at that season of the year, so +that there was little food for the oxen. A little rain also fell while +he was away and made the road muddy. + +On returning with the load he was able to get within twelve miles of +home when the oxen could go no farther. He sent four of the boys each +with a load of goods to the mission, and a call for help. Several native +men and about twenty schoolboys were sent to his assistance, and after +they reached the wagon, Brother Taylor concluded to endeavor to come a +little nearer home before resting for the night. Each of the natives +carried a load, and he himself carried one hundred pounds of flour and +drove the oxen. They came about two and one-half miles farther and then +camped for the night. A fire was kindled, but as the night was dark and +misty the fire burned low. The boys lay around this and Brother Taylor +on the open wagon. He was aroused several times during the night by a +disturbance among the oxen. Thinking it was caused by one of the new +oxen which had given him some trouble, he arose at three different times +during the latter part of the night to quiet them, but the darkness was +too great for him to see what was the trouble. The last time it was +dawning a little in the east, and he thought he discerned the form of an +animal moving toward an ant hill in the vicinity. The boys were aroused +and soon had a fire; and as the morning came they discovered by the +spoors that two lions had passed along within a few feet of where the +boys lay and had gored one of the oxen during the night. These were what +Brother Taylor had been trying to chase. The reader can imagine the +thankfulness of all of them, as well as of ourselves, when it was +discovered how wonderfully the Lord had preserved them all from harm. We +rejoiced when the goods as well as Brother Taylor and the boys were all +safely at home, but the heavy wagon had to remain for a time on the +veldt before it could be brought to the mission. + +When the news of the misfortune to the oxen reached America the Lord +inspired some of His children to send special donations for the purchase +of others, and even before an account of the trouble had reached there +some had heard of the need by way of the Throne and had sent money. + + + + +CHAPTER SIX + +Evangelistic and Other Labors + + +During this dry season the spiritual part of the work, together with +school and kraal-visiting, was not neglected, even though most of those +who could speak the language were away. + +There were thirty-two boys in school, and they were doing good work. A +translation of the Gospel of St. Mark had been printed by Rev. Smith, +and an Ila hymn book by Rev. Chapman, of the same mission, and these +were both very useful in our work. After our boys had finished the Ila +books, we concluded to allow them to continue the Scriptures in the Zulu +Testament, as it is always easier for the natives to pass from one +native language into another than from English into their language. We +found later that this use of the Zulu Testament proved very +satisfactory, both to ourselves and the boys. Since we were familiar +with that language, and they readily acquired it, their knowledge was of +great assistance to us in translating portions of the Scripture into +their tongue, and they were soon capable of interpreting for Elder +Steigerwald and others who came to us from Southern Rhodesia. Here, as +at Matopo, every day and all the day were the Scriptures studied and +Christ held up, and morning, noon, and night we met in worship and +explanation of the Bible. The great aim, both in school and out, was to +produce sincere and ripe Christians, who should become teachers and +evangelists of their people. + +[Illustration: Macha Mission Dwelling House.] + +Other studies were gradually introduced. Arithmetic seems to be always a +difficult study for most of them, but some of them compared very +favorably in that branch with others whom we had instructed. They had +their own peculiar way at first of announcing whether their problems +were correct or not. If they were correct the pupils would answer "_Wa +pona_" (it is alive), and if incorrect they would say "_Wa fwa_" (it is +dead). Although they sat side by side in the schoolroom and could easily +look on the slates of their neighbors, they were generally very honest +and independent in their work and did not attempt to copy. + +English also was introduced after they could read understandingly their +own language. The opportunity of learning English is a privilege which +all natives covet, as it seems to be more important in their eyes and +more European. In some respects this _importance_ is one of the +objectionable features about teaching it. Then too the native often is +dull in learning it, but we need interpreters, and the value +intellectually of this and arithmetic and kindred studies is not to be +despised. English often aids the native in securing better positions +with better pay when he goes to work among the Europeans; for go, at +least for a while, he will. Some Europeans prefer natives who can speak +and understand a little English. On the other hand, some white men, who +have themselves a little knowledge of the native tongue, prefer, for +their own purpose, that natives do not understand English. They want the +native to understand only enough to go at their bidding and "keep his +place," which is somewhat similar in their eyes with the lower order of +animals. This class is forever a foe to the missionary and to the +education and christianization of the natives. If one who has to some +extent been educated, goes out into the centers of civilization and +there, swallowed in the maelstrom of vice which surrounds him, imitates +his new white teachers, they will point to him and say, "Yes, there is +one of your mission boys. That is what missionary work does." Many a +well-meaning native, who was making a fair progress toward Christian +life, can trace his downfall to such teachers. If that class of +Europeans would remain at the centers of civilization, it would still +be more tolerable for the missionary, but often the towns are too moral +for them, and they seek to go into the region of raw natives. As one +glibly remarked, "When it becomes too civilized for me here, I'll go +farther inland." + +Mr. Naylor, who has had an opportunity of studying at first hand the +work all over Africa, says, "In Africa conscienceless trade, social +vice, race hatred, and religious intolerance have freer scope because so +far removed from the restraining influence of Christian public +sentiment." + +This seeming digression from the subject can be excused only on the +ground that it is one of the most difficult and perplexing problems the +missionary has to face, and every one coming into the country in such a +capacity is certain to meet it in one form or another. We are pleased to +add, however, that the missionary also finds Europeans who are generous +and helpful and favorable to the work; and the number of this class is +increasing, as the aim of the missionary and the results of his efforts +are more clearly understood. + +The attendance at church services was constantly increasing, and those +present on Sunday sometimes reached 140 in number. Kraal-visiting also +was carried on as opportunity afforded. Before Sister Engle left we had +made a visit to Mianda, the home of Tom and Jim and of several other of +our boys. This was about seven miles from Macha and too far for some of +the older people to walk to services. As the boys were still with us, +those in the kraal had not yet received any light. They appeared to be +much pleased to see us, but when we attempted to point them to the +Savior they seemed so dark and so unable to grasp spiritual things. This +was especially true of Tom's mother, who sat in a little dark hut and +was afflicted with a very sore eye. She had such a hopeless expression +on her face, that the picture haunted us for many days afterwards. + +When Tom, who had accepted the Light as far as he knew, had been at the +mission fifteen months, he desired to return home, and did so. A few +months after he had returned to his home, one day, in company with two +of the schoolboys, I went about four miles from the mission to visit +some of the people. Quite unexpectedly we came upon Tom's mother in one +of the huts. She was there visiting some of her friends. As usual, I +began telling her of Jesus, and her face brightened immediately as she +exclaimed: + +"Oh, yes! Siwesi [Tom] told me that. He said we should not worship the +spirits any more; we should only worship God above [pointing upward]. He +reads from his Book and sings and prays. I enjoy hearing of those +things." This woman had never been at the mission, and this was the +first indication, apart from the boys staying with us, that we had of +Light entering the home. Her eagerness and evident sincerity showed +plainly that she believed and was accepting the truth, and that the +Light was coming through one of the schoolboys. The contrast between +this picture and the first sight of this woman was so marked, and the +joy of realizing that a ray of Light was entering one home at least, +was so great, that as I retraced my steps homeward I kept saying to +myself, "It pays, it pays." + +Brother Taylor felt especially called to spend his time in evangelistic +work among the villages, and whenever he could snatch time from other +duties pressing upon him he went out among the people, and in this +manner a number of villages were visited. + +Many of the people at this time were destitute of food, as the previous +season had not produced good crops. Many of them were living on fruits, +roots, and plants, and much sickness was the result. With our large +family, and only a moderate supply of grain, we were unable to give them +much assistance, but we did what we could. Had they been willing to +bring their small children to us we would have cared for them until +other food was grown. One mother did bring her little boy, Halikumba, +who was four or five years of age and nearly starved. He enjoyed his new +home so much, and the abundance of food it supplied, that he would run +and hide if he saw his mother come for fear she would take him away. He +was such a little mite of humanity that we were afraid of placing him in +the huts with the other boys, and for a time cared for him in the house. + +David returned to Macha in January, 1909, ready to enter again with +enthusiasm into the work, and Brother Taylor concluded that the way was +now opened for him to spend additional time in evangelistic labor, so he +decided to take several boys and spend some time among the Baila north +of us. This is a bold and warlike tribe, living in large villages, and +much addicted to drink, dancing, and carousals. Rows, and even murders, +are not infrequent among them, and it required some courage to venture +into their territory. The Lord gave the Brother open doors, however, and +some attentive listeners, and we believe seed was sown that will bear +fruit in eternity. + +He had some difficulties to encounter, which were not so pleasant. It is +a low, flat country; and as he was there in the midst of the rainy +season, heavy rains flooded the country on all sides, so that he was +frequently obliged to wade the water in going from one village to +another. After two months of arduous labor, his health gave way and he +was carried back sick to the mission. It required some time before he +fully recovered from the exposure and hardships of the trip. + +These experiences are not pleasant, but they are incidental to the +country, and every missionary feels that he should be ready at all times +to endure for Christ's sake and the salvation of souls what men are +going through every day for money or a home. + +Brother Wenger also had been suffering greatly in health while at the +mission, both from nervous disorders and from fever. Notwithstanding +this, he decided to begin building a house, since the rains were about +over and funds had been received for this purpose. David also was ready +to help in the work. With the assistance of the boys they brought +together stones and began the foundation. Near the mission there were +very few building stones, but this need had been supplied in a rather +unexpected manner. The brethren had undertaken to dig a well the +previous season, but on coming into contact with a great deal of stone, +which necessitated blasting, they went down only forty-five feet and +finally concluded the task was useless. The only beneficial result of +their labors was the stones which had been taken out of the well, and +which furnished a large part of the material for the foundation of the +house. + +[Illustration: Eld. Steigerwald and Mr. Doner with Carriers on Their +Trip North of Macha.] + +Brother Wenger laid the foundation of a house 41 x 16 feet, with a wing +18 x 10 feet, and began work on the brick. Unfortunately, while this was +in progress, his health gave way repeatedly, and he and Sister Wenger +concluded that it was advisable for them to leave for Bulawayo and +finally for America, and David continued to work at the house. Brother +Taylor had sufficiently recovered from his illness by this time to be +able to take the Wengers to the station. He then waited there a few +days for the train from the south, and brought back with him Elder +Steigerwald, Mr. Doner, Miss Engle, and Gomo, all of whom we were +expecting. + +He was absent from the mission eight days, and during that time I had an +attack of fever and was obliged to be in bed for a week. This was my +first attack, and as it was quite severe, it enabled me to sympathize +better with those who had been sick so much. We were very glad to +welcome Sister Engle and the rest back to work. The two brethren from +Bulawayo were on a tour of exploration north, but they generously +decided to stay and assist Brother Taylor to finish the brick work of +the new house. This timely assistance was greatly appreciated by us all, +and that part of the building was completed in two weeks, after which +they proceeded north. + +The special object of their trip was to look at a location north of the +Kafue River, where a missionary had died not long before. This +missionary had started a work in this unhealthy region, and his life had +paid the penalty. Some friends of his, notably Mrs. Lewis, of Cape Town, +had desired our people to examine the place, and, if thought advisable, +to continue the work, and Brother Doner was willing to do this if they +concluded that the opening was a good one. + +They made the journey on foot, accompanied by Matshuba and native +carriers from the vicinity of Macha. They passed through the very heart +of the territory occupied by the wild Baila, and visited the new station +at Kasenga, which had just been opened by Rev. Smith. He and his heroic +wife had started this station in the heart of the Baila country and in +an unhealthful locality, not considering their lives dear unto +themselves, only that they might take the Gospel to these people and +continue the translation of the New Testament, which Mr. Smith had +already begun. + +[Illustration: Crossing the Kafue River in a Native Dugout.] + +Near this place the brethren crossed the broad Kafue River and proceeded +in a northwesternly direction toward the railroad. They found the +mission station and the place where the missionary had died, and heard +some of the children sing a hymn which the missionary had taught them. +They were not very well satisfied, however, with the location, and +returned to Macha by a different route. They traveled on foot a distance +of perhaps 250 miles, and were absent from Macha a month. They could not +understand the language and had some trying experiences from wild +animals and wilder men, but the Lord graciously preserved them from all +harm. They then returned to Bulawayo to continue their labors. + +In the meantime Brother Taylor, with the aid of the native brethren, was +progressing very satisfactorily with the house. It contained four +fair-sized rooms and a pantry, and had a broad veranda on three sides to +protect the walls from deterioration by sun and rain. These walls were +twelve feet high, with a drop-ceiling of muslin two feet below the +eaves, to serve as a protection from the fierce rays of the sun and to +furnish an air chamber. On top of the foundation and underneath the +brick walls were placed strips of zinc, soldered together, to prevent +the white ants from forcing their way through into the walls and thence +onto the timbers of the roof. The floors were of earth, pounded hard and +well tarred to keep out the ants. The large glass windows were quite a +relief from the small holes in the old house. Later the windows and the +greater part of the veranda were screened. The house was in every way +most satisfactory, except that it was not quite proof against the white +ants. Cement floors and steel ceilings would have been preferable, but +the cost was prohibitive. + +[Illustration: Batonga Chiefs and Headmen.] + +Sister Engle's return gave us an opportunity of continuing the +kraal-visiting, and we made use of it in gaining an entrance into other +homes. At Kabanzi village, about nine miles away, services had been held +more or less regularly ever since the establishment of the mission, and +Sister Engle and I decided to take the tent and spend a week at this +place and hold some Gospel services. Gomo and a number of the boys +accompanied us and built a hut for the use of those coming here to +conduct services. This week spent among the people was a most delightful +one, and beneficial physically, especially to myself, since I was +feeling the effects of my three years' stay in this climate. The people +attended the services well, and seemed greatly interested as they sat +around the campfire and listened to the Message. + +In other homes too there was beginning to be a change, for the girls +were coming out of their seclusion and listening to the old, old Story, +and some were even venturing to the mission on Sunday. Some of the older +people also appeared interested, and made a show at least of desiring to +be Christians. + +This does not imply that the kraals around us were fast accepting the +Gospel as a result of the three years' labor among them. No, the devil +was plying his trade at our very doors. Almost nightly one could hear +the tomtoms beaten in connection with their worship, or as an +accompaniment in their immoral dances; for none of their worship was +omitted by the older ones, at least in their homes. The missionary work +was just begun, and perhaps none of the present workers would live to +see the day when these things would cease in the villages. The false +religions and customs which have been so deeply imbedded for centuries +would require patient, consecrated labor for years, and even +generations, to uproot. One must be willing to go on, day by day, +although he may see little or no fruit of his labors, knowing that the +Great Husbandman will care for the seed sown. + +[Illustration: First Baptismal Scene at Macha. Native Congregation Not +Visible.] + +The work thus far, however, had not been without its visible fruits, as +the stability of some of our boys gave ample testimony. The number +staying at the mission had now grown to forty. These were some of the +called-out ones from the various kraals about us. Each had sent its +quota, and although some had come and gone, the great majority stayed on +from year to year. As the Light came to them they came and confessed +their sins, forsook their old life and accepted Christ as their Savior, +showing by their lives that they were His. Some of these were about +grown; others were still quite young, but we hoped to see the day when +some of them would become teachers and evangelists of their people. + +[Illustration: Wedding Dinner at Macha.] + +Word had been received that Elders J. N. Engle and J. Sheets were to be +sent out by the Mission Board to visit the various stations and report +on the progress of the work. In November, 1909, just after we had moved +into the new house, they, together with Elder Steigerwald, came to pay +us the long-looked-for visit. Their visit was greatly enjoyed and we +believe was a blessing to the work of the Lord. To Brother Sheets the +boys gave the name "Happy," no doubt because he frequently used the word +and also showed it in his manner. Two important events occurred during +their stay, which deserve special mention. + +The first was the marriage, on November 4, of Mr. Taylor and Miss Adda +Engle. The natives were invited to this ceremony, and about 350 accepted +the invitation. Several chiefs came with their people and arranged +themselves in groups, eager to see what a Christian wedding was like. +The marriage ceremony was performed by Bishop Engle, who was a son of +the first bishop to Matopo Mission, and also a cousin of the bride. +Bishop Steigerwald delivered an excellent and instructive discourse to +the natives on the importance of the occasion and the tenets of +Christian marriage. This was interpreted into the vernacular by David +and was listened to most attentively by the natives present. It was +their first opportunity of learning this phase of Christianity, and it +was an important event from a missionary standpoint. Christian marriage +and the principles it stands for generally require a long time for +inculcation into the hearts and lives of at least the older natives, but +many of the younger ones very readily accept it, as the many Christian +marriages performed at our older stations testify. + +At the close of the ceremony, and after the missionaries and boys had +offered their congratulations, the rest of the natives congratulated in +their own way, which was by the clapping of hands. Some also began +cheering with the mouth, but this demonstration was checked. Brother +Taylor had arranged to give them a feast of beef and porridge, and this +they greatly enjoyed, as it is to some the great aim of life; namely, to +have plenty to eat. + +The second important event was the occasion of the first baptism at +Macha, in which ten of our boys were baptized by Brother Steigerwald in +the Macha River, and received into Church fellowship, thus showing to +their heathen neighbors that they had forsaken their old lives. A +beautiful feature of this was that some of the parents and older ones +met them as they came out of the water and seemed to rejoice with them +in their new life. There were others who were eager to take the step, +but it was thought they had not yet sufficiently counted the cost. + +We then had the privilege of surrounding the table of the Lord together +with these who had been so lately snatched from heathen darkness. These +were the first fruits of Macha and reminded one of Professor Drummond's +experience in Nyassaland. He says: "I cherish no more sacred memory of +my life than that of a communion service in the little Bandawe Church, +when the sacramental cup was handed to me by the bare black arm of a +native communicant--a communicant whose life, tested afterwards in many +an hour of trial with me on the Tanganyika Plateau, gave him perhaps a +better right to be there than any of us." + +The missionary too is often made to feel, as he sees some of these +humble, black followers of the Lord, and thinks how far they have come, +and how steadfast the lives of many of them prove to be, that He Who +sees and tests all hearts may, with Mr. Drummond, conclude that they +have a better right to sit around the table of the Lord than any of us. + + + + +CHAPTER SEVEN + +Other Missionary Experiences + + +The experiences of a missionary are so many and so diverse that nothing +should surprise him. To give these experiences, with too distinct a line +of demarcation, would not place the work in its proper setting, for they +often come piling one upon the other and cannot be separated. + +I had now been north of the Zambezi nearly three and one-half years, and +was in need of a change, so when the delegation from America left I also +went along to the station. Brother and Sister Taylor accompanied us to +Choma Station on a little wedding trip, and then returned to carry on +the work at Macha, while David took charge of the school. Elders Engle +and Steigerwald went north on an exploring trip as far as Broken Hill. +Brother Sheets went to Bulawayo and I to Natal. + +On the way south an accident occurred which was quite unusual, even for +this animal-ridden country. After the train had passed the Zambezi River +and Wankie Coal Fields, in the evening about eight o'clock there was a +lunge in the train and a lady in the same compartment with myself +exclaimed, "There must be an accident of some kind." The train soon came +to a sudden stop, and it was evident that something had happened. People +began running about in the darkness, a large bonfire was soon built +near the front of the train, a bulky form was visible, and word came +back that we had struck an elephant. Great excitement prevailed. Gomo +also was on the train, returning to his home, and he came back to our +compartment and said, "Come and see the elephant. I'll take care of +you." + +I went forward with him and found a huge elephant lying beside the +train. Its two hind feet were crushed, as the engine, tender, and +service car had passed over them; otherwise it was unhurt, and at times +made violent efforts to stand upon its front feet. At such times the +crowd of people would suddenly take flight, to be out of harm's way, and +a box-car near by was in danger of being demolished. No one on the train +was supplied with a large rifle, suitable for elephant hunting, but +small ones kept up a lively fire, until perhaps three dozen were emptied +into the huge bulk before it succumbed. + +The engine had been derailed by the violence of the shock, and it would +require some time before we could proceed. Judging from the spoor it was +evident that the elephant was one of those large ones that roam the +forests alone, and it had run quite a distance on the track before the +engine struck it. It was an immense animal, and the large ears resembled +a cape lying back over the shoulders. + +There were a number of natives on the train, who were going down to work +in the mines about Bulawayo, and they wished to begin at once on the +feast of meat before them, but the authorities thought it best to put +them at working the large jacks used in moving the engine back on the +rails. All night long bright fires of logs were kept burning to light +up the scene and work. The engine finally was in place, and the natives +eagerly hastened to cut out large pieces of elephant meat and to roast +it over the great beds of coal left from the campfires of the night. +Soon, however, the train began to move, just twelve hours from the time +of stopping, and the natives, with their raw or half-cooked meat, +hastened to enter their car, and we moved on, having had a share in one +of the most exciting railroad trips of the season. The tusks of this +elephant finally found their way into the Bulawayo Museum. + +[Illustration: The Elephant That Derailed the Train.] + +The tusks of the African elephant often are quite large and heavy. I +once saw in a European home three pairs of tusks from elephants lately +killed by a young farmer. Of one pair of tusks each was five feet long, +eighteen inches in diameter; one weighed one hundred pounds and the +other five pounds less. We are informed, however, that some have tusks +still much larger than these. + +It is unnecessary to give the details of this, our second trip south to +Natal and Johannesburg, and my visit to our mission stations in the +Matopos have already been mentioned. I was absent six months and felt +thoroughly rested and ready for the work again. On my return to +Bulawayo, however, I learned the sad news that the native who had come +south on the train at the same time as myself had, since he was at home, +fallen into sin. We were all deeply grieved over this, and he confessed +and wept over his condition, but appeared discouraged and unable to take +hold of the Lord by faith for pardon and cleansing. There were several +others in his home who had once confessed Christ and had backslidden, +and they no doubt had their influence over him. The Lord is still able +to redeem him, and may he have our prayers. Such are some of the heavy +burdens the missionaries have to bear. + +On my return in June, 1910, Misses Mary Heisey and Elizabeth Engle +accompanied me to Macha to pay a visit to that place. Brother Taylor met +us at the station and conveyed us to the mission, where we were greeted +by a crowd of boys and five girls, who had joined the mission family, +with the clapping of hands and the firing of a rifle. We rejoiced that +we could again return to our field of labor. + +[Illustration: Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910.] + +In the new house and improved surroundings every one had been well and +the work had been moving forward in all its departments under the +efficient management of Brother and Sister Taylor. Not only had these +girls come to stay at the mission, but David had prevailed upon a number +to attend day-school, at least part of the time. Sister Taylor, in +addition to her many other duties, had formed all these girls into a +sewing-class and was endeavoring to teach them to make garments for +themselves. This was the first opportunity that had been given of +instructing girls in sewing, and she had made remarkable progress also +in instructing them in their work about the house. + +Naturally they do not know what cleanliness is, either about their +person or in their homes. They seldom wash, they go half-clad, and smear +their bodies with paint and grease, and often let the dogs lick clean +the few dishes or pots which they possess. If their hands are wet or +dirty, the posts of the veranda, blocks of wood, or floors are used as +towels to wipe on. They see no reason for continually washing a lot of +dishes, sweeping floors, and keeping the house in order; and they open +their eyes in astonishment to see white sheets and tablecloths put into +the water to be washed. The few articles of clothing to be seen in their +homes are generally so thickly coated with grease and dirt as often to +render it impossible to distinguish the color. Many times they do not +have any soap, and even if they do have, they object to washing their +clothing for fear it will wear out. And yet these young girls, reared in +such homes had, in these few months, made rapid progress and were +becoming quite proficient in assisting with some of the work of the +kitchen. Sister Taylor's great patience in teaching them was bearing +fruit. + +Brother Taylor had, in connection with his other duties, made a large +galvanized iron tank to hold rain water. This was large enough for 1,700 +gallons of water, and was greatly needed, as the river water which we +were obliged to use was very muddy part of the year. He had always +maintained that he was no mechanic, but another missionary, Rev. +Kerswell, who had had experience in mechanical work, said on seeing this +tank, "Mr. Taylor, you say that you are no mechanic; but if you made +this, you are one; for no one but a mechanic could perform such a piece +of work." + +[Illustration: Macha Wagon and Oxen Near an Ant Hill.] + +While the sisters were with us Brother Taylor and wife arranged to take +them on a trip north, so that they might have an opportunity of seeing +something of the country and the natives. For this purpose the wagon was +again fitted up with the tent and camping outfit and the ten oxen +inspanned. A number of the schoolboys were permitted to accompany them +for a holiday, but the regular driver for the wagon did not go along. +They spent some time at the two large villages of Kabanzi and Simeoba, +holding services and conversing with the natives, and then proceeded +toward a village farther north. The grass was long, the road new, and +darkness was coming on when they approached the village. As frequently +happens near a village, there was a large opening in the ground from +which clay had been taken to plaster the huts. This was partly hidden by +the long grass, and had not been noticed in the gathering darkness. +Brother Taylor had gone in advance to look out a place for camping, +and some of the boys were driving. The wheels of one side of the wagon +went down suddenly into the excavation and the wagon was overturned, the +tent being under the heavy wagon. The accident might have been very +serious for the women, but fortunately there were two large boxes in the +wagon and these prevented the weight of the wagon from resting on them +and they escaped without any serious injury, but the tent was of course +ruined. Brother Taylor said that, as he hastened to the wagon, he heard +a boy on the rear end of the wagon yelling lustily; so he felt satisfied +that that one was not dead, and he turned his first attention to those +who were making no noise. + +When the sisters returned to their fields of labor, David again returned +home, this time to be married and bring back a wife from Mapani Station. + +The spiritual condition of the pupils continued excellent. There was a +spirit of inquiry among them and a searching after God at times, as the +Spirit was poured out upon them. Some prayed through to victory and a +definite knowledge of sins forgiven. Those who had been with us longer +were instrumental in bringing the newer ones to seek pardon. The spirit +among them was such that any one who did not care to be a Christian +generally did not remain long at the mission. At this time also we were +favored with special donations and enabled to equip the school better +and give more attention toward the training of teachers. + +It will be remembered that one of the special needs was a translation of +the Scriptures into the language of the people. The books already in +use, prepared by Rev. Smith, were in the Ila language. This was +sufficiently allied to the Tonga for use at Macha; and it is always an +advantage in the mission field to unify the languages as much as +possible, so as to reduce rather than increase the number of languages. + +St. Mark was already in print, and Mr. Smith, together with some of his +colleagues, was putting forth great efforts to translate the entire New +Testament into Ila. At their urgent request I consented to be on the +revision committee, for they desired to make the translation as +intelligible as possible to the Batonga, so that it could be used all +over Northwestern Rhodesia, with the exception of among the Barotse, +where the Suto language was in use. Matthew was soon in print, and the +entire New Testament is at present in the hands of the publishers. The +translators deserve much praise for their laborious task and the +creditable manner in which they have performed the much-needed +translation. The Word cannot be properly disseminated among the people +unless the pupils have it in their own language as they go out among the +villages to teach. + +Placing native teachers in their homes seems to be the best method of +reaching the majority of the people, and especially the girls; and some +of the pupils were sufficiently advanced to begin teaching, yet they +were somewhat young to go out into their dark, dark homes and stand +alone for God. Notwithstanding this, before the end of 1910 several +schools were opened in the nearest villages, and the teachers boarded +at the mission and went back and forth to teach. + +On Christmas week of this year a sad and unfortunate affair occurred, +which threw a gloom over the community. My readers will remember the +Chief Macha, who sent a goat the first Christmas, and who was the first +to bring his little boy as a pupil in school. To all appearances he was +a friend of the work from the beginning, and he was nearly always to be +found in his place at the services on Sunday. He had even expressed a +desire several times to be a Christian. We knew his life had not +changed, but he had evidently lost faith in some of the old pagan +beliefs, and his influence was worth much. He was a man of importance in +the neighborhood and the owner of a herd of cattle, which was quite +large from a native standpoint. + +[Illustration: Simeboa's Village, Viewing the Strangers, Misses E. Engle +and Mary Helsey.] + +On the day before Christmas word came that he had gone to the hills and +could not be found; again that he was found dead, killed by a lion. His +son at once went home, and I, together with some of the girls, soon +followed. On the way to the village we met a native woman, who informed +us that he was already buried, and on our arrival at the place we found +that those who buried him had gone to the river to wash. While we were +sitting there several of the people came to speak to us, and we noticed +that some of the men spoke together in a low tone. Their answers to some +of our questions were somewhat vague; but as there was no suspicion of +foul play, we thought no more of the matter and asked no further +questions. + +After the people returned from the river, the wailing began by about +thirty or thirty-five men walking back and forth; brandishing their +assegais and guns and crying "_Mawe!_" At the same time the women stood +about the grave, wailing and calling upon the dead. The sight was +somewhat fearful and might have alarmed a stranger, but since the +majority of these were from the adjacent kraals and were acquainted with +us we feared no violence. In the evening Brother Taylor and the boys +went over to show their sympathy, and the next day services were held +there. All this time nothing further was learned except that the chief +was killed by a lion. The English official from Kalomo, who, with his +messengers, happened to be in the neighborhood at the time, received the +same version of the cause of the death as we did. According to native +custom, the brother of the deceased assumed his title and appropriated +his cattle, and the affair, as far as it concerned ourselves, was +dropped. + +About three weeks later Lupata, another chief, who lived near, together +with one of his men, and Kaiba, a nephew of the deceased, came to inform +us that Macha had been murdered. They said that he had been murdered +while out on the veldt, and an attempt made to hide the body. A number +of natives went to search for him, Lupata among the number, and when +they discovered the body they saw at once that a murder had been +committed. The brother of the murdered man enjoined the rest to secrecy +and promised to give Lupata some cattle if he would not tell the +missionaries or officials of the crime. Lupata, although very fond of +cattle, of which he had only a few, did not jump at the bribe. He said +that he and Kaiba desired to inform me on the day of the funeral that +the chief had been murdered, but the brother said, "Do not talk about it +to the white people," and they had been silent for fear of offending +him; as natives never like to gain the ill will of their fellows. + +We might have heard nothing further about it, at least for a time; but +the brother was afraid the crime might leak out, and he still hoped to +silence the affair by giving the other chief some cattle. To do this he +was not willing to take of his own cattle, which he had taken from the +murdered man, but tried to take those of Kaiba, who was a good, +unassuming native. Kaiba greatly resented this disposition of his +property, and wanted to take the matter to the magistrate at Kalomo. He +and Lupata came to inform us of the murder and wished us to inform the +magistrate by letter. Lupata said, "I do not want his cattle and I think +you should write and tell the _Mwami_ [magistrate] of the murder." Both +refused to state who they thought was the murderer. + +Brother Taylor wrote an explanation of the affair and Kaiba carried the +letter to the magistrate, the brother and two other natives +accompanying. This was the first intimation the magistrate had of foul +play, and when he put the question to them they readily acknowledged +that the man had been murdered. The brother, however, who had always +been opposed to everything good, and had a very evil countenance, showed +the cunning of his master; and he and one of the men accompanying put +the blame on the third. This one acknowledged his guilt, saying that he +and the other had killed the chief and the brother had sent them. We +were informed later that the brother sent them three times before they +became willing to perform the deed. Of course all three were put behind +the bars. + +It was a case of alleged witchcraft. Several children had died in the +kraal under peculiar circumstances, and the blame had been laid by the +brother, who was a witch doctor, on the chief. We prefer to think, from +what we know of the two, that the brother was the guilty one in each +instance, and was desirous of the chief's property and position. + +[Illustration: Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River in the Matopo +Hills.] + +During this rainy season it was thought advisable for Brother and Sister +Taylor to go to Bulawayo and Matopo Mission for a much-needed rest. She +went in November and he followed in January, 1911. At the same time +David returned with his wife, Mankunku. Mankunku is one of the converts +from Mapani Mission. She is a sincere Christian girl, and has proved a +great help and blessing among the women and girls at Macha ever since +she came. These two, with myself, prosecuted the work at Macha for the +next five months alone. + +There were at this time forty-six boys and four girls staying at the +mission, and it was necessary, not only to teach them in school, but to +keep them profitably employed during work hours and out on the farm. +Quite a fair amount of land was under cultivation, and Brother Taylor +had planted grain, fruit, and vegetables before he left, the care of +which gave the boys plenty of work to do during the rainy season. As +soon as that was over David made use of them in getting grass and poles +together for building, and as permanent buildings were to be erected +they tried to secure hardwood rafters. + +Although there were so many boys together, yet all manifested a nice +Christian spirit. They were not quarrelsome, and they were obedient and +faithful in their work. The chief difficulty with natives is that they +are inclined to keep their eyes fixed on the missionary too constantly +and do not learn to depend on God for their own spiritual needs. The +missionary, as he realizes the responsibility resting upon him, often +feels like exclaiming, "Who is sufficient for these things?" to lead all +in the right way. He may rejoice, however, that he can continually say, +"My sufficiency is of God." He must also by every means in his power get +their eyes off of himself and fix them on God. Otherwise they will do +what is right at the mission and fall when those props are removed. + +June 16 I wrote somewhat as follows: + + Last Monday the wagon went to the Myeki River (about five miles + distant) to get some thatching grass which the boys had cut there + the week before. I thought it an excellent opportunity to visit + Semani, who has been sick for some time and not likely to recover. + I took along three girls and the two six-year-old boys and + thoroughly dismissed from my mind home cares. We had a delightful + ride over and a nice walk back, but best of all was the visit with + Semani. He had accepted Christ while here at the mission and had + often accompanied David in his kraal-visiting. He became sick, + however, and we seemed unable to help him, so he desired to return + home until he was well. He was always hoping he would recover and + return to us. + + He has pleurisy and is continually growing worse, and it is evident + that the end is not far off. He greeted me with a smile as I + entered, and while we were speaking, I inquired "Is Jesus here?" + The reply, with a bright smile was, "Yes, He is here." We continued + to speak of the things of the other world and what the Lord has in + store for His children, and through it all he seemed so ready both + to talk and to listen. His old heathen mother sat there in sort of + a dazed wonder to hear us speaking thus familiarly and without fear + of death and transition. For her sake I then asked him if he were + afraid to die. He quickly replied, "Oh, no, I am not at all afraid + to die; I am ready." + + Later, when we bowed in prayer, he prayed, "I thank Thee, God, for + Thy help and blessing. I have come through some hard places, but + Thou hast given me victory. And, Jesus, if my time has come and You + want to take me, it is all right. I'll gladly go with You." + + How we could rejoice that here was one who, only two or three years + ago, was a raw heathen boy, now so happy in the Lord, and so ready + to meet Him. If one soul is worth more than the whole world then + our coming to Macha has not been in vain. His people had been + wanting to "throw bones" and "smell out" the one who, according to + their ideas, had bewitched him, but he steadfastly refused, for he + has no faith in those things. + +[Illustration: The Bottle Palm.] + +Later it was my privilege to again visit him, together with Mankunku. We +had made a trip to a village beyond, where we remained for the night, +and stopped with Semani, both going and returning. He was much weaker at +this time and it was evident the end was near, and his friends had +gathered and were ready for the wailing. We found him, although in great +pain and with great difficulty in breathing, yet rejoicing and happy in +the thought that he was soon going home. He could not lie down, but was +supported in the arms of his mother, who was doing all in her power to +help him bear his suffering. He was, however, able to take a little of +the nourishment which we brought him. On our return the day following, +he was still weaker. In the night his friends thought he was dying, when +he suddenly roused and sang "_Jesu udi tu fwine_" ("Jesus loves me"). +These heathen friends in speaking to one another the next day said, "His +heart is white toward God, and that is the reason he can sing when +dying." + +Before we departed he requested Christian burial, so we left word for +them to inform us at once of his death. Word came that same evening. +Brother Taylor was at home by this time, and he and David, together with +a number of the schoolboys, went at once to the burial, although it was +night. They found the body prepared for burial and the people digging +the grave. Brother Taylor said everything was carried on most quietly +until services were over and the body had been buried; then the heathen +part of the wailing began in earnest. His brother, while wailing, +continued to cry out, "Semani, where has he gone? He has gone to the +light. Oh! where has he gone?" It was the wail of gross darkness seeing +a faint glimmer of light, but knowing not how to reach it. + +The deathbed of our friends, surrounded with all the comforts this life +can afford--soft beds, willing, low-voiced nurses, dainty food, helpful +and spiritual ministrations--is often trying enough; here, however, was +one deprived of all these comforts, with the exception of the occasional +visits of his missionaries, lying or sitting on the hard floor, with +only a mat for a bed, without even the ordinary decencies of life, much +less its comforts, in a village and home wholly pagan; and yet he goes, +rejoicing in his Savior's love, carried out of this dark hovel to behold +things "Eye hath not seen, nor ear heard, neither have entered into the +heart of man the things which God hath prepared," but He had already +revealed them unto him by His Spirit. + + + + +CHAPTER EIGHT + +Further Improvements and Industrial Work + + +Industrial work had from the first progressed very favorably at the +mission. The majority of boys, as they came, stayed on from year to year +and exhibited more tenacity of purpose than is generally to be found +among the natives. Some of them had assisted in making brick for the +house and in the building; others had learned to handle the oxen in the +wagon and on the farm in plowing, harrowing, and cultivating, while a +number were engaged in gardening, hoeing, and the general work of the +farm. Even the youngest were not idle, although their labors did not +equal the expense of their keeping. We were, however, growing sufficient +grain and food to supply our large family so that they could be kept +from year to year under Christian training without their proving a heavy +burden on the mission financially. + +In June we were pleased to receive Brother and Sister Taylor back from +Bulawayo, and with them a blessing to the mission in the person of a +little baby, Ruth Taylor. I use the term _blessing_ advisedly, for this +dainty little Ruth was indeed such to all connected with the work. These +people had not seen a white child, and this one was an ever-increasing +source of wonder and interest to the black faces around us. They would +stand near her noting every move and commenting on everything they saw. +Her soft white skin and spotless garments soon gave her a name. "U +swezhiwa" ("she is clean or pure") the girls called her, and thus she +undoubtedly looked by contrast. Her presence often attracted to the +services people, especially the women, who otherwise would have remained +at home; for in the eyes of some, all other interests paled besides this +mite of humanity, and it warmed their hearts toward the entire work. +When we went to the village she was again a center of attraction, and +when we went alone the natives would always inquire about U swezhiwa and +her mother. When prayer was offered by the boys for the missionaries, +the child was never forgotten. + +After Brother Taylor's return the preparation for building went forward +with accelerated speed. This dry season of 1911 was an unusually busy +one at Macha. A church was greatly needed, for the one which David had +erected four years previously, and which appeared to be so well-built, +was rapidly showing signs of decay. It was still standing, but the ants +had riddled the roof to such an extent that some of the timbers were +falling, piece by piece, sometimes to the danger and great annoyance of +those within. On this account we decided that it was best to vacate it +even before the new one was finished. The boys' huts also were decaying, +and we found it difficult to house the large number of boys staying at +the mission. These thatched roofs are very heavy, and if some part of +the wall becomes weak the huts may become dangerous to life. + +One evening the boys of one of the huts came to say that the roof of +their hut was breaking. We told them to take their blankets and clothing +and go into another hut. They did so, and in the morning their own +building was found leveled to the ground. As we viewed the sudden ruin +we breathed a prayer of thanksgiving that no one was hurt. There had +been about fifteen boys sleeping in that hut, and had they been inside +some would have been killed or seriously injured. This enabled us to +realize how dangerous huts were when partly eaten, and the need of +better buildings. + +On account of building it was fortunate that there was such a large +number of boys staying at the mission, and that the majority were large +enough to be of service, so that there was no need of employing outside +labor. Brother Taylor was excellent in training boys along industrial +lines, a quality which is especially useful and helpful on the mission +field, both in the interests of the work and of the natives themselves. +Some people are glad to use native helpers when they are trained ready +to order, but they soon become discouraged when time and patience are +required. + +The native learns by doing, and often learns by his many mistakes. +Again, he may be careless and consider accuracy unnecessary. He is +nature's child, and everything he does for himself is in curves. His hut +is round, his baskets are round, his paths are meandering, like the +stream, for he, like it, goes in the path of least resistance. Straight +lines and right angles are unintelligible to him, and he does not +readily grasp such things, nor does he easily learn to make them. +Patience, which is always a virtue, is, in industrial work among the +natives, an absolute necessity. One who will not take time and teach +them will accomplish nothing praiseworthy in this respect. + +We said the native learns by doing; so he does, but it is generally by +doing not once or twice but repeatedly. One of my first lessons along +this line was when visiting in the home of an official. The lady had +always lived in South Africa and had been accustomed to deal with the +natives all her life. Noticing a basket of snowy-white clothes I +inquired, "Who does your washing?" + +She replied, "The boys; I send them to the river to wash." + +"But how can you teach them to do their work so well?" + +"If they do not do it properly," she replied, "I send them back to +repeat it until it suits me." + +This is the keynote of the situation. In addition to showing them how to +perform a task, one must insist on their doing it just as they have been +told. If they become careless or learn with difficulty, one should not +become discouraged and go and finish the work--for this frequently is +easier than to teach the natives--but should insist on their repeating +the task until it is properly done. Some natives with very little +instruction become experts at certain kinds of work. And sometimes even +raw ones readily adapt themselves to housework with very little +training. A lady in Bulawayo, who was a very careful housekeeper, had a +native boy as servant, who was giving excellent satisfaction, yet she +supposed that on her own exertions depended the work of keeping the +rooms in order. Finally he concluded to leave her service, and she said +she did not know until after he left how much work he had really done. +He had been in the habit, early in the morning, before his master and +mistress arose, of going over the house, cleaning and polishing mirrors +and furniture. + +[Illustration: Macha Mission Church and Boys' House Built by Mr. Myron +Taylor.] + +Another native, whose name has been frequently mentioned in these pages, +was exceedingly cleanly and careful in his personal appearance. His +clothes were always well washed and mended, and he went on the principle +that a stitch in time saves nine. He learned to do things by seeing +others perform them and was able to do them well. Although coming from a +raw heathen home he was called an exceptional native, even by those who +had had long experience with civilized natives. + +As a rule those who are careful and painstaking are generally slow, and +many who are quick often do not perform their work properly. Some never +seem to respond to careful teaching, and with others, many both trying +and ludicrous blunders often occur. In the early days of Macha Mission +we had a half-grown boy, by the name of Hamambile, helping in the +kitchen. He was a good boy and seemed to be performing his work +properly. One day several of the boys, who had been working on the farm +and had soiled their hands, came into the kitchen. Hamambile was washing +the dishes, so he generously stepped aside and invited the boys to wash +their hands in the water where the dishes were being washed, and this +they were vigorously doing when Sister Engle stepped in at the door. Nor +did her presence in the least abash the boys, for they saw no +impropriety in the act. + +Again, during the last year some new girls had joined the mission family +and were being initiated into the mysteries of housekeeping. They seemed +to learn well and were doing their work properly, but one day Sister +Doner, on looking out of the window, was shocked to see a girl out in +the yard with the dishpan, washing her feet. She too failed to see +anything out of place in her act when she was first spoken to. She said +she was just making use of some of the nice soapsuds on the water, for +she thought it was too nice to throw away. It can easily be seen that +one needs to be continually watchful while teaching some of them. On the +other hand, there is no doubt that the raw native considers the white +man or woman very cranky and extreme when he insists on cleanliness and +order about the work. + +On account of the great need it was necessary to build both a church and +boys' house in the one dry season. There was erected a substantial +church, 42 x 21 feet, with a wide veranda in front, which was also +partly walled up, and a boys' house, 55 x 16 feet, of five rooms, with a +veranda all along the front. These were both of burnt brick with +thatched roofs. All the hardwood timber for rafters and plates, and also +the large amount of thatching grass, were procured by the boys the same +season, beginning in March and April. The bricks too were made and both +buildings were under cover by the 1st of December. This was all done +with the aid of the school boys under the supervision of Brother Taylor, +assisted by David. Part of the time the work was in progress during +school hours, the boys who assisted at such times receiving full wages, +as they are all eager to earn a little extra money. During the month of +brickmaking, the boys donated their time as an offering to the Church. + +After they had made the bricks, Brother Taylor started on the foundation +of the church, and then trained several of the Batonga boys in +bricklaying. Together with himself and David they laid the walls of the +church, all the larger boys having a share in some part of the work. The +walls of the building are high, are fourteen inches in thickness and +well laid. When this was completed Brother Taylor left David, assisted +by some of the boys, to put on the thatched roof, which too is an +excellent piece of work, while he turned his attention to the boys' +house. Nearly all the brick work of this building was done by the boys +under his supervision, and at the same time he was directing some in +sawing by hand and making door and window frames out of the native +hardwood timber. Later some of the boys were instructed in thatching it. + +When this boys' house, fifty-five feet long, was completed in January, +the only thing in its construction that had been bought for the purpose +was the zinc under the walls to exclude the ants. The doors were made of +the boards of packing cases in which a wagon had been sent from America; +the thatching was tied on with strips of animal hides procured from the +natives. The bedsteads were made of poles procured in the forests and +reeds from the river. These were tied with bark string, and over the top +were placed animal hides also bought from the natives. Later the rooms +were whitewashed and they, with the long veranda in front, made an +excellent and clean-looking home for the boys. The church had imported +doors and windows, as well as zinc and thatching twine. Otherwise the +material was almost native. + +[Illustration: Ruth Taylor and Her Mother. A White Child in the Midst.] + +It was a creditable year's work and Brother Taylor deserved much praise +for the ability with which it was all managed and the boys trained. No +doubt some, on reading these lines, might say, "I could never be a +missionary if I had to build like that!" "Where there is a will there is +a way," is just as applicable on the mission field as elsewhere. It is +surprising what one can accomplish if he is willing to be used. Every +one of the men on the mission field has done excellent work along these +lines, as the well-built brick houses and churches on the six mission +stations at the present day testify. Some at first declared that they +could not build, but, doubtless, today they look with surprise and +satisfaction on the work of their own hands. In addition to this they +have every reason to be thankful for the great amount of missionary work +they were able to accomplish in the building by training and fitting the +boys to a higher plane of living. + +After the buildings were under roof, Brother Taylor, who had always +desired to devote more time to evangelistic work among the villages, +felt that his way was opened to attend almost exclusively to that line +of work. Previous to this he had held services at many of the villages, +such as Mapanza, Simeoba, Kabanzi, Kabwe, and at almost all the +important villages near as well as north among the Baila; but during the +year following he went out with his tent and sometimes spent two, three, +and even four weeks at one place, so that he might have an opportunity +of giving the people a fair conception of the Gospel. He spent a month +at Chungu, near a large village, over twenty miles from the mission. + +He had visited the place before, but the people were not eager to +listen. At this time he pitched his tent a short distance from the +village and informed the people that he had come to teach them, and that +those desiring to hear should come to the tent at such a time as best +suited them. About 8 A. M. every day a fair-sized congregation gathered +at the tent and heard the Gospel expounded to them. He had some very +good meetings at that place, and the people became interested +sufficiently to request a school. + +During the year he found many open doors and gave the Gospel to a large +number of people who had never heard of a Savior, and there were urgent +calls to start new stations in the needy places. How one longs to see +some one step in at the opportune time and plant lights in the midst of +the darkness! + +While this work was progressing David devoted his time to finishing the +new buildings and overseeing the boys at work. A dear Christian lady had +sent out money for seats in the new church, and he began to make them, +and accomplished this task well, and the building was furnished with +good, comfortable seats. Some of the boys, in writing to their friends +who were away at work, said, "We have nice seats in the church and we do +not become tired when we sit on them a long time." A good solid floor +was also put in, and this was tarred and sanded. + +In November, 1911, we again had the privilege of welcoming Elder +Steigerwald to Macha. He had lately returned from a furlough to America, +and his visit was like getting a glimpse of the outside world. The +Mission Board had sent out with him for Macha a large two-seated spring +wagon with canvas top, something just suited for this country and +climate. It was a most welcome and useful addition to our outfit. +Especially since there are roads all over the country to the principal +villages, this was helpful in evangelistic work and in visiting the +out-schools, which were on the increase. The old days of laborious +tramp were more or less in the past, and a new era seemed ushered in. +Brother Steigerwald put the wagon together and added a long, useful box +in front. Four oxen were then inspanned and we tested it. It is indeed a +most satisfactory and comfortable conveyance and adds much to the +enjoyment of the work. + +While the bishop was with us eleven more boys were baptized and received +into church fellowship. The first ten were all standing true, so that +our number had now increased to twenty-one. There were as yet no girls +or women ready for baptism, but some were beginning to accept Christ as +their Savior. + +As the new church was nearly completed at the time of his visit, it was +thought advisable to dedicate this also before his return. He gave a +most excellent sermon on the occasion, and we were all strengthened by +his visit among us. + + + + +CHAPTER NINE + +The Native + +The most interesting thing in Africa is the native himself; the more I +see him and study him the more I respect him.--Bishop J. C. Hartzell. + + +I most heartily voice the sentiment expressed above. The study of the +native is a most interesting one and worthy of the best minds of the +age. The latent power and ability lying back of some of those crude +exteriors is often marvelous, and the transformation often wrought by a +few years of careful, sympathetic training far more than repays for all +the labor expended. + +From what has already been given in the preceding pages, some idea of +the native character may be gleaned, and yet it is impossible to give in +such a book an adequate conception of the nature of the natives. In +fact, the only way to know them is to live among them, and then one can +not be sure that he has the correct idea. The subject is so many-sided, +so elusive, and above all so changing that it is doubtful if any one can +tell all there might be given. + +This twentieth century has produced three large volumes on the African +native, which, in the estimation of the general public, seem to occupy a +preeminent position among the many books continually written. I refer to +"Thinking Black," by Daniel Crawford; "White and Black in South Africa," +by M. S. Evans; and "The Essential Kaffir," by Dudley Kidd. The first +is the work of a missionary who has spent twenty-two unbroken years in +the heart of the African Continent. The second is the work of a +politician who has studied the native problem deeply and sympathetically +from a governmental standpoint and has given his opinions and +conclusions in a clear and convincing manner. The third work might be +said to have been written from an independent standpoint, and is by many +Europeans in South Africa considered the best thing written on the +native. One who has lived long in Africa might be inclined to differ +with any one or all of these writers in some points, but they are all +excellent and well worthy of careful study. + +I was once speaking with an official who had had long experience in +dealing with native problems, and whose opinions along these lines were +sought after by others. I asked him, "Wherein do you think lies the +chief difficulty in dealing with the native?" He replied somewhat as +follows: + +"I think it lies in this: that the native so readily responds to +civilization and improvement, that he comes up to our highest +expectation along some lines; and then we, forgetting the generations of +barbarism back of him, think he should measure up to our expectations +along all lines. When he fails us at some particular point we become +disgusted and do not give him credit for the advancement he has made." + +There seems to be much truth in the above statement and it has often +been a help to me in dealing with natives. There is something else also +which must not be lost sight of, and that is that as much as possible +they should be dealt with as individuals. Too often the white man thinks +the natives are all made over the same mould, and that the +characteristics of one are the characteristics of all. He will often not +take the trouble to study their individuality, and perhaps he thinks +they do not have any. This is not surprising. Europeans often visit New +York, remain a short time and then return home, thinking they know +Americans, and can be found prating of how Americans do. If people come +to such superficial conclusions about such a heterogeneous mass of +humanity as exists in the United States of America, it is not surprising +that one or two natives in the eyes of many white people stand as a type +of all Africans. + +The writer has had an opportunity of studying the natives of four or +five tribes and has come into contact in various ways with several other +tribes, yet she feels that her knowledge of the native character is in +many respects superficial and unsatisfactory. It has this to recommend +it, however, that it is gleaned at first hand from many years' residence +among the raw and semi-civilized Africans. + +We have tried to show that the natives differ greatly in their ability +to learn in school and out of it, in their habits of cleanliness, and in +their readiness to receive the Gospel. As there was a large number of +boys about us day by day, we found that they also greatly differed in +disposition, as much so as white people, and it was necessary to study +the characteristic of each in dealing with them. They soon understand if +the missionary respects and trusts them; and they readily respond to +such treatment and show by their conduct that such confidence is not +misplaced. On the other hand, if they are censured for a fault, +especially if they think the censure is unjust, they soon become +careless and discouraged. On account of their secluded and simple life +they, even the grown ones, are much like children when they first come +into contact with white people, and they fail to understand why two +persons should treat them differently--why two missionaries or two +masters should not have the same way of doing things, the same +generosity and the same dispositions. + +Child-life of these dark-skinned Africans is in some respects not so +different from that of their white neighbors, unless it is in its +greater freedom. Until it learns to walk, the child spends much of its +time on its mother's or older sister's back, tied by a skin with its +face toward the mother. In the early days at Matopo, Matshuba once +inquired how our mother carried us when we were children. We said she +carried us on her arms. He nodded his head sagely and exclaimed, "That +explains it. That is why your noses are long and straight and ours are +flat." + +[Illustration: Little Nurses. Mianda Village.] + +On the mother's back the child sleeps and coos and observes what goes on +about it. Here it bobs up and down as the mother handles the hoe, stamps +or grinds the meal, or goes about her cooking. Here it takes rides as +the mother goes after wood or water, or on long journeys to visit her +friends. Occasionally she removes it from her back, straightens out its +cramped limbs, feeds it, and then places it on the ground to play. It +has no garments to impede its progress, and so it soon learns to help +itself, crawls about and picks up earth or whatever comes in its way and +eats it, no one objecting. + +As it becomes older the freedom is still greater, especially if it is a +boy. There is no school to confine him, no hard lessons, no table +manners, no daily washings, oftentimes. He runs, he hunts, he fishes, he +plays often the long day through, together with the other little ones of +the village. He has no clock to tell him the time of the day, except the +great orb above him, and this he learns to read with surprising +accuracy. As it sinks in the west, he comes with his assegais and +faithful dogs, and with a rabbit or some birds, carried on a stick +across his shoulders, proudly displaying his prowess in hunting. He +makes bows and arrows, popguns, plays hockey and other games, makes clay +animals, wagons, and many other things. In fact, some native boys are +genuine artists, and it is a pleasure to watch them deftly mould animals +of various kinds. + +His sister will have her doll, made from a stick of wood, a corncob, or +the like, and tie it on her back, like her mamma does. She plays at +housekeeping, grinding, cooking, and imitating her elders, the same as +her white sisters do. She is also expected to help take care of the baby +and younger members of the family, as her brother is often expected to +herd the cattle or sheep, for there are no fences to confine them. All +of these children, however, often suffer from hunger, cold, and +nakedness, and worst of all they generally indulge in many evils which +cling to them and greatly retard their progress when light comes to +them. They also become quite cruel and unfeeling about giving pain to +animals and birds. Every accessible bird's nest is robbed and the young +birds, partly plucked, are thrown, often while still alive, on the live +coals to roast and furnish them a dainty morsel. When a bird is secured +there is not the least compunction about plucking off all the feathers +without killing the bird. Once, when I was lying sick in bed, the four +girls staying at the mission came in laughing and carrying the fledgling +of a secretary bird. It was about the size of a half-grown chicken, and +had all the feathers plucked from it while it was alive, and in this +condition it was still blinking with its big, solemn-looking eyes. The +brother of one had brought it in this condition, and to them it was a +good joke to see it thus. + +As one enters the raw African's village and sees the native in the midst +of his filthy and uncouth surroundings, lacking seemingly the very +necessities of life, he readily concludes that the African is lazy, +shiftless, lacking in resources, and exceedingly dull or he would have +advanced further in civilization even before the advent of the white +man. To a certain extent this is true, for even the native, after he is +somewhat civilized and looks back to where he came from, has been heard +to exclaim, "We must be the dullest people on earth. Others could read +and write and knew something of civilization, but we Africans knew +nothing." We need, however, but to look back to our own Celtic and +Teutonic ancestry to see barbarism and illiteracy. + +The African pagan cannot be said to be lacking in resources, however. +He wishes fire and he goes and selects two suitable twigs of wood. Into +one he cuts a notch and the other he points. Placing the first on the +ground, he inserts the point of the other into the notch and twirls it +rapidly between his hands until it strikes fire. At the same time he has +on hand some inflammable substance upon which he places the fire and +soon has a blaze. He can thus roast his fish or meat. He wishes cooking +vessels; and the woman goes to the river and procures the proper kind of +clay, which she mixes with water and works until it is the required +consistency. She then takes a piece, and with deft fingers moulds it +into a circle, and places it on a stone or piece of broken crockery. She +adds more and more clay, carefully shaping it with her hands as she +proceeds upward until the top is finished. Then she puts it aside for a +while until the clay sets and becomes slightly dried, after which she +carefully removes and turns it and moulds the bottom, and when dried she +burns it. In this way she makes earthen pots of many kinds and sizes, +from the dainty small ones, which are often nicely glazed and +artistically marked, to the large, heavy beer pots, holding ten or +twelve gallons. + +Weapons for war, hunting, and domestic purposes are needed. The man goes +to the hills and digs until he finds the iron ore. He smelts it and with +the iron thus obtained makes axes, assegais, hoes, and other useful +implements. He burns wood and makes charcoal for his forge. His bellows +are made from the skins of animals and the pipes are clay tile; and the +anvil and hammers are also pieces of the iron he has obtained. He +moulds, welds, shapes, and performs all the work of the ordinary +blacksmith. If his hoe wears out he will take the iron that is left and +shape it into an assegai bristling with points. With three or four of +these and a shield made of hide, he will go out to fight his neighbor, +or perhaps he will have bow and steel-tipped arrows, which he dips in a +poisonous substance to ensure their deadly work. + +Or, if it is in time of peace, he makes use of his assegais and his +faithful dog and supplies his household with meat. If he has been +fortunate enough to secure an old blunderbuss of a gun, he tinkers at it +till it works. He may not be able by law to buy any ammunition from the +white man, or even lead to make bullets; but he will manage in some way +to obtain some ammunition. Perhaps the chance possession of a nail, or +solder melted from a tin can, will, by a laborious process, be turned +into bullets, for time is no object to him when working for himself. In +the same way he will secure some gunpowder or the ingredients for it, +either by barter with his neighbors, who have been to town, or +elsewhere. + +He wishes fish, and he will spear or catch them with hooks, or his wife +will, with willowlike twigs and bark strings, make a long troughlike +net, and as the water subsides she will supply her household with fish. +Both fish and meat are dried and preserved for future consumption. + +[Illustration: Batonga Fisher Women.] + +The native wishes a hut to live in. He goes to the forest and with the +axe cuts down poles and carries them home, and with his hoe digs a +trench into which he places them. With some forked sticks he makes a +neat doorframe. Thin, willowy poles are also brought and split through +the center, and one piece is placed on the outside and one inside of the +poles of the hut, and with bark strings he firmly ties these together +and thus secures the poles in their places. They are also fastened at +the top in a similar manner, so that the walls of the hut are firmly +fastened together, for of course his hut is round. With his method of +building he is wise in making it round, as it is more easily done and +stronger when completed. The slender, straight poles for the roof are +fastened together in the same way. These are often extended beyond the +walls so as to form a veranda, which may or may not be enclosed. The +wife takes her hoe or assegai and cuts grass to thatch the hut. She also +takes some of the beautiful long grass, and with bark string makes a +large mat to form a partition to separate the bed-room from the +living-room. They need a bed and the man will procure forked sticks and +fasten them firmly in the ground as bedposts, and on this with poles, +reeds, bark string, and animal hides he makes a bed. Skins may also be +used for blankets, and if they should be lacking in these they build a +fire or place a pan of coals underneath or near the bed. Some Africans +weave blankets and some make them out of the inner bark of the trees; +others purchase from traders. + +The native needs a chair, so he goes to the forest and, selecting a +certain kind of tree, he cuts a suitable block of wood. With his little +axe he hews and cuts until from a solid block of wood he makes a very +respectable-looking chair, or stool, varying in height from six to +fourteen inches. In the same way he makes spoons, stamping blocks, +dishes, and other household articles. These he carefully oils to prevent +cracking, and often colors and ornaments them. The natives along the +large rivers make their own dugout canoes. A large gourd or earthen jar +answers for a water bucket, one with a long handle for a dipper, a very +large one with woven top is used for a churn, a long one as a butter +receptacle, and a very small one for a snuffbox. A small piece of iron, +nicely shaped and beaten thin, is snuff spoon and handkerchief. + +A large flat stone, built in a clay receptacle with an earthen jar at +the end, is the mill, and on this another stone is used to grind. The +wife needs baskets. She procures palm leaves, bark string, reeds, and +willows and makes baskets of various kinds: a flat one for a sieve, +dainty little ones for plates for their stiff porridge, larger ones for +grain, and still larger ones for reaping. She also makes mats of various +kinds. Skins of animals do for clothing. They are so confident that this +is the native invention, that one of the boys, in reading of the +garments of our first parents, declared they must have been black +because they wore skins. The girls' loincloth is made of bark string. +Their clay pipes are often quite artistically made, and so hard that it +is difficult to distinguish them from metal. + +In all of these things just mentioned the native is in no way dependent +upon the European; they are of his own invention and manufacture, except +the rifle. It is not to be supposed that any one native makes all the +various articles. There are blacksmiths, potters, basketmakers, and +workers in wood, and the rest barter for or buy the things they need. + +Given various colored beads, some fine and some heavy wire, a few +buttons, shells, and ivory rings, and they are adept at adorning the +body, at least according to the native's idea of beauty. In some +respects the barbarous African's idea of ornamentation does not differ +materially from that of her white sisters, the difference being one of +degree rather than of kind. The American beauty thinks one or two +strings of beads around her neck are quite the proper thing, and add to +her charm. The African beauty will tell you that if one or two are nice, +four or five are nicer. It is the same with the bracelets; the American +belle is pleased with one or two on her wrists. The African is likewise, +but she is better pleased with a dozen, only she adds utility to beauty +and thinks that a lot of heavy rings around her wrists or ankles add to +their strength and give her corresponding value in the eyes of the +opposite sex. Then too she will tell you that her god told her to adorn +herself thus, which is doubtless true. + +What has been said of inventive ability applies more or less to all +pagan Africans, although in different sections of the country they +differ somewhat in their work. The Batonga, by whom we are surrounded, +do not at present remove the iron from the ore, but there are many +blacksmiths among them, and according to some of the old natives they +were accustomed to smelt the ore. There are certainly evidences of iron +workings in this part of the country. Brother Taylor made inquiry of an +old native in reference to these workings. He said that many years ago +the Batonga used to work them and thus obtain their own iron. Then their +Barotse conquerors came and killed all the iron workers and told them to +come to the Barotse and purchase their iron. No doubt this was done to +weaken them in battle. (See 1 Samuel 13: 19-22.) In this instance the +smiths remained, but they go to the Barotse to purchase hoes and pig +iron. Since the old ones were killed, the younger generation were afraid +to smelt the ore. + +All the Africans brew their own beer. They also grow tobacco, which they +both smoke and snuff, and they grow a kind of hemp which they smoke. Of +course they raise their own food, and before the arrival of the white +man some even procured their own salt. + +As to the general character of the raw natives--for it is of them we are +writing--we hesitate sometimes to tell what we do know. But the +missionary, however much he may think of the Africans and enjoy his work +among them, cannot, dare not, be blind to their faults. It has been said +of them that they are naturally liars, thieves, and harlots; a hard +saying, truly, but there is a measure of truth in it. As a people there +is little or no reliance to be placed on their word, especially when +they desire to shield themselves, their relatives, or even their tribes. +Possibly a native may tell an untruth for the mere pleasure of it. This +habit is so inbred that it is difficult to overcome it; and yet by +careful religious training, and the power of the Holy Spirit, one is +frequently surprised at the progress they make in speaking the truth +under very trying conditions--that is, when they are led to see the +evil of the opposite course. + +Thieving is probably not so prominent, but it exists, not only, as some +affirm, among the half-civilized, but also among the raw heathen. Every +missionary, who has seen heathen accepting the Light and confessing +their past, can testify to the truthfulness of this statement. Many +instances of stealing among them can be cited. I was told by a farmer, +who was living in the midst of pagan Africans, untouched by civilization +or the Gospel, that one year he employed about 100 women to gather his +corn. He suspected them of stealing, but said nothing until one evening, +just as they were starting for home, he suddenly rode in among them and +frightened them. The corn which they had carefully concealed about them +was scattered in all directions. + +Stealing, however, is not as common as lying; for while there does not +seem to be a strong public sentiment against the latter, there is +against the former, for the protection of their property. Those who +flagrantly disregard this are branded as thieves and are sometimes +punished. I know one native who was required by his heathen neighbors to +pay ten hoes for visiting their grain bins. Generally, however, grain, +either in the gardens or in the granaries, is not disturbed by others, +and one may allow property to remain exposed year after year and it not +be disturbed. The white man's law against thieving greatly assists the +native in the enforcement of his law. We have found some very +trustworthy natives, and none who have been with us any length of time +have proven dishonest, and they are frequently sent to carry sums of +money without in any way tampering with it. + +As to other forms of vice what shall one say? One European has been +heard to exclaim that "their morals are as black as their faces." That +they are dark no one can deny, for from childhood up vice in many forms +is common. It could scarcely be otherwise when one considers the filth +and degradation of their surroundings, where a number are crowded like +so many animals into a filthy hut, overrun with vermin and parasites of +all kinds. Some will tell you that there are none pure. It is true that +the lives they lead give little opportunity for anything elevating. Then +too their lives are open to the general gaze; nothing is hid. + +But take the modern city; dig it up from the foundation; open all its +cesspools of infamy, crime, and debauchery, and such a stench will +ascend to heaven that everyone beholding will cry out, "Babylon, the +mother of harlots and abominations of the earth!" And yet this is the +boasted twentieth-century civilization. Shall we, then, say that there +are no Christians in that city, or that there are none living good moral +lives who do not profess Christ? God forbid! All honor to the noble band +of men and women in our cities who, in the midst of fearful odds, are +living upright lives and helping their fellow-men. + +I believe I can safely say, from what I have seen and learned of the +inner life of the native, that in dark, heathen Africa, even before the +light of the Gospel penetrates, there are those who are moral and pure, +although the number is small. Then take the Christian natives; the life +of many a one is a living rebuke to some who decry mission work, and it +is too often because they are a living rebuke, that they are so fiercely +hated by some Europeans. People usually find what they are looking for, +and in Africa is no exception. + + + + +CHAPTER TEN + +The Native--Continued + + +Beggars the Africans naturally are, and when the white man comes among +them they are always eager to obtain all they can for nothing. They beg +of one another; then why should they not beg of the white man, whose +pockets are supposed to be full of money? Then too some of them think +the white man does not need money to buy food, clothing, and other goods +from the store. They will say, "You do not need money to buy things. You +just write something on a piece of paper and send it to Bulawayo and the +goods come." Experience has taught us that the greatest good one can do +the native is to make him work or pay for everything he receives, unless +it should be during a case of sickness or helplessness. + +It is a common expression that the African is lazy; and yet even this +must be accepted with a reserve and an understanding of his +surroundings. Aside from the effect of the climate, much of their +indolence and indifference is due to their smoking of hemp, a narcotic +drug, similar to the _hashish_ of eastern countries. This they grow, and +it is a common practice for the older, and for even young boys, to smoke +it. It seems to sap their very life and take away all the ambition to +better their condition. Yet the native can and does work even in his +home, when occasion demands. During the digging and growing season they +are found out in their gardens, which are generally at a distance from +the villages, from early morning until late at night, hoeing and +watching their crops to protect them from the ravages of the animals and +birds. During the hottest part of the day they generally stop for a time +to rest and cook. It is useless to attempt much evangelistic work during +this season of the year, except at night, for the villages are about +deserted during the day. + +They may, during the dry season, work for Europeans, but with some a +short time of such work suffices, as their wants are few. As one fellow +expressed it: "I have now sufficient money to pay my taxes. I only want +to work long enough to earn money to buy a blanket and then my needs are +all supplied." If they have food on hand, that is the extent of the +ambition of some natives. They feel that then, during the dry season, or +winter, they are entitled to rest, hunt, smoke, drink beer and palaver. + +Frequently, however, they must build in the dry season, for one of their +huts in this ant-ridden country lasts only a short time--perhaps two or +three years--and then another must be built. This is no small task, but +it is usually postponed until near the rainy season. In order to build, +the native is obliged to make frequent trips to the forest to procure +suitable poles and bark strings, all of which he must carry on his +shoulders. His wife too is inclined to postpone cutting the thatch grass +until it is nearly all burnt, and then it requires much more labor to +find enough thatch than if she had done the work at the proper time. +The rain usually is threatening, or even the first has fallen before the +man begins the actual building, and then he and his neighbors hurry and +put up the huts after a fashion. When asked why he does not build +earlier in the season he naively exclaims, "Oh! I leave it until the +rains come, so I must hurry and build it." In other words, he puts it +off until he is forced to do it, willy-nilly. + +As a rule the native is never in a hurry; he always performs his work +deliberately. That is characteristic of the country, or climate, rather +than of the individual, because no one in Africa seems to be in a hurry. +We had our first lesson in this on the threshold of the continent. Just +after we had reached Cape Town and had rented rooms, some groceries were +bought and ordered to be sent to the house. They were very slow in +coming, and we mentioned the fact to an American lady who had resided at +Cape Town five years. She replied, "We are all slow in Africa, and in a +few years you will become slow too." I cannot say that this has become +true of all our missionaries, but this is the general effect of the +country. The atmosphere, the heat, and the diseases, all have much +influence on a person. To hurry and violently exert the body in order to +complete a piece of work often brings on an attack of fever. Horses, +mules, oxen, and donkeys are not as hardy as in temperate climates, and +it requires several times the number to do the same amount of work, so +that it need not surprise one that the natives, who, as far back as they +know, have lived amid such surroundings, should be slow and indolent. + +There are three natives in our nearest village, all able-bodied men of +about 40 or 45 years of age. Two of them have four wives and one has +three. Since the hut tax is ten shillings a hut, that means that one +must pay thirty shillings (nearly $7.50) tax per year, and the other two +forty shillings (nearly $10). They are all intelligent-looking natives. +Two of them have been government messengers and know something of +European life. Now they are at home year after year, for they seldom go +away to work, because they are too lazy. How they secure their hut tax +is often a query, and about the only solution that seems possible is +that they beg some here and some there of natives who go away to work, +and they may occasionally have a little grain to sell. Often they are +short of food for themselves and their families. One of them at least +has had his family out on the veldt, living on fruit and roots and what +game he could procure, for two months at a time. These are extreme +cases, and one must feel sorry for the women and children when crops +fail, for they at least cannot go among the Europeans for work. + +The natives differ greatly among themselves in diligence and training as +well as in character and morality. While there are always some +improvident ones, who live on the charity of their neighbors, yet some +are exceedingly industrious the entire year. After their grain has been +cared for they go to the towns to work and earn money, buy cattle and +sheep, and in general enrich themselves. Workers in wood are always busy +making articles to sell to their neighbors, and other artizans do +likewise. The women also show the same difference of character. Some +are always busy and forehanded with their gardens, their grass cutting, +and cutting and carrying firewood to stow it away before the rains come. +The same difference is to be found in the training of families. + +In some of the homes the children are well trained along industrial +lines, according to the native idea of training. The parents require +them to work and bear a certain amount of responsibility in providing +for the family and in caring for the herds. For instance, a number of +our best boys came from a village called Mianda. They proved very +helpful and skillful in work and became some of our best builders and +teachers. Their parents were generally considerate when we had dealings +with them. Sometimes we had as many as ten boys at once from that one +small village, and the father of some would even help to see about his +herds so that his children might attend school. If a boy was needed at +home to help build or herd, the father would tell for just how long he +was needed, and we might be sure that he would send the boy back at the +expiration of that time. The children of this village were required to +be obedient and work while at home, otherwise they were denied food. +There were other similar homes. In the villages, even before +Christianity enters, the natives look upon some of the customs of their +tribes in various ways. Where there are large villages and many people, +dances and carousals are frequent occurrences and much immorality +results. Some of the parents forbid their children frequenting these +places of amusement on account of the immorality. + +Again, from some villages boys would come to the mission, stay only a +few days and then leave, because they were obliged to perform a certain +amount of work daily. We did not try to coax them to remain, for we +preferred to keep only those who were willing to work--the others seldom +amount to anything. Go into the houses of some such boys, and one would +see them lying about, not willing to herd, much less dig. Perhaps the +father will say, "Go and see about those sheep." The boy pays no +attention to the command. The mother comes and scolds him and seeks to +make him work, but with no better result; yet when food is prepared he +is the first one to be around the pot and no one forbids him. From these +instances it can be readily seen that African family training does not +differ materially from European or American. + +In many of the villages there are always some who desire to improve +themselves and better their conditions. They have their gardens, but, +work as they may with their primitive little hoes, they cannot make much +headway; or there may be a drought and famine is the result. They go +away and work for a time, and come home with a supply of clothing and +some money. They come to their dirty homes and filthy surroundings, and +their friends and relatives try to get as much of their clothing and +money as possible. They gradually become more and more sordid in +appearance, their clothing disappears, and we become disgusted with them +for so soon leaving behind the outward marks of civilization. But how +many months could we live their home life and be presentable in +appearance? + +Let us take Charlie as an example. He, with a number of other boys, went +to Southern Rhodesia to work on a farm. He remained a year and received +fifteen shillings ($3.60) per month, and he had to pay his way down and +back on the train. He came home at the end of the year with a nice +supply of new clothing and some money, and he looked as clean and +well-dressed as a European when he came to Church on Sunday. He is a +Christian boy and is trying to do what is right. Soon after his return +home, his father, who is one of the three lazy men I mentioned, and +extremely filthy in appearance, began wearing Charlie's clothes. First +it was a shirt and a piece of calico; then another garment; then his +nice grey coat. Charlie gave his little naked brother one of his shirts. +He wished to marry, and this took all of his money. In a few months he +presented quite a different appearance from what he did on his return +home from Bulawayo, and we began to blame him, at least in our minds, +and say that he should not allow himself to degenerate in this way. But +most of his clothing is gone and his money is gone; he does not even +have sufficient with which to purchase soap, so that he may wash the +remaining clothing. + +Says one, "He should keep at work and not come and sit down in his +home." The work takes him away from home, and his wages are low, so that +he must keep at it continually in order to maintain appearances. May he +not have any home life at all? It is a perplexing problem, and were we +forced to take his place we would no doubt conclude that the boy does +remarkably well under the circumstances. While at home he works in his +gardens and does what he can find to do for the white men near his home; +then, as his needs increase, he again goes to Bulawayo to begin again. +This is an actual occurrence and typical of many others. He may conclude +to have no home life, but keep up the semblance of civilization, hang +about the towns, and imitate many evils surrounding him, and in the end +prove a greater menace to society and to the country than if he would, +at least part of the time, live in his own home in a more primitive +manner. Again, if he depends too much on the stores of the traders, he +ceases to manufacture articles for himself, so that if he does finally +settle down for himself, tired of the struggle, he is often more +helpless than at first, because he cannot make the articles which his +father made. + +Is the native provident? or does he live from hand to mouth? Yes and no. +I heard a man who traded with the natives say that in one year he bought +about 1,000 bags of grain from them, giving in exchange goods from his +store. Before the next crop was harvested, he had sold about all the +grain back to them, at of course quite an advance in price. I have seen, +near our own doors, natives sell to European traders grain, either for +money or goods, from $1.25 to $2.50 for a two-hundred-pound bag and buy +it back later in the same season for from $6 to $7 per bag. But these +are extreme cases. In the latter instance a year of plenty was followed +by a year of drought, and the natives were far from markets and at the +mercy of local traders. Many of the natives had put in their granaries +what would have tided them over an ordinary season, but the prolonged +drought led them to want. Others had a comparatively poor crop the +previous year and this caused a scarcity. Some did not need to buy at +all, as they always look in advance for such emergencies and do not sell +their surplus until certain of a new crop. Such natives, when they do +sell, often sell to their native neighbors or exchange their grain for +cattle. Such are generally very thrifty, while there are always some who +are in want. In this too it may be seen that they are not unlike other +people. + +In fact, the Batonga taught their missionaries some lessons in caring +for grain. We found that they store their corn in the grain bins without +removing all the husks, and they shell it as they need it or near the +end of the season. With the Kafir corn they do the same way, cutting off +the heads and putting it away without threshing it. This was so +different from the thrifty Matabele, who carefully shelled and threshed +their grain, that the first time we visited one of the villages and saw +their method we thought, "How lazy! We must teach them how to do their +work properly." We soon discovered that in this hot climate the shelled +corn was soon weevil-eaten, and that the shelled Kafir corn was almost +ground to meal before the year ended. Now we are inclined to imitate the +natives in this respect rather than they us. It shows too that the +native adapts himself to the country and climatic conditions. + +The African is a genuine lover of nature. He enjoys being out in the +open air; he loves the bright rays of the sun. Everything around him is +pregnant with meaning. Nature is his school, and he knows the habits of +every beast, bird, or insect. In a measure he appreciates and loves the +beautiful, even though at first he may smile at the white man's love for +flowers. One day I inquired of an old heathen woman, who never came to +Church, why they moved their kraal from the rock-bound place in which it +had been, to the open plain. Her withered face brightened up, as with a +sweep of her arm she took in the magnificent scene before her and +exclaimed, "Is not that beautiful?" The native too shows good taste in +the selection of clothing after he has become accustomed to civilized +ways. We are inclined to think of them as being especially partial to +bright colors. A few are, but my experience is that the majority are +not. Many of the boys especially soon discard the native stores, where +cheap apparel is sold, and frequent the stores for Europeans. + +They love music and have several crude musical instruments. Their songs +are generally of war, love, marriage, and the chase. They also have some +songs suitable to their work. They of course have good voices for +singing, and can be easily trained to sing well. They have their +legends, their poetry, proverbs, and animal stories. + +Natives, although very generous among themselves, are not inclined to be +so to white people; perhaps because white people have not as a rule +treated them so generously. If the native wishes to sell anything and is +greatly in need of the money or clothing, he will often consent to sell +for almost any price. It is the same with work; he will work very +cheaply if he is eager to work. + +On the other hand, if the need is on the part of the buyer, he will ask +a very high price for grain or other articles and absolutely refuse to +give for less, especially if the buyer is an European. With work it is +the same. Even boys, after they have received a certain amount of +education and religious training, are very slow to accept the idea that +they should do anything for the white man from a sense of duty. There +are doubtless some very good reasons for this. They, however, respect a +master who is kind but firm, and it is best not to coax them. If they +find that we are not dependent upon them, and can get along without +them, they are more likely to conclude that they cannot get along +without us. + +The native is said to be lacking in gratitude to his benefactor, and +there is some truth in this. One often spends much time and labor to +train him along certain lines, with the hope that he will be of genuine +service in the future. Perhaps about the time he is able to take the +place for which he is fitted, he will often turn and, rejecting his +benefactor, give the benefit of his training to some one who can +remunerate him better. Naturally the missionary, or master, whichever it +may be, feels grieved at this lack of gratitude. Too often, perhaps, the +fault is on both sides, and we do not give him credit for the help he +has been to us. Then too it is difficult to put ourselves in his place +and see matters from his point of view. He has no idea of the value of +our time or training and we sometimes spoil him in the beginning. Would +not the best and safest way for the good of the native be to require +him to earn his way as he goes? Let him always work sufficiently, if +possible, to pay for the trouble it takes to teach him, whether in +school or in industrial work, or in work pay him small wages at first +and increase as he becomes more and more proficient. It may require a +little of his time, but it has not spoiled him, and if he should +conclude to go at any time, he has altogether or nearly paid his way in +kind and one is none the loser. + +The native, however, can, and many of them do, improve greatly along +this line after they have become Christians. While naturally they are +not inclined to be disinterested and generous to the white people, yet +many of them become so and display a remarkable spirit of self-sacrifice +in the Lord's service. Many teach year after year at a far lower salary +than they could obtain elsewhere; and, not only in teaching but in other +lines of labor requiring skill, they will work for the Lord for a much +lower wage than they could procure elsewhere, as all of our missionaries +can testify. Then too many of them often give largely of their penury +for the advancement of the cause of Christ. + +I was one day touched by the spirit manifested by a big fellow. He had +come to the missionaries destitute of clothing, but anxious for an +education. He was a hard-headed chap, both in school and out, and ran up +against many hard places before he became pliable. He received, like the +rest, a little money at the end of each term, but since he was in school +three and one-half hours each day, his time for work was limited and his +pay necessarily small. He, however, stayed at the mission and gradually +obtained some clothing and money to pay his taxes. He also began to +accept Christ as his Savior and from being a proud, obstinate fellow, he +became more and more docile. At one time the amount coming to him was +ten shillings ($2.40). His wardrobe was still scanty, but he took out +for himself one shilling of the money received and brought the remaining +nine shillings and said, "Here, I want to give this to the Lord." + +Giving the Gospel to the natives in their villages, while it is +generally a pleasure to the missionary, is not always an easy task. They +soon learn to be very quiet and respectful in the church, enter quietly, +take their places and go through all the outward forms of service, and +also leave without being noisy or talking, perhaps because they are +requested to do so. But when one goes out into their villages, even to +the best of them, there are many side issues. The chief, if he is +present and worthy the name, will aid in keeping order, and even if he +is not present, the majority may sit quietly and seem to be listening; +but perhaps the cattle get at the granaries and must be driven away, or +the chickens go into the huts and eat the meal and must be watched; +perhaps new ones are continually coming and must be noticed and greeted, +if they are allowed to do so. Then the babies are so interesting to +their mothers or those near them, or perhaps there is a mother with an +older child at her side, and she does not wish to lose any time; so, +during her enforced leisure, she is sedulously examining the child's +head or ornaments for parasites. Perhaps over there, outside the hut +door, is a man who has not had time to make his morning toilet, so he +concludes to spend the time in dressing the long locks of hair around +the top of his head. + +One does not like to stop and reprove them, because the rest seem +attentive and perhaps those are also listening, for the work they are +engaged in is such a common one! Again, all may seem attentive and the +missionary rejoices that the seed is falling into well-prepared soil, +and he continues eager to drive the truth home to their hearts. He +pauses to let it sink in--when lo! some one will make a remark wholly +irrelevant to the subject he seeks to impress upon their minds; it may +be in reference to some article of clothing he is wearing, or some of +their own needs. His enthusiasm cools, for he perceives that some, and +perhaps many, have paid little attention to the message. + +Again, one may be speaking, and the chief or headman repeats what has +been said, or he may ask a pertinent question, the answer to which +brings out other questions, which serve to elucidate the subject. The +other natives are led to listen; and while the discourse turns to be +almost a conversation between the speaker and this one, yet the +missionary goes away feeling that they have at least understood and +perhaps have received some light. Sometimes, again, one may have only a +few listeners and go away thinking nothing has been accomplished, but +God has taken care of the seed sown. + +I remember being out once with one of the Christian boys. We came to a +garden where a woman and her daughter were working, and we sat and +talked with them about Christ our Savior. This was the first time they +had had an opportunity to hear. Years passed and the incident was about +forgotten by both the Christian native and myself. That girl later, out +of much tribulation found her way into the Kingdom. Her father was a +hardened old heathen, and had sold her to an old man. He was going to +force her to marry the old man, but she escaped and fled to Matopo +Mission where, with Elder Steigerwald's help, she was set free. She +returned home, and later an European offered oxen and wagon to her +father for her. She steadfastly refused and kept herself pure. Today she +is the wife of a native evangelist and one of our most valued helpers. +She says her first knowledge of Christ was at that little meeting in the +garden, where she and her mother were working, and her present husband +and I stopped to speak with them. + + + + +CHAPTER ELEVEN + +Some of Their Religious Ideas + +Nevertheless He left not Himself without witness, in that He did good, +and gave us rain from heaven, and fruitful seasons, filling our hearts +with food and gladness.--Acts 14: 17. + + +The above quotation may apply to the African's idea of God in general, +but it seems especially applicable to the Batonga and kindred tribes. +Among these the word for God and rain are one and the same, _Leza_. This +does not necessarily imply that they have no conception of God apart +from the Rainmaker, but that conception is closely allied to rain and +kindred elements in nature. They understand the name _Mubumbi_ (Moulder +or Creator) and _Chilenga_ (Originator of Customs), but when speaking of +the earth and vegetation, they will say, "Leza [God] made these things, +because when leza [rain] comes, grass and vegetation spring up and grow, +so Leza made them." + +Of course their conception of Him, like that of all Africans, is very +remote. He is their Creator, but to approach unto Him is like reaching +out in the dark, in a vague sort of way, after something more powerful +than themselves, something or some one they know not what. In times of +great trouble, as in famine, fear, or when there is an earthquake or an +eclipse, they will worship God, not necessarily by word of mouth, but by +clapping their hands in reverence. They generally, however, like the +Matabele, feel that they cannot approach God. He is too great and +terrible, so they approach Him through mediators, such as departed +spirits, prophets, and prophetesses. + +Mr. Eddy, in "India Awakening," says: "Joined with these is the worship +of dead parents, where spirits are dependent on their survivors for +comforts, and who will avenge neglect or any deviation from custom. This +belief is (1) a religion of fear, since most spirits are malicious; (2) +a religion divorced from ethics, since spirits have no regard for moral +ideas; (3) a religion of custom, since the worship rests on tradition +and the spirits are apt to punish all departure from custom." This +statement in reference to India can be as truthfully said of the pagan +African. + +The Batonga, many of them, build roofs or small huts over the graves of +their dead. In them they will place skulls of animals and some of the +property of the deceased. Their descendants come to this place, bringing +beer and even water, and pour it out upon the grave in worship. If one +has been considered powerful while alive, has been a great rainmaker, +many people will gather around his grave in time of drought and pray for +rain. + +They have also their living prophetesses and prophets, to whom they turn +in times of need. These claim that the soul of some powerful deceased +one has entered them and bequeathed to them its power. In times of +drought these prophetesses--for they are generally women--multiply +rapidly. In a village of about thirty-five huts, near us, there were +said to be ten prophetesses during the drought two years ago. The +prophetic term of some of them is often very short, much depending on +their seeming success as rainmakers. Sometimes the prophetess will make +no claim for herself, but her friends will make it for her. The +prophetesses are very often immoral characters. + +Day after day people will come to the prophetess, as the time for +planting draws near, bringing their presents of grain or money and their +seed, that she may bless it and insure good crops. They come, sit down, +reverentially clapping their hands and beseeching her aid. The hunter +brings his gun, to receive medicine which will insure him prowess in +hunting; a man comes asking for medicine for his sick wife, who is +bewitched, and this medicine is to ward off the witchery. There comes +from afar an old woman, who claims to have the power of making their +grain last a long time by putting a certain medicine into it when +cooking. She is believed and the medicine is bought and put into the +food, and she rejoices in her pay. These heathens are always very +gullible and readily purchase anything which appears conducive to their +own interests. + +One day I saw a number of natives going to a village to worship a +rainmaker, so I concluded to go also and see what they did, for it was a +village near the mission where the Gospel had often been proclaimed. As +I reached the place the prophetess was in her hut, but a number of women +and girls were outside, clapping their hands in worship. Their faces +were familiar to me, and I could not avoid feeling sad to see how little +influence the Gospel had thus far had on their lives. Finally the +prophetess came out of her hut and was received with more clapping of +the hands. She was a large, powerful-looking woman and gave orders like +a queen, nor was she unqueenly in appearance. The worshipers were seated +around a large hole or excavation in the earth, and had several dishes +of grain which they had brought. They were told to sort the grain, +selecting only the best and whitest; and I am informed that some of the +grain, together with incantations, is dropped into the opening in the +earth, but this I did not see. She came and greeted me and spoke a few +words and then entered her hut. A man came to her for medicine for his +sick wife, who was bewitched, and others went to consult with her. +Finally I went to the door of her hut and spoke with her, inquiring why +these people were worshiping. She said: + +"They want rain. The spirit of a rainmaker who died a long, long time +ago entered into me and they come for me to make it rain." + +Knowing them so well, and being jealous for Him Whose ambassador I was, +I asked, "Do you really mean to say that you can cause rain?" + +Regarding me quite earnestly for a time she finally said, "No, I cannot +cause rain." + +"Why then are you deceiving the people and pretending that you can? God +only can produce rain." + +"Yes," she replied, "He alone can make it rain." + +"Then come and tell the people that He only can cause it to rain and +that they should worship Him." + +She willingly complied, and coming out of her hut, she spoke to them +very earnestly, telling them to worship God, as He alone could cause +rain. As she claimed to be only an intercessor, and no doubt did this to +please me, it did not necessarily interfere with her role as rainmaker. +Even the most pagan among them acknowledge Leza (God) as the Rainmaker, +and these only as His messengers. Since the people so readily transfer +their worship from one to another, they also freely come to the +missionaries to have them pray for rain. They have done this at Macha, +and the Lord has graciously answered the prayers of His servants. This, +however, does not seem to bring the native any nearer to repentance and +God, and one feels loath to heed their request, except in the case of +Christian natives. + +With the Batonga, wailing for the dead seems to be essentially a +religious requirement, and it is most religiously observed, so we +venture to include it as a part of their religion. When the news of a +death reaches a village, the people begin to wail at once, especially if +they be relatives, and continue to do so while they are moving about, +putting away their grain, baskets, and the few utensils they own, for a +stay of several days. They may be heard wailing as they pass on their +way out of their village to go to that of the dead. In a short time +perhaps the entire village is deserted. We were once camping near a +village of fifty huts, and news came that a relative had died at a mine +near Bulawayo. In a few minutes nearly all the inhabitants were on their +way to the house of mourning; for, although the body was buried about +four hundred miles distant, they firmly believed that his spirit +returned to his home and took cognizance of all they did. If a native is +traveling along a path, and word comes to him of the death of a +relative, he will begin wailing at once, and turning around proceed to +the place of mourning. + +Perhaps the reader will more fully understand what an African funeral is +if he in mind accompanies us to one. Apuleni's father had been working +in a mine in Southern Rhodesia. He became quite sick there and was +brought home to die. We visited his home, and found that they had taken +him to a temporary hut at some distance from the village. It is a very +common practice for them to do this, especially if one is near death's +door. His wife and daughters are near him, doing all they can to relieve +his sufferings. His lungs are diseased and it is likely to prove fatal. + +One evening word comes to the boy that his father has died. He +immediately goes home, while Sister Engle and I conclude to go and see +him buried. We have seen the wailings, but not the interment. It is +already dark when the word comes, so we take the lantern and together +with several schoolboys start for the village. We all go single file +along the path for nearly three-fourths of a mile, down the hill, across +the river, which is dry at this season. The night is quite dark and only +lighted up by the flame of the lantern. Up the hill we go, on the +opposite side, for over a fourth of a mile to the village. All along the +path the sound of wailing comes to our ears. Sometimes it subsides and +then becomes more violent than ever. Before death the deceased has been +brought back to his hut, and as we enter the village the men are sitting +around in groups outside and are quiet. We proceed to the hut of +mourning, which is crowded with women and is dark, save for the light of +the fire in the center, the flickering flames of which ever and anon +light up the weird scene. + +We stoop down and enter the low door. It is so crowded and hot that +farther progress seems impossible, and yet we manage to work our way +among the crowd, seated or standing and keeping up their doleful wail. +Our object is twofold: We wish to see, and also to show our sympathy for +the boy who has been with us so long and is a Christian, and we desire +to see the sorrowing wife and daughters, for we know them well and +believe that they will appreciate our presence and words of condolence. +We finally reach the partition which extends over halfway across the +hut. Near this lies a bundle about four or five feet long. It is a +somewhat shapeless mass, wrapped with a number of layers of blankets and +carefully tied. In the fitful light one might easily mistake it for a +bundle of clothes, but we know without asking that this is the body of +the deceased; for around it are seated the wife and daughters weeping +bitterly, and lovingly patting the wrapping of the body. The rest of the +women are mingling their tears with those of the relatives. We stoop and +speak a few words of comfort to the wife, but it is little we can give; +he had frequently heard of Christ, but refused to accept Him. As the +fire flames up we can see Apuleni standing in the shadow, and he too is +weeping bitterly, but more quietly. The boys who came with us make their +way through the throng and going to him mingle their tears with his, and +our own eyes overflow at the sight. + +But this crowded hut, without windows or means of ventilation and with a +hot fire, is unbearable, so we go outside, the boys following. Everyone +on the outside is quiet or speaking in low tones. Sister Engle and I are +given blocks of wood for chairs. From one of the groups of men the +chief, Lupata, rises and takes his little hoe, and after he has made +some measurements, he marks off the grave a few feet from the door of +the hut of mourning. In the meantime wood and logs have been brought and +several fires kindled, as night is nearly always cool. Around these +fires the men sit in groups, but the fires do not make sufficient light, +and some grass is brought from the roof of the hut and burnt near the +grave for light, so the chief may see to do his work in digging out the +first part of the grave. He then hands the hoe to another, who continues +the work. The ground is very hard and the work proceeds slowly, and +since they have difficulty in seeing, we place our lantern on a stamping +block near them. This is gratefully acknowledged by the little group, +and the digging continues. + +It is an uncanny scene: The steady, dull thud of the hoe as it digs into +the hard earth; the various campfires lighting up the dusky, grave faces +of the men in their heathen garb; the steady wail of mourning in the hut +near by--all leave an impression not soon obliterated. Thus perhaps an +hour passes and several men have taken part in digging, the loose earth +being removed by means of a basket; but the picking of the hoe has taken +on a metallic ring, for the earth is stony. The chief asks for kafir +corn, and a daughter comes and shells some and places a pan of it near +the open grave. Frequently some of this grain is dropped into the +opening, "to soften and appease the earth," they say, and the digging +continues, though but little progress is made. Then the chief calls to +the mourners, "Be quiet and do not make so much noise. Don't you know +that the ground is hard and stony?" The noise subsides and the digging +goes on. Soon the friends again begin their loud wailing, and since the +ground is still hard and stony, the chief finally goes to the door of +the hut and berates them soundly. "Be quiet! Do you not know that you +are making our work difficult by your lamentations? The earth refuses to +receive the dead" (because you are loath to give it). They become quiet +and the work continues. They think the very elements are arrayed against +them, and the friends must propitiate the earth by a willing surrender +of their loved one to its cold embrace. + +It is now midnight, and from the progress made we conclude that it will +take all night to finish the stony grave. We speak to the chief and he +says, "Yes, the interment will not likely be before early dawn." We +conclude to return home and have some rest. At an early hour we are +awakened and reach the village just at dawn. The grave has been dug so +that those inside can stand to their armpits. Then near the bottom a +further excavation is made in the side of the grave, sufficiently large +to receive the body. Two men remain standing in the grave while the body +is carried out amid the lamentations of the mourners. It is gently +lowered into the open grave and placed in the excavation in the side. +Earth is handed down in baskets, and this is carefully packed around the +body. Then comes the filling of the main part of the opening. As the +ground is lowered the two men stamp it down with their feet, for of +course they are not standing on the body. When it is nearly full, the +men emerge and several with sticks carefully pound the earth as it is +put in until the grave is full. + +All this time the friends have been standing around weeping. When the +grave is filled and all the rest of the earth removed, the head one +calls loudly, "Water!" This is brought in a gourd and all the relatives +and those taking part in the burial rush together; and as the water is +poured out on the grave, they wash their hands in the falling water. The +surface of the grave is by this time quite wet. The friends throw +themselves on the muddy grave with their entire force, so that one would +think bones might be broken. Some throw themselves repeatedly, and by +the time they have finished, their bodies are quite muddy, but the top +of the grave is pounded down as smooth as the surrounding earth, and by +the time it is dry the uninitiated could not tell the place of burial. + +Those participating then go to the river to wash, and the chief mourners +paint part of their bodies with an ash-colored soil. Word has been sent +to the friends and neighbors and the wailing proper begins. Men with +assegais, axes, or guns walk back and forth crying "Mawe"; the women +surround the grave, wailing and uttering various lamentations, such as +"My friend." "The father of Apuleni." A wife will have on her head the +deceased's hat; another will be carrying his assegai with the point +bent; another his stool. All this time the son remained quietly weeping, +taking no part in the heathen demonstrations. + +An important part of the Batonga funeral is the sacrifice of animals, +cattle, sheep, and goats. They think these have souls and accompany the +deceased. The number killed depends upon the rank and the wealth of the +one who died, although not all the animals sacrificed are his property. +Relatives often bring of their own herds for the purpose. Some of the +poorer class may have only one animal and small children none. At the +grave of the murdered chief they sacrificed eight head of cattle; at +that of another chief, a little farther away, there were twenty-two +killed. The meat of these animals is eaten by the mourners. At the +funeral which we have just described the man was poor. One of the +relatives slew a goat, and an ox of the deceased also was killed. Later +in the day, as the people began to assemble for the general mourning, +several young men came leading an ox for sacrifice. They were decked out +in a most fantastic manner, with pieces of bright-colored cloth and +various colored paper cut in ribbons. As they arrived near the scene +they made a rush for the grave, brandishing their weapons fiercely and +seeming to fight the very powers of darkness. + +One day Sister Taylor and I were present at the funeral of the daughter +of a chief. She was already buried when we reached the place and two +oxen had been killed. We had no sooner spoken to her parents and sat +down than a number of cattle were driven into the enclosure, between the +huts. An old native raised his spear and aimed at one of the cattle. The +rest were at once driven out while that one staggered and fell. A woman +stepped to the grave and loudly called to the dead that the animal was +slain and its spirit was coming. It was a sickening sight. The wailing +continued, and some of the people would run around the huts in a wild, +scared manner, as if they were fighting something. The air is to them +peopled with malevolent spirits, seeking to do them harm, and they must +ward them off. If one is dying they often beat their tomtoms in a +furious manner to ward off danger. Heathen death and burial is a sad +thing. It must be seen to know how terrible it really is. The warlike +Baila were accustomed formerly to sacrifice any one of another tribe who +happened to be in the neighborhood at the death of a chief, for all +strangers were enemies, and Gomo said he saw four or five human skulls +on a tree as he approached one of their huts. The wailing is kept up for +several days, especially at night, for it would seem that darkness adds +to their terror of the evil spirits. + +We have often endeavored to show them the folly of some of their +beliefs, and of course the Christians take no part with them. Even many +of the older people are losing faith in some of these things, but are +continuing to keep up appearances for fear of the rest. The chief near +us says he is not going to sacrifice any more cattle; he will keep them +and train them for oxen. + +Some are very eager to have white cloth in connection with burial, and +one old man at some distance north of us, who has a son in Bulawayo, +desired us to write to the son, telling him to bring him a white shroud +for burial. Whether this idea has come in through the white man I am +unable to say, but it has probably come through some natives who have +been to the towns to work and there learned something of Christian +burial. Among some half-civilized natives in some parts of Africa, the +idea prevails that if one is put in a coffin, and has a Christian +burial, he will go to heaven. + +There is also a second and sometimes a third wailing, consisting of a +beer drink and a dance. This too is generally held at night. The friends +and relatives come together and the half-intoxicated mourners engage in +singing and dancing. The actions are most lewd and disgusting, for these +are often genuine carousals of the basest sort; but they are most +religiously engaged in, and people who believe that the departed spirits +have such power over the living, are loath to ignore any established +worship of such spirits. + +_Shikazwa_ is the messenger of witches and is supposed to bring harm, +sickness, or death to its enemies. This class of spirits they say never +dwells in a human body. They are always disembodied spirits and mediums. +The belief in witchcraft and transmigration of souls is similar to that +of the Matabele and need not be repeated. The native, too, has firm +belief in the efficacy of charms to ward off sickness or accidents and +to bring good fortune, and the dispensers of these articles do a +thriving business. + +There are various other beliefs in the possession of spirits, which are +not very well understood, and some of them seem to be comparatively new, +even among the natives themselves. While I was in Natal, in 1910, a +missionary was telling me of a difficulty they were encountering among +the native girls. They became possessed with an affliction not unlike +hysterics, and when it was started in a neighborhood it spread rapidly +even among half-civilized natives. I say hysterics, because this lady +was enabled to check its advance by punishing the first one who was +afflicted in that way in her school. I had never witnessed anything of +the sort among natives until my return to Macha in that same year. One +day, while out kraal-visiting, I was surprised to see something of the +same nature. They tried to keep the actions of the young woman, who was +afflicted, from my notice, and hurriedly attempted to quiet her by silly +remedies. When I inquired what was the matter, they quickly replied, +"Nothing." The boy accompanying me said it was demon possession. This +has spread over the country among the girls and young women. The natives +called it _Masabi_. The older people do not care to mention it or, if +they do, it is in sort of an apologetic manner. They claim that the +spirit of some bird or other animal enters the person and causes her to +act so strangely. The usual remedy resorted to is to beat the tomtoms to +drive away the spirit. They claim that the so-called possession is +comparatively new in the country, and that it came from a tribe +northeast of Macha. + + + + +CHAPTER TWELVE + +A Few of Their Customs + + +The Batonga are very dark in color, although not always black. Their +features are regular and well formed, and the people are intelligent +looking. Some of them are large, but as a tribe they are not as +powerfully built as the Matabele. Their tribal mark amounts to almost a +deformity. When a boy (or girl) is about fourteen years of age, he is +taken to the native dentist. The head is put on the ground and held in +place while the dentist with a blunt instrument knocks out the front +upper teeth, usually four, sometimes six in number. The gums and lips +become much swollen and inflamed by this barbarous procedure; but in +time they heal, and the child is a Mutonga or Mwila, and this deformity +proclaims his tribe wherever he goes. + +The natives never care to have the process repeated. Other natives often +go to their missionaries to have teeth extracted, but the Batonga seldom +or never do. They prefer the suffering which comes from neuralgia or +toothache. This barbarous custom, like many others, has nearly had its +day, and many of the boys have already rebelled since they have come +into contact with other natives or Europeans. It will require more time +for the girls to break away from it, as they live more secluded lives, +and have developed less independence of character than their brothers. +A mother will tell her daughter that it is a shame for a woman to have +upper front teeth. She should be like the cow. + +They are all very fond of grease for their bodies, either animal fat or +butter; and in this hot, dry climate this is not so objectionable, if +they use it in moderation, by simply oiling the body to prevent the skin +from cracking. Many of the women, however, use the grease to excess. +They grind red ochre and, mixing it with the grease, paint their bodies, +including their hair, red, which is their idea of beauty. In this +perhaps they are more excusable than some others. Clay often is used in +dressing their hair, and buttons, beads, and shell are sewed to their +hair, as ornaments. + +The men too take great pride in dressing their hair, and in this respect +generally surpass the women. They shave part of the head and let the +hair about the crown and back of the head grow long. This they +straighten out, and it looks not unlike strings hanging from the back of +the head. This is carried to extremes among the Baila. There the dude +lets his hair grow and then goes to the hair-dresser who, with grease, +hair, and other materials, builds it up into a chignon on the top of his +head. With some, this chignon is only five or six inches long, but in +the interior of the tribe it is said to be sometimes three feet in +length. Brother Steigerwald on his trip north saw some of these long +ones. Of course the head cannot help lying uneasy with such a weight. + +[Illustration: Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens in the Foreground.] + +Among these people the clan, or perhaps I should say the kinsfolk, forms +the unit. They all are closely bound together and each one more or +less responsible for the others of his relatives. In marriage, death, +sickness, or trouble, all are concerned in the affair. When difficulty +arises the heads of each clan listen to the affair and settle the +dispute. Perhaps the persons most interested may have no opportunity of +expressing an opinion, especially if they be younger and unimportant +members of the families. + +An unfortunate accident occurred among some boys and one lost an eye. +The one who caused the loss was not more to blame than the one who +suffered the loss. It was purely accidental and without malice, and all +who were spectators so regarded it. The one who suffered the loss +desired that no attention be paid to the affair, but the father and +elder relatives thought differently. They called a meeting of the heads +of the two clans and discussed the affair with great deliberation, and +in a most dignified and respectful manner. The boys were not consulted +and there was nothing said in reference to its being an accident. An eye +was lost and it must be paid for, and their custom is to require the one +causing the loss to give all his property. In this instance the boy +considered at fault was young and his father was dead, and all his +property was three head of cattle and a sheep. His relatives said these +animals would be given; but the other boy's father said, "No, that is +not sufficient. I will accept them, but the affair will not be settled. +When he acquires more property, I will take that also." This was what +the deliberations hinged on. The faulty one would be unable to secure +any more property; it would all be taken away from him, so his elders +were willing to give what the boy had, only on condition that that would +end the matter. It could not be settled that day, but later the other +party agreed to take that and consider the affair settled. + +[Illustration: Cattle Pen of the Batonga.] + +A little fire often kindles a great conflagration among them. Once a +murderer was taken through our premises on his way to the magistrate. He +had come from a distance and the difficulty was something like this: A +native had a needle, and his neighbor borrowed it and lost it. The owner +of the needle demanded and received an ox in pay. Some time afterward +the borrower found the needle, and bringing it back to the owner wanted +his ox back, but the ox was dead. The trouble finally resulted in +murder. + +In marriage the question of kinship also is prominent. Marriage is not +merely the union of two people, or even two immediate families, but of +two clans, and the prominent members of both must be consulted. If a man +sees a girl whom he wishes to make his wife, he first consults his +parents, and if there is any objection among his relatives the matter is +dropped. If, however, they are satisfied, his mother goes to the mother +of the girl and asks for her daughter. If the immediate relatives of the +girl object a negative answer is given. If they look with favor on the +proposed alliance, they consult the other prominent relatives, which may +require considerable time. Some one may object because a relative of the +proposed groom quarreled a great deal with his wife, or some one may +affirm that he is lazy. Trouble that has arisen between the clans in the +past, such as that relating to the boy's eye, may be a formidable +obstacle, although the parties concerned may have had nothing to do with +the accident or the settlement of it. If all are agreed, well and good. +All this time the bride has had no voice in the affair and generally +does not know what is transpiring. + +[Illustration: A Batonga Family Traveling.] + +Betrothal among these people may take place when the girl is quite +young, but generally not until the girl is from 14 to 18 years of age, +and then it is of short duration, as marriage follows soon after it is +found that all the relatives agree. The old people, especially the +mothers, take the affair in hand, the interested parties merely +following their instructions. The groom is told to be ready. Perhaps he +has been looking forward and gathering together the _kukwa_ (pay or +dowry) for the occasion. He has been buying hoes, from ten to twenty of +them, for these are always a necessary part of the pay, probably because +they are all farmers and the native-made hoes always command a good +price. In addition to these, he procures a lot of cloth, beads, money, +and some assegais. He freely calls on his relatives and friends to +assist him in procuring the needed pay, for they have had some choice in +the affair. The day is appointed for the wedding, but before this +arrives the girl is informed who is to be her husband. She may or may +not be pleased; her choice in the matter is wholly ignored. She has +been trained all her life to obey, to keep herself hid, and has very +little freedom until after marriage. Should she even be pleased with the +choice, she is expected for modesty's sake to protest and cry out and +struggle and declare she will not submit. + +The mother of the bridegroom takes the pay and goes to the house of the +bride, the groom and his best man following. They put up a booth near +the kraal of the bride for the groom to occupy. We enter the village and +find the relatives of the bride, from far and near, assembled for the +wedding, for all these expect to receive some of the pay. The women and +the girls gather and begin to sing the marriage song, the tune of which +is always the same, but the words are improvised for the occasion. One +of the older ones will lead off and say, "This girl is going to be +married," and the rest will assent by singing in unison, again, "We +shall receive some hoes, so that we may dig our gardens," and again the +response. All this is done in a monotonous but not altogether unmusical +manner. Another will take up the lead, and a day or two will be consumed +in this way until everything that can be thought of in reference to +marriage, good, bad, and indifferent, is repeated in song. The bride, +however, is not among the singers. We pass through the village and a +young woman beckons us to enter a hut. The other women greet us, but our +guide with a smile mysteriously leads us into an inner chamber. Here is +a young woman, greased from head to foot, so much so that the grease +drips from her body. A blanket is thrown around her and over her head, +and she keeps her eyes down in a miserable-looking fashion, as if she +were crying or pouting, and never by the least sign acknowledges our +presence. We are new to the situation, but it suddenly dawns upon us +that this is the bride. We inquire, "What is the trouble? Does she not +wish to be married?" "Oh, yes," is the answer, "but she must be sad +because she is a bride." + +[Illustration: Native Women--Widows.] + +In the afternoon the relatives gather around the hut of the groom to +receive their presents, and each makes a choice. Of course they are +expected to be reasonable in their demands, because sometimes there are +forty persons to receive presents. The father or men nearly related to +the bride may take more liberty; one or two sometimes demand ten +shillings. While the best man is trying to satisfy all these demands, +the groom is often berated soundly by some, and even at times suffers +bodily violence. If his supply of goods is reasonable in amount, so +that nearly all are satisfied, the bride is given to him at once. If +very few presents are on hand the proceedings may stop and he or his +best man be obliged to go among his relatives and secure more money or +goods. If he is slow in this, difficulties may arise between him and the +girl's relatives until it come to blows. Not long ago a groom, about +four miles from Macha, was so violently attacked that he died from the +blows given. This is unusual at the present day, but it may have been +more common formerly. Even if the wedding has passed off all right the +girl does not at once go to cook for her husband; it may be several +months or a year before they fit her out with earthen pots, baskets, and +the like and she goes to housekeeping. In the meantime she is supposed +to be so modest that she will not speak to her husband or lift her eyes +in his presence. The modesty of the Batonga girls is in striking +contrast with the behavior of many other African girls, and immorality +does not seem as prevalent among the unmarried as in some other places. +Even the Baila girls are much bolder, both in looks and actions. If a +girl is bold, and goes about alone, she may generally be conceded to be +of an immoral character. When the bride is finally taken to the house of +her husband, the father may demand a cow or two as additional pay. If +the girl refuses to go, she often is carried by force. Sometimes the +mother may refuse to have the girl leave home, and then the husband is +obliged to live at the kraal of his parents-in-law. If he has two wives +he often thus has two homes. + +The groom must always show great respect for the wife's parents, and +especially for her mother. When she appears on the scene, he must leave, +if escape is possible; otherwise he must sit quietly, not lifting his +eyes in the august presence of her who gave birth to his wife, so that +the life of the native who lives in the same kraal with his +mother-in-law is not a very pleasant one. When he meets his +father-in-law he salutes him by clapping his hands, and the salutation +is returned by the father-in-law tapping his chest with his right hand. +The husband may never call his wife by her maiden name, but he gives her +a new one of his own. + +[Illustration: Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife.] + +The fact that the marriage is the concern of so many, and is so rigidly +controlled by the elders, places many obstacles in the way of the +missionaries. It is difficult for Christian boys many times to gain the +hand of Christian girls, and for Christian girls to be given to +Christian boys, as many of the older people object to their daughters +entering the Christian clan. At present the missionary is not allowed to +interfere in these native customs, and the girl has no recourse. Custom +says she must obey her parents and relatives, and the law upholds +custom. Being under such close supervision all her life, she has no +opportunity of developing independence of thought and action like her +brother. The missionaries are looking for better times, however, and ask +that all who read these lines pray that the day may speedily come when +the girls and boys may have more right of choice. We have reason to +think that the day is dawning when this form of slavery will also be in +the past. + +[Illustration: Giving the Gospel in Macha Village.] + +Again, the fact that kinship has such a hold upon the people, and each +one is in a measure responsible for or dependent upon the rest, renders +freedom of thought and action difficult among all. It tends to retard +development of character and makes evangelization difficult among them. +It does not interfere to the extent that caste does in India, but it is +by no means a negligible quantity. This and blind custom form pretty +strong bands, for the native does not like to stand alone or be odd from +his fellows. When the Gospel is given to the people they may appear to +listen attentively and outwardly accept what is said, but try to press +home the question to individual hearts and the leader will answer for +all, "Yes, we are all Christians. We accept what you say. Our hearts are +white toward God." One who understands the native character cannot +avoid being skeptical when he hears of entire tribes turning to the +Lord. They may in outward form, for what is popular with the leaders is +popular with the crowd. It is easy for them to put on the form of +Christianity and go through all the ceremonies of it, but with how many +there is a change of heart remains to be seen by the lives they lead. + +The Batonga do not build as good huts as the Matabele, nor do they put +in a polished floor; perhaps, because the ants are so numerous in this +part of the country, the hut soon falls to pieces and must be rebuilt, +even though they may have built it carefully at first. Their presence +also may account for the Batonga making bedsteads and chairs, whereas +the Matabele do not. Their huts too are not only the home of the people, +but at night, goats, a calf or two, dogs, and sometimes chickens are +housed in the same hut, so that it would not be easy to keep a +respectable-looking place. As their flocks increase they build separate +huts for them, as everything must be well housed on account of wild +animals. + +In many other ways they differ from the Matabele. They do not have +digging-bees like the Matabele; in fact, they do not call their +neighbors together for any kind of work, except that the men assist one +another in building. If they have a beer-drink it is a sociable +gathering or a wailing. The beer is brought and always tasted first by +the giver, to show that there is no poison in the cup. Each woman digs +her own little garden alone, or with her children. When we entered the +country the Matabele would not touch fish, the dislike being so great +that it almost amounted to a taboo. Among these people fish is the +staple article of diet. The only reason that seems plausible is that +here there are many large rivers and fish are abundant, while in the +other country there are none. These people do not kill twins, but they +do the children that cut the upper teeth first. Eggs are tabooed to +unmarried boys and girls, and a superstitious reason is given and +strongly believed in by them; but back of it the object of the elders in +enforcing the taboo seems to have been to prevent young Africans from +robbing the nests and lessening the supply of chicks. There are many +other taboos among the tribes which are strictly adhered to, the origin +of which could easily be traced to expediency. + +The Batonga will tell you that the assegai is the weapon of the man and +the hoe of the woman. As one sees the men always armed with assegais, so +the women generally carry a hoe; nor is it always just an ordinary hoe +for digging. Her husband sometimes procures for her a dainty little hoe, +having the handle beautifully ornamented with fine woven wire. This has +no other use than to be carried with her as she goes on a journey or to +a wailing, and she is very proud of it and nothing will induce her to +part with it. + +They have many forms of salutation, more than any other tribe of natives +that I have met, some general and others special, for morning, noon, or +night, and they are very punctilious about saluting, but never in a +hurry. They greet not only the one they meet, but also inquire about his +wife and children, especially the baby, and about what he eats, as well +as other questions in general. If a number of persons are sitting down +and another group approach, they too will be seated and perhaps a few +general remarks may be made; then the salutation begins. Every one in +the first group must individually greet everyone in the second group and +ask about his health and receive an answer to the same. There is no +confusion, no hurry. The native does not shake hands except as he has +learned it from the white man; he greets only by word of mouth, or on +special occasion by embracing. + +A very pleasing incident in reference to one of the salutations, +_lumela_ (rejoice), is given by Rev. Chapman, one of the pioneers of the +Primitive Methodist Mission, and I give it in detail: + +"One of these old men could still remember Dr. Livingstone's visit to +Sekeletu, about 1855. The doctor was known among the Makololo as Monare. +When I showed the old man a photo of Dr. Livingstone he was greatly +excited. + +"'Yes,' said he, 'really and truly that is Monare's likeness. He wore a +moustache just like that; it is indeed Monare.' + +"'Can you really remember Monare?' I asked. + +"'Of course I can,' said he. 'Why, it was Monare who brought us the +salutation we generally use. Before Monare came we used to say, when we +met a friend on the path, "_Utshohile_" ["You have got up"]. But when +Monare came he said, "_Lumela_" ["Rejoice"], and we replied, "_E Lumela +ntate_" ["Yes, rejoice, my father"]. Why, it was he who told the +Makololo to live in peace, and rule their people well. See how white my +beard is? Of course I can remember Monare.'" + + + + +CHAPTER THIRTEEN + +Later Years + + +The work at Macha continued to develop slowly but steadily. There are +many daily duties which always fall to the lot of the missionary and +which might be classed under the head of drudgery, which do not seem to +count, and yet they are as necessary for the advancement of the work as +the more noticeable ones, and the year 1912 was no exception to this +rule. + +During the rainy season there was also a very anxious time, as Baby Ruth +became very sick with infantile remittent fever. For over a month she +was very ill and we were afraid that we might lose her. Day after day +she lay with her face almost as white as the pillow, except for a bright +spot on either cheek. The nearest doctor was one hundred and fifty miles +away, and the station through which two trains weekly ran was thirty-six +miles distant, so that medical aid seemed impossible, save that given by +her parents, who anxiously and tenderly ministered unto her; but many +prayers ascended in her behalf and the Lord had compassion on us and +restored her to health. This climate is treacherous for grown people, +but especially so for children. + +[Illustration: Macha Mission, 1913.] + +We have as yet mentioned nothing in reference to the medical part of the +work. This was not a prominent feature, yet from the first all who came +for help received attention and many were cured or permanently helped. +All kinds of diseases are to be met with in this climate, in addition to +fever. Skin diseases seem especially prevalent in many forms, some of +them the most loathsome imaginable; and nearly every village also has +its quota of from two to four lepers. These lepers freely mingle with +the rest of the people, no effort whatever being made to segregate them. +The native will affirm that leprosy is not contagious, it is hereditary, +and there is reason for this view of the case. It makes the heart ache +to see women without toes and sometimes without fingers, and full of +sores, nursing beautiful, innocent babies, when we think what a life is +before these little ones. + +These people also have their own remedies. When one is suffering with +pain in any part of the body, a very common remedy is to resort to +cupping. For this purpose they use the horns of animals, usually of +goats. I once watched one woman cupping another. With a knife or piece +of sharp tin, she made two incisions in the flesh where the pain was. +She then placed the large end of the horn on this, and with her mouth on +the small end she removed all the air from the horn, which soon became +filled, or nearly so, with blood. Leaving this horn on the place, she in +a similar manner applied another horn, until three or four had been +applied at various places. She then carefully removed them, one at a +time. Since the object had been to extract the blood, it had certainly +been successful, and in some respects the natives are only half a +century behind--that is all. + +In some diseases they very readily come to us, and sometimes fifteen or +twenty are present at once, awaiting their turn. At other times we are +called to the villages to minister to them. Once some natives came from +the nearest village to say that a woman was dying. Her husband at the +time was one of the carriers for the brethren on their trip north. We +hastened over and found her in a little dark hut, where we could see +nothing, so they were told to carry her out into the light, that we +might see her. The livid spots, spongy gums, and extreme debility all +helped to indicate a bad case of scurvy. She was seemingly in the last +stages, and we were fearful that the call for help had come too late. It +was a year of great scarcity of food among the natives, and from the +report she must have been living chiefly on a sort of greens, with no +salt even to season it. It was now about dark, and they said that if +something was not done at once she could scarcely live until morning. We +looked to the Lord for direction and then hastened home to procure the +needed food, which in this instance was quite simple, salt water, and +boiled-down grape juice, with a little vinegar. These were used +carefully during the night, and in the morning she had improved +sufficiently to eat other food. In a few days she was able to be up, and +her husband, on the way home, was informed that she had been raised from +the dead. + +As the work advanced, we arranged to use one of the huts for a hospital, +where those who desired might remain and be treated, and a number +availed themselves of the opportunity. Both Mr. and Mrs. Taylor were +quite successful in medical work, and some difficult cases came for +treatment. In this year Brother Taylor treated some very severe wounds, +ulcers, cancer, a boy with his hands blown to pieces by gunpowder, a +native badly lacerated by a leopard, and an European who had +accidentally shot himself, in addition to other cases. We have also had +opportunity at other times of ministering to white people. + +Whether or not the missionaries have had training in such work in +civilized countries, the exigencies of their surroundings, far from +doctors and medical help, necessitate their devoting time and study to +the cases continually brought before them. Many of them become quite +proficient in treating diseases; and perhaps some, in time, become by +practice more skilled in treating diseases of tropical climates than +some physicians of temperate zones would be, who were unused to tropical +diseases, even though they might display their sheep-skin to show a +theoretical knowledge of the science. The safest and best course, +however, would be to acquire some of the theoretical knowledge before +coming to Africa, and then be ready for the practice. + +It is needless to state that the missionary's practice among the natives +is not a lucrative one. Medicines are very expensive, and a physician +must have a diploma from an English medical college before he may charge +for his professional services in an English colony. Even then his +heathen patients are not prepared to pay much should he feel to +charge--which he generally does not. The missionary's labor is one of +love, and he rejoices that he has the privilege, in a small degree, of +being a follower of the Great Physician. Aid for the body of the natives +is one of the best ways of reaching their hearts and souls. + +[Illustration: Ruth Taylor.] + +During the two weeks' vacation in July some of us concluded to spend the +time in evangelistic work among the villages. We knew the change to +outdoor life also would be beneficial to ourselves. There was one +village, Kabwe, composed chiefly of Baila people, where an interest was +being manifested, and several there had been attending school. This was +distant about fourteen miles by wagon road, and we decided to go there, +David and his wife and the dear little baby, who had come to bless their +home, accompanying. Word was sent ahead that the people should erect a +temporary straw hut for them, while I occupied the tent wagon. When we +reached the place we found everything prepared and in readiness for us, +and the people also. We received a royal welcome from all and were soon +comfortably situated. There were fifty huts in this village, and every +evening after the people had finished their day's work and had eaten +their suppers, about fifty or sixty of them would come to us, sit around +our bright log fire, and listen most attentively, while the Word was +being expounded, and then quietly kneel in prayer, and mingle their +voices with ours in song. In the morning again, before they went to +their gardens to dig, they would assemble for services. On Sunday we +gathered on the side of an ant hill, in the shade of some trees, and +here a much larger number came for services. Generally during the day +David would go to the surrounding villages and proclaim Christ. + +There were several in this village who occasionally came to Macha on +Saturday and stayed for Sunday services. One Saturday evening at Macha, +after the rest of the natives had passed out of the evening worship, two +women from this place remained for inquiry and prayer. They very humbly +confessed their past life and said they wished to be Christians. We +knelt in prayer, and I think I never before heard raw natives pour out +their hearts in such intelligent and heartfelt petitions as they did, +and their prayers for pardon were heard. We were pleased to learn, while +we were at Kabwe, that these women were standing true and being a light +to the rest. + +[Illustration: First Christian Marriages at Macha.] + +One evening during the meetings at this place an unusual number of +natives were gathered around the fire, and the Word was preached by our +native evangelist with unusual power. A hymn had been sung and prayer +offered, and the people were told that they could go home. Still they +sat there without a word being spoken, and they were evidently in deep +thought. Finally a girl arose, and coming forward weeping said, "I want +to be a Christian. Will you pray for me?" Before we knelt, a general +invitation was given to others who desired to accept Christ to come +forward. This evidently was what they wanted, and at once men, women, +and girls began to press forward and kneel, and we had a most blessed +season with them as one after another began to open their hearts to the +Lord in prayer. It was a melting and breaking-up time. Among the number +who came was the chief of the village and several other elderly men and +women. The next morning they again came together. David had gone to +other villages for the day, but his wife and I held the service. This +time, as soon as opportunity offered the people began to confess their +sins and say that they wished to leave their past lives and follow +Christ. Nor do we have any reason to doubt their sincerity. The world +about them, peopled with malevolent spirits, seeking to do them harm, +and their own accusing conscience would naturally drive them to a Savior +Who can give them rest and peace. Praise God! He can give even these +older ones freedom from the chains of darkness. + +Since we find the younger ones more easily persuaded, I believe we too +soon become discouraged with the older ones and expect too much of them, +or too sudden a transformation in their lives. I was pleased by a few +sentences in Brother Frey's letter under date of April 4, 1914. He says: + +"Last Sunday there was a goodly number of the old men present. We have +sent out word that Brother Steigerwald will have a special message for +the old on next Sunday, and we are giving a special invitation to all +the old men to come.... A number of these old men have been coming more +or less regularly for some time. Will you not join with us that they +might be saved?" + +That is the right spirit, and what Brother Frey is seeking to do at +Mtyabezi we can all do. The old want to feel that we have a special +interest in their salvation, and that we are not going to leave them to +themselves in the struggle; but let us help them to know that there is +One Who can and will set them free if they will only come. In this +little meeting at Kabwe even some of the older ones who started are +still striving to get on the Rock. One middle-aged man and his wife, who +came forward that night, have finally moved near the mission and built +them a hut there, so that they might learn more about Jesus. The chief +very strongly urged our starting a school at that place, which we did +not long afterwards. + +[Illustration: David Moyo and His Wife and Child.] + +We remained at this place nine days and then moved to Simeoba's village. +Although some of the other missionaries had visited this village, I had +never had the privilege previous to this. It is larger than the rest and +is made up of three different tribes of people, Batonga, Barotse, and +Baila, but the language of all is more or less similar. They were +stranger and more shy than those at Kabwe, and as soon as we reached the +place, Mankunku and I went through the village to meet and learn to know +the people. Everywhere we were kindly received. They were greatly +surprised to see a white woman who could speak their language; and as +the word was passed along, one after another would come and join the +number who were conversing. About all were in ordinary native garb, but +there were two or three who evidently had been down to Bulawayo to work, +and they prided themselves on their European clothes; especially did one +of these step about as if lord of the place. Some of the sick asked for +help and were ministered unto, and we were pleased to learn that some +were helped. All were invited to assemble around our fire in the evening +for services, and as soon as their suppers were over they began to +gather, about one hundred in number, around the bright, blazing fire, +the shy ones keeping in the background where they could not be seen. +Many of them no doubt had never been at a service before, while a few +who had been at school at Macha could help sing. One or two of those +more pretentiously dressed than the rest evidently had attended meeting +elsewhere, and were at this meeting self-appointed law-and-order men. +With such a raw crowd as most of these were, we always try to sing easy +hymns in which there is a great deal of repetition; we also line the +hymns before singing and have them repeat after us, so that it was not +long before nearly all joined in the singing. Kneeling in prayer is so +new an experience that some of the uninitiated sometimes consider it +amusing and begin to laugh. In this instance two or three girls caused +some disturbance while we were in prayer; and we were scarcely on our +feet when one of the self-constituted policemen jumped over some of the +others and soundly berated the offenders. Order was then restored and +the service proceeded without any further interruption, after which the +meeting closed. + +The next morning I was awakened by a woman outside my tent clapping her +hands and thanking me, saying, "You are my healer." She had been +afflicted with neuralgia the day before; and on asking for medicine, she +had been given a cup of very strong hot lemonade, which had cured her. + +This day was Sunday, and as the people were again invited to assemble, +about one hundred and twenty came, and we had an interesting service, to +an attentive congregation. We then turned our faces homeward, stopping +on the way at Kabanzi, one of our regular preaching places, and holding +a service. We reached home that night, ready for school, which was to +open the next day, and feeling greatly benefited by our outing. + +[Illustration: Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers on a Visit to +Macha.] + +We were all at this time well housed, but there still was need of a good +store building, as the old ones which had been used for this purpose +were about all tumbling down. David had already made some brick, so +after our return he began on the building, with the assistance of some +of the boys. He erected a very good building 33 x 16 feet, containing +two small rooms and one large one, with a veranda around it. It was a +good piece of work and was finished in about two months. The large room +was for his wife and child. + +David had never been satisfied with his education and was still anxious +to attend school, especially an English school. He had some opportunity +for private instruction at Macha, and also taught part of the time, but +generally there were so many duties and responsibilities, both temporal +and spiritual, resting upon him that he had very little time for study, +and he felt that he must get away where school work would be his first +work. We greatly preferred that he remain and continue his labors at +Macha, but he no doubt realized that the pupils too were progressing, +and he needed more knowledge if he was to continue as teacher. The +latter part of September he started for Natal to attend school. We +receive a good report of him from his teachers. He is said to exert a +good influence over the other boys in the school, and he is also +frequently called upon to do evangelistic work among them. Will you not +join with us that he may be kept humble and not get away from his call +to give the Gospel beyond the Zambezi? + +His wife remains with us to help in the capacity of Bible woman. Their +little girl is a dear, bright, intelligent child as she grows up amid +civilized surroundings, and is a good example of what a better +environment will do for these people. + +Sister Taylor had now been away from America nearly eight years and had +not been to the seashore for a change of climate since coming to +Interior Africa. She had enjoyed good health nearly all that time and +had been diligent in season and out of season in the Master's business. +She was a most useful and resourceful missionary always, but the time +had come when she was in sore need of a furlough to the homeland. +Brother Taylor too had not been to the seashore, and it was necessary +for both of them to leave. They were greatly needed in the work at +Macha, and we could not see how we could get along without them, but too +many missionaries on the field have, under the pressure of work and the +needs about them, remained longer than was expedient, and paid the +penalty with their lives. In February, 1913, they left Macha for their +homeward journey. + +About two months previous to this Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger had returned +to Africa, and came to Macha to take the place of the Taylors. +Unfortunately, however, both of them were stricken down with fever about +two weeks after reaching the mission station. They remained seven +months, and during that time there was almost one continual combat with +fever, especially on the part of Brother Wenger. United with this was +great nervous disorder and prostration, so that it seemed impossible for +him to stand the climate. They greatly desired to remain and continue +the work, but since it seemed impossible for him to endure the climate, +he wrote to Elder Steigerwald, who finally arranged for them to try +Johannesburg. We felt sorry, both on Brother Wenger's account and for +the sake of the work, that they were unable to remain on the field. + +During the time of these seemingly necessary changes among the +missionaries at Macha, the work continued to grow and develop. There was +no increase in the number of boys, but some of those who had been with +us were proving helpful as teachers and evangelists among the people. +The work had been branching out and six schools were started; in some of +which men, women, boys, and girls were attending. In the early years the +converts were of those staying at the mission; but since the opening of +the out-schools the work was spreading much more rapidly, and some of +the married people, as well as the girls, had accepted Christ and were +living exemplary lives in their homes. These also attended the +Inquirers' Class and church services at Macha on Sunday. + +[Illustration: Batonga Chiefs, Near Macha Mission.] + +There are several services held each week at the mission. Besides the +daily worship, there is on Sunday morning an Inquirers' Class and a +Members' Class, both held at the same hour but in different rooms. These +are held on this day because so many have far to come. Then comes the +general church service, followed by Sunday-school, for which all remain. +In the evening there is a song and Scripture service for those staying +at the mission. Thursday morning early is a midweek service and +testimony meeting; and on Friday night the Christian natives have their +prayer meeting, presided over by one of their number, while the +missionaries have a prayer meeting in English. In addition to these +there is a monthly prayer day, the first Friday of each month, on +which day all our out-schools are closed and teachers and many of the +pupils meet with us. + +These were often times of great blessing to all of us, one of which +especially might be mentioned, the first Friday in May, 1913. On this +day there were nearly one hundred natives present, consisting of members +and class members; and eight of our boys who had been south to work for +a year had just returned home and were present. On such days many of the +Christians were accustomed to spend the early morning hours out alone in +secret prayer, before the opening of the meeting. On the above date, as +we stepped into the church in the morning, we realized that there was +unusual manifestation of the Spirit's presence among us. Several of the +boys took part in the opening seasons of prayer in a very impressive +manner. We read a Scripture lesson and for a short time spoke on +cleansing and consecration and the infilling of the Spirit, and they +were unusually attentive, which always helps the speaker. Expectation of +some kind seemed in the air. The testimony meeting opened with heartfelt +testimonies. Then one's testimony became a prayer for greater outpouring +of the Spirit. Again we knelt and he continued in prayer. Suddenly the +very house seemed shaken, and with one accord all were prostrate before +the Lord. Some were smitten with a spirit of conviction; others began a +service of praise, and still others lay low, letting the Lord talk to +them and fill them with His own Holy Spirit. The united prayers +continued for two or more hours, and while there was noise of prayer +and praise there could not be said to be any disorder, as all but one or +two remained at their places. Many received a deeper understanding and +experience of Divine things that day. Once Brother and Sister Wenger and +myself began to sing, but they continued in prayer and we stopped +singing. There were some present who probably received no benefit. In +Africa, as in America, there are some at such times who follow the rest +outwardly at least, but do not seem to be benefited in heart. + +The latter part of June Elder Steigerwald came to see about the work at +Macha. It had been one and one-half years since his last visit, and we +were glad for the privilege of again welcoming him. With him was Miss +Elizabeth Engle, who had for six years been a most valued worker at +Mtyabezi Mission; also Mr. L. B. Steckley, who had two years ago come +out from Canada as a missionary and was helping in the work at Matopo. +These two were to take up the work at Macha, while Mr. and Mrs. Wenger +proceeded to the Transvaal, to occupy the station at Boxburg, thus +enabling Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Eyster to return home on furlough. + +While Elder Steigerwald was with us at this time, eighteen native +Christians were baptized and received into the Church. Among them were +several married men, three women, and four girls. Some of these were the +first fruits of the out-schools. We rejoiced that at last we enjoyed the +privilege of partaking of the Lord's supper with some dark-skinned +sisters of the Batonga tribe. It was now nearly seven years since the +mission had opened in this place, and these were the first native women +to join with us. The women had also been slow to desire civilized +clothing, for our desire had been to impress upon them more the inner +than the outer adornment. They were, however, becoming anxious to be +clothed, and as many of the boys who had now grown to manhood had +adopted European clothing, our congregations were quite different in +appearance from the old days. At this time also two couples were united +in Christian marriage. These were the first native Christian marriages +at Macha. Since natives are so often inclined to extremes on the dress +question, in marriage, we made it a special point to say nothing about +new clothing for the occasion. + +A number of others made application for baptism, but it was thought best +for some to wait awhile, so six months later Elder Steigerwald came to +Macha again. This time he was accompanied by his wife and Sister Doner. +Ten more natives were baptized and there were several candidates who +could not meet with us at this time. There were also three more couples +united in Christian marriage. There have been fifty-nine baptized at +this place, but three or four were not as true as we could have desired. +One of those who had backslidden was the first boy brought to the +mission, the son of Macha. He had never been very zealous in the +Master's service, and yet his life had seemed consistent. The Lord may +find a way into his heart again. + +It frequently happens on the mission field that young boys will come to +the station, learn, and then leave without any special manifestation +that the Gospel has entered their hearts, yet an impression has been +made on their plastic minds, and it often follows and convicts them +later in life. So the missionary need not be discouraged if the first or +second invitation fails to bring the native to the foot of the Cross. + +We greatly enjoyed the visit of Brother and Sister Steigerwald, and were +eager for them to see some of the out-schools. We started out for this +purpose, but were all taken with fever, one after another, and the +visits had to be abandoned. Sister Doner had come to assist in the work +at Macha and take charge of the school. She and Brother Freys had just +returned from a furlough to America, and as I had now been in the work +nearly nine years and needed a change, she, together, with Sister Engle +and Brother Steckley, was to take charge here during my furlough. The +latter two had been at the place some months and were beginning to know +and understand the people and surroundings. Sister Engle in her capacity +as nurse was having ample opportunity to care for the sick, who were +always glad for help. She is always a most capable and willing worker +wherever needed. Brother Steckley too is a consecrated soldier of the +Cross and ready for whatever comes to him. + + + + +CHAPTER FOURTEEN + +The Out-Stations + +Every place that the sole of your foot shall tread upon, that I have +given unto you.--Joshua 1: 3. + + +Just as the Lord told Joshua to rise up and take possession of the land +of Canaan for God and His people, so we believe He is saying to all +missionaries whom He sends out into the midst of the enemy's country, +that He has given the people unto them and they should rise and take +possession in God's name. We often live beneath our privileges in this, +and our faith so soon becomes weak and wavering. God also says to us, +"Be strong and of good courage." + +There are two objects which seem paramount on the mission field, and +about which everything else revolves. These are, (1) the salvation of +souls, and (2) the preparation of natives to become teachers and +evangelists of their people. Dispense with these fundamental objects and +one might as well remain at home. Missionaries may differ in regard to +the best methods of carrying out these purposes, and some may even +object to the statement just made. With some missionaries, education and +civilization hold a very prominent place, and with a few missionary work +spells education and civilization, and we are sorry to say that the +number who take this view is increasing. The great body of +missionaries, however, of whatever name, are such from love of souls. +The aim should be to get the native really saved and on the Rock, Christ +Jesus, so that he may become a light in his home. At the same time we +should seek to train him to become a soul-winner among his people, so +that a knowledge of God may be spread over the country. In this way only +can the Great Commission be successfully carried out. + +In Africa, especially, are teachers needed on the mission field, for +before the missionary comes there is no written language, much less any +who can read. To teach the people to read the Word is not only +desirable, but it is an absolute necessity if it is to be a Light unto +their feet in that dark land. We do not claim that a native cannot be a +Christian unless he can read, for some of the older ones live exemplary +Christian lives, although unable to read the Word; but among the younger +generation they very seldom become established Christians if they are +not willing to apply themselves sufficiently to study so that they are +at least able to read the Word of God understandingly. Then too the +spread of the Gospel cannot continue unless some are able to read. + +I call to mind two able and Spirit-filled missionaries who spent two +years in self-sacrificing labors among the natives of Africa. They went +about from place to place, giving the Gospel to the people, and they +were liked by the people and frequently had many attentive listeners. +Several years after they returned home one of them wrote, "We spent two +years in giving the Gospel to the Africans, and yet we cannot point to +one soul whom we definitely helped." We believe they underestimated the +value of their work, for they always aimed to labor in harmony with +other missionaries on the field and would advise natives to go to the +nearest mission station. Yet the fact remains that unless the younger +Christian natives attend school and learn to read the Word, and have it +instilled into their minds from day to day, they are apt to forget and +wander away. + +I have dwelt thus at length on the educational feature of the work, +because there are many good Christians who fail to understand why so +much of a missionary's time is occupied in teaching the natives. It is +simply for the reason that that is the only means they have of learning +to read the Word of God. Among the natives of Africa there are no +schools but the mission schools, and the chief purpose of these is to +teach the natives to read the Word understandingly, so that they may "be +able to teach others also." On the other hand, since schools are such an +essential part of the work, there are not wanting those who confuse the +education thus obtained with religion itself, and think all who become +able to read are Christians. That is a consummation devoutly to be +wished by every missionary, but it is no more true in Africa than it is +in England or America. The fact that it is not true in those civilized +countries may have much to do with the fact that it is not true in +Africa. + +Since the day-school at Macha never assumed large proportions, and there +were many children all around us, especially girls, who were not in +school, it had been the aim from the beginning to train teachers who +might be placed in the various villages to teach and give the Gospel to +the people in their homes, and thus multiply the work done by the +missionaries manyfold. A number of schools had been started in this way. +In this work it is always necessary to use great care in the selection +of teachers, that they may be teachers of righteousness as well as +teachers of books. A boy may be quite apt as a scholar, and so far as is +known be a moral person, but if he has not yielded himself to Christ as +his Savior and has not a love for souls in his heart, he often does more +harm than good as a teacher. In other words, he must be a missionary as +well as a teacher, and lift up Christ among them. We often send a boy, +who is prepared, back to his own village as teacher, if we have such a +one. Mr. Worthington, Secretary for Native Affairs, when informed of +this said, "I greatly approve of your custom of sending natives back to +their own home to teach their people. I think it will obviate many +difficulties in the way of native teachers." + +The out-schools are superintended by the missionaries, who if possible +visit them once a month and advise the teachers in reference to the +work. If the schools are too far away for the pupils to attend church +services at the mission, arrangements are made for services to be held +more or less frequently at the schools. The native teachers also hold +daily worship and Scripture reading with their schools, and all others +who desire to attend. + +In order that my readers may gain some information in reference to the +out-schools connected with Macha Mission, you are invited to accompany +me on a visit to them, such as I made shortly before returning to +America. Miss E. Engle will accompany me, as she has charge of them +during my absence. Two of the boys are also going as leader and driver. +While we are absent on this trip, Apuleni will have charge of the school +at Macha. He was the second boy to come to the mission, nearly seven +years before, and has been with us ever since, except for nearly +eighteen months, when he, with other boys, went away to Salisbury to +work. He has made good in school, and has accepted Christ as his Savior. +He says his chief desire is to know the will of God and do it. He is +well versed in the Scriptures, is a good teacher and helper in +Sunday-school, and reads, not only his own Tonga language, but also Zulu +quite readily, and English, and acts as an interpreter from these two +languages into his own. He is also prepared in the other branches +taught. As he is our assistant teacher all the time, we know the school +will not suffer in his hands. + +We are going in the large two-seated spring wagon with a white canvas +top, sent out by the Board two years ago. One of the seats is removed, +and in the back part of the wagon is placed a box containing food, +dishes, and the like equipments for our meals. There is also put in a +large five-gallon can of good drinking water, two folding canvas +bedsteads, a bundle containing bedding, and a mosquito net, and +underneath the wagon in a framework is a tent which we have lately +acquired. There is also a small bag of cornmeal, a tin of ground +peanuts, some dried greens for the boys, and some whole peanuts for all +of us. Where the dashboard was originally is now a long box in which are +placed kettles and cooking utensils. And we do not forget to stow away +in the box of the seat a quantity of bananas and lemons, of which the +mission has an abundance; also some fresh vegetables. A small canvas +bag, in which the drinking water is cooled, hangs on the side of the +wagon. Four oxen are inspanned and one boy takes hold of the strap in +front to lead the oxen, and another, with a long, slender pole, to which +is tied a long, slender leathern lash, drives. He sometimes sits on the +box in front and sometimes runs along the side. + +We remember the times, not so very long ago, when we were not so +comfortably equipped for traveling as we are at present. We walked many +weary miles to see the people, and thoroughly enjoyed it too, even +though the hard earth at times was our bed and the open canopy of heaven +our tent, and native food in part supplied our needs. Then it was not +possible to visit as many places in a day as now, and frequently when we +arrived we were too tired to do justice to the Word. Then also we failed +to reach many villages, because of the distance. Now it seems almost too +good to be true that we are so well supplied, for the Lord has again +wonderfully verified His precious promise, "to do exceeding abundantly +above all that we ask or think." Praise His Holy Name! Yet we would not, +if we could, do away with those early days and the blessings attending +them, and we are better able to appreciate present favors by contrast. + +[Illustration: School at Kabanzi Village.] + +Usually we endeavor to start not later than sunrise, so that we may +travel in the cool of the morning; for the sun becomes quite hot in the +middle of the day, and it is advisable then to be under shelter. At this +time, November, however, the morning is cloudy, so that we may have +rain; but the clouds make traveling pleasant and we start. We go north +and a little east. Where the roads are good the oxen trot off briskly; +but in many places there are deep ruts, caused by the heavy rains of +previous years, which make progress slow. In some places the ruts are a +foot or two in depth, and it is necessary to make a new road along the +side, for there are no government-built roads in the country. + +The grass of the previous year's growth was burnt off in June or July; +and ever since, as far as the eye could reach, nothing could be seen +except the great stretch of undulating reddish-brown earth, destitute of +everything, save here and there little patches of dried grass, which had +escaped the scorching fires, and scattered trees, almost destitute of +leaves. There has been no rain for six or seven months; yet spring is +approaching, and already in the rich valleys may be seen tender blades +of grass springing up. On the bare brown hills here and there are +flowers of various kinds, which gladden the eye and relieve the monotony +of the scene. Where the moisture comes from at this season of the year +to produce such delicate blossoms is a cause of conjecture. Then too, +already many of the trees and shrubs are putting forth their tender, +beautiful green leaves, some of which look as delicate and shining as +wax; and occasionally one sees a tree or shrub with white, yellow, or +red blossoms preparatory to putting forth leaves. All these changes we +note with pleasure as we ride along in the cool, bracing air of the +early morning. + +At one place is to be seen Chikuni stump, which seems almost like a +stone, and has been a landmark within the memory of the oldest +inhabitant. The majority of trees which are to be seen on this road are +hardwood, but very crooked and scrubby looking, no doubt owing to the +yearly fierce onslaught of fire and also the nature of the soil. Along +the road is one solitary mahogany; a large, spreading tree this is, but +not a very good sample of its kind. There is also a large tree known as +the sausage tree; its immense bean pods, one to two feet in length and a +foot and over in circumference, reminding one of a great piece of +sausage. Numerous acacia are to be seen, and as we approach the river, +five miles from home, we see six large, fine-looking fig trees, their +rich, dark-green foliage furnishing beautiful shade. Although this is +the Myeki River, there is no water where we cross, yet the deep, +bridgeless ravine makes crossing for heavily-laden wagons difficult at +all seasons, and almost impassable during the rainy seasons. Here is a +large village, but we proceed two miles further and come to Mianda +School, where Charlie Sichamba teaches. + +This is not a large village, but it is the home of a number of some of +our best boys; those who have been of greatest assistance in teaching +and in industrial work. The village has been lately moved, and huts are +not yet all completed, nor is the schoolhouse finished. We drive near +and are met by a number of the pupils, for we are always certain of a +welcome at this place. The rain, which has been threatening, begins to +come down, and one of the new huts is given to us. Wood is brought and a +fire is kindled in the center, that we may have breakfast. A mat is +placed on the nicely-swept floor, and on this the tablecloth is spread +and the breakfast placed after it is cooked. This consists of corn +porridge, with milk, bread, butter, eggs, fruit, and coffee if we desire +it. Muguwe sends us milk, for he always sees that we are furnished with +fresh milk when we come here. The boys are given another hut in which to +cook their food. The meal being over, we hand the dishes to one of the +boys to be washed, while we turn our attention to the school and work +for which we came. + +By this time the rain is beginning to abate, and the pupils, about +twenty in number, assemble in another hut for school. Today there are +not quite as many as usual, because there is a wedding in progress. Here +is Muguwe, a tall, odd-looking native, over thirty years of age, and a +Christian, and so far as we can learn he is consistent in his life. +Learning is difficult for him, but he is making progress and is quite +persevering. His wife for a long time was opposed to his serving the +Lord, but she is changing, and we trust that she too may accept Christ +as her Savior. The stepdaughter is also in school and is making progress +in Divine life. There are several other women and some girls and boys. +Some of them seem very slow in accepting Christ, but there has +manifestly been a change in the lives of some, and a number of the old +women are believers. During the last year of drought, when the people +of nearly every village were so zealous in their heathen worship for +rain, this was one of the two who stood true. After school is over, the +older ones are summoned to join with us in worship, and we take the +occasion once more to give them a Gospel message, to which they listen +attentively. Here are Tom's mother, Jim's mother, and Chikaile's mother, +all of whom seem to believe as far as they have grasped the Truth. + +We are especially grieved today, however, because of the wedding which +is progressing, for we knew nothing about it until we were on the +journey. The bride is a Christian girl and has had a good experience, +although she is not yet baptized. She is only about fifteen years old, +or perhaps a little older, and has been given to an unsaved boy, who, +however, has no other wife. We inquired of one of the boys if she wished +to marry him. He looked at us in sort of a pitying manner, as if to say, +"You should know better than to ask such a question," and replied, "They +did not ask her." After the service we go up to the hut of the bride, +and find her not feigning to cry, as some of the brides do, but in +reality weeping most bitterly. At the sight of us her sobs break forth +afresh. We try to comfort her, but what can or what dare we say? We +speak to the mother, who also has confessed Christ, but she is the first +wife in a line of five. She frankly acknowledges that she preferred to +give her daughter to a Christian, but was overruled. The brothers too, +who are Christians, could do nothing, the older relatives having +arranged the affair. Her father is chief of the village and an +influential man. He has always been a friend of the mission, but he +feels that he can manage his own affairs best, and his children are +taught implicit obedience. We know that remonstrance is useless, and +from his conversation it is evident that he thinks he has provided +wisely for his child, because the groom is son of the chief at Kabanzi, +where one of our schools is located, and the young fellow had even +attended school for a few days. The affair might be more serious, and we +hope and pray that in time both may be Christians. + +The next school is four miles farther on this road, at Impongo, and the +teacher there is Singuzu, whose home is at Mianda. He is not so far +advanced in learning, so he recites to Charlie. He is, however, a +conscientious and Spirit-filled Christian. He accompanies us to his +place of teaching. This is a new school, has been in session only about +three months, and is held out in the open air in the shade of a tree; +but they are gathering poles to build a hut. The people had asked +several times for a school, and we finally concluded to give them one. +The teacher is doing his work faithfully, and progress is being made by +the pupils in learning to read; but there are some things in connection +with this school which are making the work very unsatisfactory, and both +the teacher and ourselves think best to discontinue it. After the +recitations are finished a service is held with them and they seem +interested. When the late dinner is over it is decided to go about six +miles west, to Kabanzi, the next school. + +By this time it is somewhat late in the day, but it is hoped that our +destination may be reached before dark. Singuzu, who is a better driver +than the one accompanying us, is asked to go along and drive. This road +is very little traveled and a white man might not be able to find it; +but the natives accustomed to these trackless wilds do not soon become +lost. Nearly the entire distance is through the brush, consisting of +both large trees and short underbrush, so that the journey is more or +less impeded. We travel along at a fair speed for oxen, as the driver is +accustomed to dodging trees and shrubs; but darkness overtakes us before +the village is reached. Progress is now slow, since the veldt from this +to the village is full of the stumps of trees cut off, native fashion, +two or three feet above ground, and we are fearful of running into these +and breaking the wagon. Finally the wagon does become fast and the oxen +must be unhitched until it is extricated. We again enter the wagon and +move on. The welcome sight of the village fires shining out amid the +darkness indicates that the end of the journey is near at hand. As we +approach, a pack of dogs greet us with their loud barking, and light +after light shines out through the open doors of the huts, or from the +courtyard where the men, in the shelter of a semicircle of reeds, sit +and palaver. There is no more pleasing sight to travelers through +African wilds than the bright and cheerful blaze of the indispensable +campfire, which answers for light and heat, for preparing the evening +meal and warding off the wild animals. + +As we reach the village, a number of natives emerge from their huts in +order to ascertain who these intruders are, coming along the back of +the village. On seeing their missionaries they gladly offer their +services to conduct the wagon through the trees and stumps to the +schoolhouse and teacher's hut. Sister Engle and I conclude not to have +the tent pitched for the night, but to have our beds placed in the +large, roomy schoolhouse, which boasts of a good plank door. We have had +a busy day, for we have visited two schools, held two services, prepared +our food, and traveled seventeen miles, so we are soon resting on our +comfortable stretchers. + +In the morning breakfast is prepared early, for the school is to begin +earlier than usual so that we may continue our journey. We, however, +take time to go over to the village and have a chat with some of the +older people. This is Kabanzi village, and it has our oldest and best +school. Before the opening of school services were held here frequently, +and some were interested, but no one gave indications of wanting to +follow the Lord until after school opened. Several boys from this place +were converted while attending school at Macha. The teacher is Jamu, a +careful, painstaking and faithful Christian. He is greatly interested in +the spiritual as well as the intellectual advancement of his pupils. He +carefully reads and explains the Word to them day by day, and he is a +good evangelist. While in school at Macha he was always one of our best +workmen in laying brick, sawing and thatching. There are generally about +fifty pupils enrolled in this school and about thirty-five in daily +attendance. Twelve have been baptized and nearly all the rest are in the +Inquirers' Class. + +We enter the schoolroom and the pupils march around the building, then +enter and take their places on the logs extending across the room. All +kneel and repeat the Lord's prayer, and then teaching begins. A few are +reading the charts, some are in the first book, a number in the "Bible +Stories," while a few are reading the Gospels of St. Mark and St. +Matthew. A number of pupils are married men and women. The women bring +their babies, and yet with the interruption caused by these, they have +learned to read well and are in the "Bible Stories." They exhibit +remarkable perseverance, for they not only attend school, but dig in +their gardens, carry wood and water, grind their meal, and prepare their +food. On Sunday they walk nine miles to Macha to church, for they, +together with their husbands, are Christians, or seeking to be such. The +teacher says that they started to school first; then their husbands +followed. The husbands also work in the gardens, build huts, hunt game +for food, and part of the time work for the white man in order to obtain +money for taxes and clothes. They have also lately been buying cloth to +make dresses for their wives, and one day I came upon one of the men +carefully washing his wife's dress. The Gospel is making them better +husbands and more careful and considerate of their wives. The heathen +worship, with its attendant evils, together with vice, beer, tobacco, +and kindred habits, is being banished from these few homes at least. +When other villages were worshiping their rainmakers, these too were +daily worshiping, but it was the Lord of lords Whom they worshiped. When +the older ones desired to resort to their heathen worship, the +Christians said, "No; if you do we shall build a kraal of our own." This +means that there are many in the village who are not Christians, and +some of them stoutly oppose the school; but the chief is favorable, as +some of his children are Christians. There are also several old women in +addition to the pupils who are breaking away from their old worship and +accepting Christ. There is one _old_ woman here who has come out very +bright in her Christian experience. She meets with much opposition, but +she does not waver. + +[Illustration: Sikaluwa.] + +After we have remained one session of school, some of the older people +are called and we have a service for very interested listeners. The boys +then inspan the oxen and we proceed west to Kabwe School, about five or +six miles distant. These are the people with whom we held a week's +service over a year before. At this place our tent is pitched and we +prepare to spend the night. This is a Baila village, and at first +Sikaluwa had charge of the school, as he was brought up among that tribe +and is a good Christian boy. He did good work for nearly a year, but he +did not wish to continue. We were in doubt as to whom we should send to +teach them; and after praying over the matter we concluded to consult +the Christians in Members' Meeting, and inquire if anyone felt led of +the Lord to take up the work there. At the close of the meeting we were +surprised to have Chikaile come and say that he was willing to undertake +the work, the Lord helping. He had been at the mission for some years +and was quite capable of teaching. He is also one of the most cheerful +and willing workers, but he is so young, perhaps only seventeen years +of age. Because he is such an earnest and conscientious Christian, +however, he was given the privilege, and has succeeded beyond our +highest expectations. The kraal had just been moved and divided, so that +he was obliged to build a new hut for himself. This he speedily did, and +then began a schoolhouse which, with a little assistance from the +villagers, was soon under roof. There is nothing lazy about the boy, and +the school, as well as the work of the Lord, is progressing in his +hands. He soon learned to know the people and the kind of lives they are +leading, and is fearless in exposing sin, although he is always mild and +humble in his demeanor. With him, as well as with other teachers who do +not teach in their homes, a boy is sent, so that he need not be alone. + +In this school we find twenty-four pupils in attendance, among them two +elderly women. One of these, the mother of another Christian woman, has +made a good confession. She entered school and we smiled somewhat +incredulously, thinking that she was too old to learn; but our next +visit to the school revealed the fact that she was making decided +progress, and it seemed evident that she would soon be able to read the +Gospel. After school was over, services were held and the people invited +back for night meeting. We then prepared our food. During these visits +to the villages the people sometimes bring a present of a chicken, a +dish of peanuts, some milk, or whatever they think we might relish. +Occasionally, on a hot day, it is a cup of ibwantu. This is a gruel made +of the meal of native grain into which has been placed crushed root with +an acid flavor. It is usually made in the evening and consumed the next +day. It is not alcoholic, and has a very cooling and refreshing taste. +It will be brought in a large cup, and as is their custom, the donor +usually takes a sip first to show there is no poison in it. + +When this village was moved and divided into three parts, we about gave +up the thought of opening school again, but the chief was not satisfied, +and promised that if school was reopened he would see that the children +came together to learn; so we agreed to send a teacher. Six very nice +young girls came from Kabwe to stay at Macha and attend school; but +others entered to fill up the ranks and the work continues. + +Early the next morning we start on our homeward way. The road takes us +back past Kabanzi, and there we turn south toward Macha. On the way we +come to a place which at first sight might be taken for an old deserted +native village; but a closer inspection reveals the fact that the huts +were never finished. Here is the framework of twelve large, nice-looking +huts. Some have just been rightly started; of some the walls are +finished, and on others the builders had begun to put on the roof. Poles +are scattered all around, and some poles are at a distance from the +huts, but near the road, and look as if those who were carrying them had +dropped them hastily. The whole has the appearance as if a number of +people were busily engaged in building a village and were surprised by +an enemy in the midst of their labors and slain, their work unfinished. +What does it mean? This question we asked ourselves on first seeing it. +The answer was this: They were indeed surprised by an enemy, but that +enemy was death. The headman sickened and died; his son followed. +Concluding that the place was bewitched, the rest at once abandoned it +and went elsewhere, leaving all those fine, straight poles to rot. + +On the journey homeward we again come to Myeki River, for this is a very +winding stream, and this crossing is several miles farther west. At this +place there is another school. We stop near the village, where Mafuta +the teacher lives, and he, with some of the rest, comes out to meet us. +We have driven about ten miles this morning and now hastily prepare +breakfast and eat. Some tall, beautiful bottle palms grow in this +vicinity, and while we are eating, the teacher brings us the fruit of +one, a part of which is eaten with relish. We then start off on foot for +the school, which is about two miles distant, near another village. We +leave the lead boy to herd the oxen, while the little herdboys of this +village drive their cattle ahead, so that they may learn in school and +at the same time watch the cattle. + +As we walk along the path, through this somewhat dense forest, let me +tell you something of this teacher, Mafuta. He is older than the most of +our boys and was already grown when we reached Macha, seven years ago. +He at that time worked for us a few months. For over three years, +however, he showed no inclination to want to learn or be a Christian, +and seldom came to Church. He was just like the other natives in the +village and indulged in their sinful and lazy ways. Finally he informed +one of the boys that he was coming to school until he had sufficient +money to take a wife. We were quite skeptical when we heard it; for we +did not expect that he would remain long, and then too school was not a +money-making place. He came and applied himself to school work. He was +slow and dull, but he was diligent and made progress. + +He entered the Inquirers' Class and the Lord found a way into his heart. +One day in the class, when a number came forward for special prayer, he +became in earnest and found what he sought--pardon for his dark past, +and peace in his soul. As he took his seat his face wore a look of +new-found joy, and he arose and testified as to what the Lord had done +for him. In work also he was faithful, and he soon learned to handle the +oxen in plowing and in the wagon, and thus he received higher wages. By +close economy he gradually was able to get a little money ahead. In time +he was baptized. He gained one of the nicest girls in the neighborhood +as his wife, is married by Christian marriage, and is now teaching this +school. He is not as quick at learning as some, but he is faithful and +painstaking and is a living Christian among them. When we look at him +and think how little faith we had in the early days, we are reminded of +the words, "The Lord seeth not as man seeth; for man looketh on the +outward appearance, but God looketh on the heart." + +We visit the school and find twenty-four scholars assembled, the +teacher's wife among the number. It is a new school, but the pupils are +making advancement. After services we retrace our steps to the waiting +wagon, and then return to the mission, which is only about four and +one-half miles distant. We have spent three days out, have visited five +schools and have traveled thirty-six miles in somewhat of a circle. We +have enjoyed the trip and the change from the routine of the mission +station, but a person is glad to reach home, after a few days spent on +the veldt. + +Again we desire to visit Chilumbwe School, which is about seven miles +northeast. Here the natives were asking for some time for a school. We +had come to the conclusion, however, that no more schools would be +opened until the people of the village erect some sort of a schoolhouse. +They are always ready to promise that they will build, but if a teacher +is provided before the house is built they generally are slow in +carrying out their promise. Then too it is not best to make the work too +easy for them. They appreciate most that which has cost them something. +The work among them is new, and as the schools are especially for +children, and money is always scarce, we dare not expect too much at +present. If they are eager for a teacher they can at least build a +schoolhut, feed their teacher, buy their own books, and these they are +expected to do. Even the poorest buy their books, and if they cannot +bring money they often bring a chicken or grain in pay. The people at +Chilumbwe finally managed to build their hut and school began a month +ago. + +We again take the wagon and go north as before, but soon turn off toward +the east. We pass through Chikuni, where formerly there was a large +village, and over under that large, spreading fig tree Sikaluwa taught +school. But sickness entered the village; the chiefs wife died, a child +followed, and then a young man, all in the same village. All these died +in a similar manner which, from the description given afterwards, must +have been _spinal meningitis_. They thought it was witchcraft and became +afraid of one another. So they separated, some going one way, some the +other. We pass several kraals on the way and finally reach Chilumbwe. + +The chief of this village is rich in cattle and is an unusually +intelligent and well-bred native. Jim is the teacher. Yes, he is that +short, well-dressed native with the colored glasses on. He is the one +who lost his eye and is very sensitive on account of the defect; but he +is a splendid fellow, faithful, humble, and an excellent workman. He is +moreover a sincere Christian, anxious to know and do the will of his +Heavenly Father. + +As the wagon approaches the schoolhouse we are greeted by the chief and +a number of the pupils, for they are expecting the visit. It is decided +to have services first so that the older ones need not remain. The +pupils, together with some men and women from the village, gather around +a large shade tree, the chief taking a prominent position. All the +pupils join lustily in the singing, seemingly anxious to impress upon +their missionaries that they are progressing in that at least. A service +is then held, after which the pupils gather in the little schoolhouse +for school. There are about fifty pupils already enrolled in this +school, some being from neighboring kraals, and there are over thirty in +attendance today. They are starting out well, but how many will continue +remains to be seen. The pupils are all young men and boys, and the +teacher informs us that they will not allow the women and girls to +attend school. We cannot force them to let the girls come, nor is it +wise to attempt it, so we just look to the Lord and wait until He can +find a way into their hearts. At all the other out-schools the girls +generally outnumber the boys. This being a new school, nearly all read +on the charts; only two or three have passed that stage, but we have two +beginning books along and they are bought. There are no Christians at +this place, and the one that seems most interested in the Gospel is the +chief's son. He was badly mauled by a leopard a few months ago, and the +chief brought him to the mission to be treated. Sister Engle very +successfully treated his wounds; and while he was with us he came under +the influence of the Gospel, and we believe he is reaching out for more +knowledge of his Savior. + +All the schools have now been visited. There is a call for a school +southwest about six miles, and there is a teacher for it; but the people +have not yet erected a schoolhouse. The villages near have asked for +schools and have had them; but many have opposed the Gospel and the work +has not proved a success among them. There are a few in each village who +are Christians, and some of them are with us and others coming to +day-school. We are not yet discouraged with these at our doors who have +been hardening their hearts against the truth. God has yet among them +some who will come out strong for Him, for we know that His Spirit is +striving with them and with some it will not strive in vain. It can be +seen that a knowledge of God is slowly spreading over the country and +real miracles are being performed in the hearts of some of these +erstwhile heathen; miracles greater than the raising of Lazarus from the +dead. Souls are being raised to walk in newness of life and are living +witnesses to those around them of Christ's power to save to the +uttermost. _God's love_ has bridged the immense chasm in the lives of +some between the densest, darkest paganism and the glorious Light of the +children of men. But we must be patient with the slow ones, for it is +not always those who are the most ready to accept who are the most +stable. Some delay long years and finally come out strong and vigorous +for Christ. Where only rude, coarse heathen songs were heard, anthems of +praise to God now arise, and daily prayer ascends. + +It may be seen that the natives are governed by a number of petty +chiefs, and that they frequently change the location of their villages. +This makes the work among the out-schools more difficult; but others are +calling for schools, and already the past year over 200 children were +enrolled in the out-schools, in addition to those at Macha; and this +where only a few years ago the names _school_ and _God_ were not known. +We are touching only a small spot thus far and see a great wall of +darkness just beyond; a darkness which we occasionally seek to +penetrate. Other bodies of missionaries also are laboring in some +sections of the country, but there is much land ahead yet to be +possessed, and many natives still in darkness who can say, "No man +careth for my soul." + +The salvation of Africa rests largely upon the native converts, and we +rejoice for the manner in which some are coming to the help of the +Lord's cause, and we trust they may ever have the prayers of all who are +interested in the evangelization of this vast continent. Natives, +however, cannot do the work alone. There always is need of white workers +to oversee and direct the work, or it will not advance satisfactorily. +We believe the Lord desires us to ask largely these latter days, but in +this instance we shall be modest in our request, and that is, that the +way be open to start at least one more station of white workers in +Northern Rhodesia. We believe the Lord is speaking to some hearts to +open such a work. Is He not speaking to others to give of their prayers +and money for the work? Many of God's children could pay $200 or $300 a +year toward the support of a white worker, and others $40 to $50 for a +native evangelist, and not need to deny themselves any of the comforts +of life in the doing of it. May God help us to see and appreciate our +privileges in Christ Jesus. + + + + +CHAPTER FIFTEEN + +Conclusion + +I desire to protest against the unholy thirst for statistics; it is +perfectly impossible to put into statistics the results of mission +work.--Lord Selborne, Late High Commissioner for South Africa. + + +In the preceding pages it has been the aim to present some of the work +done, as it has been our privilege to see it. Much more might be written +about the progress of the work at Matopo, Mapani, and Mtyabezi Stations, +for they have a number of excellent out-stations, manned by experienced +and Spirit-filled natives, and are doing encouraging work; but that +would be beyond the scope of this little volume. We must leave that for +the able and efficient missionaries at those places and content +ourselves with a summary of the work. + +But first we desire to refer to the work at Johannesburg, for during the +last few years some of our missionaries there have been laboring in +connection with our Mission Board. Over four years ago Mr. and Mrs. +Isaac Lehman severed their connection with the other missionary bodies +and began building up a separate work, and a little later began laboring +under the auspices of the Church. They began the new work under +difficulties, but they are persevering and hard workers, both in +temporal and spiritual lines, and the work shows excellent results from +their consecrated labors. Brother Lehman has worked hard to put up +suitable buildings, and their station is now equipped with a good house +and church. As I have not had the privilege of visiting that place since +the opening of their new work, they were asked to give a statement of +what is being done. This they did under date of August, 1914, as +follows: + + Our main or central station is at the City Deep Mine, where we + reside. The Compound only a short distance from the mission at this + place has over 4,000 native laborers in it at one time. This is a + very promising mine, and has just lately been opened, and has an + apparently long life before it under normal conditions. It will in + time employ many more men as it keeps enlarging. We have open doors + to this vast multitude of men coming from all parts of South + Africa. There are many tribes represented and we can preach the + Gospel to them; and we praise the Lord that some have been saved + and are seeking to know more of the Lord Jesus Christ. + + We have four other mission stations besides this central station. + One is Florida Mission, where there is a nice number of baptized + members and we believe a good work is being done. At the Goch + Station the Lord has given some blessings and some souls have been + added to the Church. At that place the mine has given us permission + to apply to the government for a mission site, and the native + brethren have already contributed a nice sum of money to put up a + suitable church building. Praise the Lord! At the consolidated + Langlaagte there is a good work going on; a number have been saved + and united with the Church. We have had some blessed seasons at + this place owned of God. The Bantjes has had its share of tests, + but we praise God that souls have also, at this place, been added + to the Church, and the work is progressing. + + From all the stations, one main and four out-stations, fifty-seven + souls have been baptized. We praise God for + all these, and for a number who have heard God's call to them to + give themselves to Jesus to work for Him and labor for the + salvation of their own people through Jesus' precious blood. Thank + God there is power in the blood to save any and all who will come. + There are a goodly number who are soon ready for baptism, and we + are trying to do all we can to get them fully established in the + deep truth of the Bible, a full and complete salvation, pardon + cleansing, and the filling of the Holy Ghost. Some have taken a + very bold stand for God, and are now preparing themselves for the + Lord's work. Our desire and prayer is that we get a band of really + consecrated, sanctified, Spirit-filled ones, who are willing to + suffer the loss of all things for Jesus, and be made a living power + to go out among their own people and help win them for Jesus. + + Dear reader, will you pray with us for all these who are yet without + the True Light, that they will soon have the privilege of hearing the + glad news which is to all and for all? We have very good meetings in + the large hospitals, where are many afflicted and dying. This is a + good opportunity to give them the Word of God. + + Isaac and Alice Lehman. + +[Illustration: Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg.] + +Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Eyster have also been laboring in Johannesburg and +have been valiant and consecrated messengers of the Cross. For several +years they had charge of the Training School for Native Evangelists near +Johannesburg, in connection with the Compound's Mission under Mr. A. W. +Baker. They have always been members of the Brethren's Church and +several years ago concluded to sever their connection with the other +mission and also labor in connection with our Mission Board. They +secured a good opening at Boxburg, and with much self-sacrificing labor +built house and church and opened an encouraging work. Souls were saved +and some added to the Church. Then the labor troubles in Johannesburg +caused the mines in the vicinity to close down and the work was checked. +We trust, however, that it is only a temporary check and that the work +may move on under the blessing of God. + +Nothing has yet been written about the last station opened, and this +would be incomplete without reference being made to it. I refer to the +one at Mandamabge, near Selukwe, Southern Rhodesia. Mr. and Mrs. Levi +Doner had been stationed for several years at Mapani Mission and had +done most excellent work there in the Master's cause. They, however, +thought that that station was near enough to Matopo and Mtyabezi +Missions and it could be left in charge of the native teacher, +Nyamazana, so that they might be free to open another work in new +territory. For this purpose Brother Doner, accompanied by Brother Frey, +made an extensive tour among the natives, and he finally decided to +locate at the above-named place, over 200 miles by wagon road from +Matopo Mission. + +In the latter part of August, 1911, Brother and Sister Doner, together +with Brother Steckley and Sister Book, started for this place, and +opened a work with every prospect of success. There were many natives +surrounding them, who at once showed an interest in the work. They were +there only about two months, however, before Brother Doner became sick +and was called to lay down his life in the undertaking. From the time he +had set foot on African soil, over ten years before, he had entered +heart and soul into the work of the Lord and had labored continually +with the exception of over a year's furlough in America. No labor was +too arduous, no distance too great, no hardship feared, if thereby he +might carry the Gospel to the people. Many long journeys he made by +foot, by bicycle, by wagon, in exploring the country and in preaching +the Gospel. Perhaps he was overzealous in the work at times, and if he +had spared his strength more he might be still with us. Who knows? He +gave the Gospel to many natives and helped many into the light. He +certainly laid down his life in behalf of the Africans. While his body +rests out in the wilds, far from other white people, we believe he is +already enjoying some of the fruit of his labors. + +Sister Sallie Doner, his wife, was obliged at that time to return to +America on furlough. On account of some difficulty arising in reference +to the location of the mission, it was finally decided to abandon the +place. Sister Doner and Brother Steckley are now ably laboring in the +interests of the work at Macha, and Sister Book at Mtyabezi. + +There are now in connection with the African work twenty-one white +missionaries, including those who are home on furlough, and thirty +native teachers and evangelists. There have been over 300 natives +baptized, and there are more than that number in the Inquirers' Classes. +As the various out-schools are just being properly launched, the work +may be expected to bear fruitage in geometrical ratio. Take for instance +last year, 1913; there were 109 additions to the Church at the various +missions. These figures are not large, and they indicate only a small +proportion of the work really accomplished by the missionaries. As +Brother Steigerwald says: "Now that the leaven has been put into the +meal no one can stop it from expanding." Praise God for that! + +We desire to express our appreciation of the English Government in +aiding mission work and in making it possible for missionaries to labor +unmolested in their colonies; also in suppressing many customs harmful +to the natives, and which hinder the progress of the work. We rejoice +also to know that the government, as well as the better class of the +general public, as they become more familiar with the work and aims of +the missionary are realizing the benefit to the country and are showing +their appreciation of the same. + +The Church has come up nobly to the help of the Lord's work, both by +their prayers and means, so that all have been generously supported and +all the stations of white workers have good, substantial brick houses +and churches, and the workers have been well cared for. May the Lord +abundantly reward the donors and the Foreign Mission Board, who have +given the work their undivided support. + +We rejoice that a beginning has been made, but it is only a beginning. +Only a very small portion of the great continent of Africa is covered by +these pages, and that only imperfectly covered. The Lord has +condescended to bless the work ever since its inception. It has never +gone by leaps and bounds, but what was done has been solid and we hope +lasting. We rejoice that we have been permitted to see natives emerge +from the dense darkness of heathendom--how dark that is none but those +who have lived among them can realize--and become beacon lights in +their neighborhood, living witnesses of the truth that the Gospel of +Christ "is the power of God unto salvation to every one that believeth," +to the pagan African as well as to the enlightened European or American. + +Many a time people have said to me, "The people in Africa are more eager +to become Christians than those in America, are they not?" It seems to +me that there is little difference in the people; if there is any +difference in the results it is because of the difference in the methods +employed. The missionary, as he goes to his field of labor, is after +souls. That is his business; it is not a side issue. It is his business +and he makes a business of it and uses business methods. He must begin +at the bottom and learn to know his people and enter as far as he is +able into their surroundings and their lives. He makes a study of them. +He knows from experience that the salvation of these precious ones has +meant much travail of soul and deaths oft. He knows that some one has +"filled up that which is behind of the afflictions of Christ," in behalf +of this part of the body of Christ. He knows they have been followed +with anxious, solicitous eyes from the very first when they were infants +in Christ, puny perhaps, and his heart was made glad, but with exceeding +trembling lest the many pitfalls should entrap them before their eyes +were really open to see or understand the danger. He knows some one has +shed many bitter tears over the stumbling of some of these babies. He +may now rejoice to see some grown to manhood, as it were, in Christ and +being divinely used of Him in saving others. + +[Illustration: Mr. and Mrs. Isaac O. Lehman and Family and Some of Our +Workers, Members and Enquirers. Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 Are +Satisfactorily Engaged in Work and in Preparation for the Work as +Evangelists.] + +The true missionary keeps at it. It is his central thought day after day +as he teaches these dirty, careless ones about him to become cleanly and +do their work properly, how he can lead them on to desire a clean life +and seek for it. His last thought and prayer at night, as he lays his +head on the pillow, is for guidance as to how to win these precious +souls, and sometimes he is led, like his Master, to spend much of the +night in prayer. + +Some people, looking on from a distance, think there is a great deal of +romance connected with mission work; that it is full of striking +incidents and delightful adventures, and that it is a grand opportunity +to see something of the world. On my first furlough home, ten years ago, +a little niece gave a glowing account of a friend of her mother, and of +the countries that friend had visited. In conclusion the child naively +added, "She has traveled almost as much as a missionary." This child +unwittingly voiced the opinion of many a grownup; for to some would-be +missionaries the prospect of foreign travel occupies a large space in +their field of vision, but to the genuine missionary foreign travel is +but incidental to mission life; it is the bridge over which he passes to +some obscure corner of the earth where he is hid away from the world's +gaze and surrounded by an entirely different class of people, of strange +language and uncouth ways, often repulsive to the natural eye and to +refined tastes. For months he may never see a white face, save those of +his colleagues. He does not go with the expectation of finding a house +already made to order and everything else he needs, but he is ready to +go into the wilds, if needs be, and make a home for himself. He does +not go just because he is willing to do certain things in the mission +field; but he is willing and ready to do whatever he finds to do, and to +go wherever the Lord tells him to go, and to stay as long as the Lord +bids him stay. + +There is, however, a fascination about mission work, as every one who is +in the field will testify. Furloughs are taken because it is an absolute +necessity for the missionary to go away for a time from the unhealthy +climate and from the absorbing labors which sap the very vitality. But, +when he is in his native land, the missionary feels that he is out of +his element. He is out of touch with the business and interests which +seem to engross the heart and soul of every one about him; and he is +homesick to be back again to his field of labor and to see those dear +dark faces. He feels that there is only one thing worth living for, and +that is to lift up Christ among the heathen so that He may draw all men +unto Himself. He feels that the time is short and that the "King's +business requires haste," and that our Lord's return is imminent. + +Again, as long as a person thinks he is making a _great sacrifice_ in +leaving home, friends, and his business, and going as the Lord's +messenger among the benighted of earth, he would better remain at home. +If he is really God-called, the day will come when he will realize +something of the inestimable privilege of being His ambassador to +nations in darkness without any knowledge of the Light of Life. All +earthly things will be lost sight of and his heart will burn within him +to lift up Christ among the heathen. He will gladly go through +anything, that the blessed Gospel may be proclaimed to the ends of the +earth. + +Some one may inquire, "What should I study to prepare me for the mission +field?" A careful study of these pages will, we think, answer that +question. But to sum it up we would say, anything, everything you can, +both in school and out; one never knows until he reaches the field what +he may meet with. The Bible of course, first, last, and always, and all +the knowledge with it one can acquire; then too temporal work of various +kinds, medicine, nursing, hygiene, farming, building, teaching, +housekeeping, and mission methods. If one has acquired a fair knowledge +of these and thinks he is well prepared, then let him be humble enough +to acknowledge that he knows only the A B C's of mission work; and that +when he has reached his field of labor, the Lord, and perhaps some of +His messengers already in the field, will help him to put together into +words the letters he has learned, and he may add to it day by day as the +occasion may require. If one has this humility and willingness to adapt +himself to the work, after reaching the field, it will supply much of +his lack of knowledge along some lines. + +My object in writing thus plainly is not to frighten any one of God's +children from the work of the Lord; but rather to help each one +carefully to count the cost, and to disabuse anyone's mind of false +notions of mission work. Judging from the stability and perseverance of +those already connected with the work, we have reasons to believe that +all did count the cost; but the work is only begun, and we trust many +more will come to swell the ranks and push on the work into the darker +regions. + +It has been a little over a century since the first missionaries began +their work along the coast of South Africa; but it is only within the +last half century that there has been much visible fruit of the work +done. Even then the missionary labors have been chiefly along the coast +of the continent and along the navigable rivers which are the natural +highways into the interior. Much of Central Africa is still unpossessed. +In the report of the last Great Missionary Conference it was estimated +that there are ninety millions of the population of Africa as yet +untouched by the Gospel. Stupendous figures, indeed, to say nothing of +the many millions whose knowledge of the Gospel is as yet very +superficial! + +We have already mentioned some of the difficulties in the way of +reaching the people; the great expanse of country to be traversed, the +deadliness of the climate, and the high cost of living, which in Africa +exceeds that of any other country. Again, the many languages and +dialects, 823 in number, together with the illiteracy of the people, are +a serious handicap; but with God "all things are possible." + +The present generation is beholding wonderful strides in opening the +vast continent to commerce and civilization, and above all to +Christianity. Railroads are rapidly being built all over the country, +uniting the interior with the coast. At the present rate it probably +will be a matter of only a very few years until Cape Town will be +connected to Cairo by steam through the center of the continent. This +central railway is soon to be linked with Benguella, on the west coast, +which will form a more direct route into the interior. Twenty years ago +Rhodesia had no railroads; in fact, it can scarcely be said there was a +Rhodesia; for it was only in its formative period. Now it has 1,466 +miles of railway owned and operated by the government, with an +additional 204 miles extending to the seaport, Beira, on the east coast. +These are only a portion of what has been built in the country. North, +south, east, and west other lines have been built. + +[Illustration: Boxburg Mission Station. Built by Mr. Jesse Eyster.] + +When one considers the vast amount of labor required, and the all-but +insurmountable difficulties to be overcome in railroad building in +Africa, the work already accomplished is little less than miraculous. +The Lord raised up men of large hearts as well as large means, to +finance much of this. All the building material has to be carried long +distances, and many of the ties and telegraph poles are of iron on +account of the destructive white ants. The traveler can now take the +train at Cape Town and travel to the border of Congo State, a distance +by rail of 2,140 miles, for $75, second class. He can have a comfortable +compartment, furnished with all modern conveniences, and obtain his +meals on the train at a very moderate cost. Freight rates are still high +on account of the immense distance to be traversed and the small amount +of goods required to supply Central Africa. + +The railroads are fast changing conditions, helping to solve the +question of gaining access to the people, and providing good homes and +wholesome food for the missionaries. There are, however, many millions +yet outside the railroad belt who are in need of the Gospel; but even +these can be reached with much less difficulty than formerly. + +The language question too is rapidly being solved, and great praise is +due the noble army of men and women who have labored long and hard to +reduce to writing the seemingly meaningless jargon which first greets +their ears in going among the natives. Many languages have been reduced +to writing by the missionaries, and the Scriptures have been translated +into them. Grammars, dictionaries, and textbooks of various kinds have +been written. This work, together with the various schools and the +united labors of the missionaries, is aiding in reducing the number of +languages. There are, however, many tribes which are yet without +missionaries and without the Gospel in their language, and they are +waiting for some one to say, "Here am I, send me." This is a task worthy +of the greatest minds of the age; to reduce to writing an African +language and to translate into it the Gospel which tells of GOD'S LOVE +THROUGH JESUS CHRIST, to those downtrodden, hag-ridden, demon-worshiping +souls. + +The time is opportune for spreading the Gospel in Africa; and if every +child of God were willing to do his part or her part in the work, the +present generation could see it carried to all tribes. + +None of the difficulties in the way are insurmountable. When, the "Great +Commission" was given it was backed up by the indisputable assertion, +"ALL POWER IS GIVEN UNTO ME IN HEAVEN AND IN EARTH. GO YE THEREFORE, ... +LO, I AM WITH YOU ALWAY, EVEN UNTO THE END OF THE WORLD. AMEN." + + + * * * * * + + +Transcriber's Notes: Punctuation has been normalized. Obvious printer +errors have been corrected. Both spellings of gray/grey appear. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of South and South Central Africa, by +H. Frances Davidson + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA *** + +***** This file should be named 37728.txt or 37728.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/7/2/37728/ + +Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |